MODEL 916x/926x
T1 ACCESS MUX
TECHNICAL REFERENCE
Document No. 9161-A2-GH30-31
July 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Regulatory Information
EMI Warnings
!
WARNING:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The authority to operate this equipment is conditioned by the requirements that no modifications will be
made to the equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Paradyne.
!
WARNING:
To Users of Digital Apparatus in Canada:
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment
regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
9161-A2-GH30-31
July 1998
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Regulatory Information
Important Safety Instructions
1. Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual.
2. All installation and service must be performed by qualified service personnel, as opening or removing covers may
expose dangerous voltage points or other risks.
3. This product is intended to be used with a 3-wire grounding type plug – a plug which has a grounding pin. This is
a safety feature. Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation. Do not defeat the purpose of the
grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter.
Prior to installation, use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth
ground. If the receptacle is not properly grounded, the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician
has corrected the problem.
If a 3-wire grounding type power source is not available, consult a qualified electrician to determine another
method of grounding the equipment.
The rear I/O panel has provision for a permanently connected protective earthing (grounding) conductor. Connect
a 6-14 AWG conductor to this solderless lug connector, identified by the protective earth symbol.
4. Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and to
protect it from overheating, these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered. Always install the housings
in a vertical, upright position to allow for proper cooling.
5. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the
power cord.
6. General purpose cables are provided with this product. Special cables, which may be required by the regulatory
inspection authority for the installation site, are the responsibility of the customer. Use a minimum 26 AWG line
cord for network connections.
7. When installed in the final configuration, the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and
regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed. If necessary, consult with the appropriate regulatory
agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance.
8. A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings. If
products installed in separate buildings are interconnected, the voltage potential may cause a hazardous
condition. Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if
necessary, implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products.
9. Filler panels are provided with the housings to cover unused slots. You must install filler panels on the unused
slots to avoid possible injury from electrical shock and to maintain compliance with FCC rules.
10. In addition, if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits, take the following precautions:
— Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
— Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
— Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the
network interface.
— Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
— Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.
— Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
July 1998
9161-A2-GH30-31
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Regulatory Information
Government Requirements
Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to connection to the telephone network be included in the
installation and operation manual. Specific instructions are listed in the following sections.
United States
Notice to Users of the Telephone Network
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the equipment is a label or silk screened text that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number for this equipment. If requested, please provide this
information to your telephone company.
If your T1 equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may discontinue your service
temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as
soon as possible. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Your telephone company may make changes in facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the
proper operation of your equipment. If so, you will be given advance notice so as to give you an opportunity to
maintain uninterrupted service.
No repairs may be performed by the user. Should you experience difficulty with this equipment, refer to the Warranty,
Sales and Service Information section on page A.
Make the T1 network connection using a Universal Service Order Code (USOC) type RJ48C jack for single-line
installations and type RJ48H jack for multiline installations. Specify both the Service Order Code 6.0N, as well as the
proper Facility Interface Code, to the telephone company when ordering the T1 line. The T1 equipment can be
configured to support any of the framing format and line signaling techniques shown in the table below. The T1
equipment’s configuration must correspond to the T1 line’s parameters.
Facility Interface Codes
Code
Description
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU-1SN
1.544 Mbps superframe format (SF) without line power
1.544 Mbps SF and B8ZS without line power
1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF without line power
1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF and B8ZS without line power
The Federal Communication’s Commission (FCC) requires that the end user (person responsible for operation and
maintenance of the equipment) file an affidavit with the local exchange carrier when connecting unprotected
Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) to the public T1 network. The T1 equipment is considered an unprotected CPE
because the analog through transmission gain paths, associated with the voice cards, are user adjustable. This
affidavit is required whenever digital terminal equipment without encoded analog content and billing protection is used
to transmit digital signals containing encoded analog content which is intended for eventual conversion into
voice-band analog signals and retransmitted on the network. This affidavit shall affirm that either no encoded analog
content or billing information is being transmitted or that the output of the device meets Part 68 encoded analog
content or billing protection specifications. An affidavit form has been provided for your convenience.
9161-A2-GH30-31
July 1998
D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Regulatory Information
!
WARNING:
In order to maintain compliance with Part 68, FCC Rules and Industry Canada’s CS-03 Specification, the
transmit gain settings associated with the E&M, FXO and FXS Voice APMs must be set to ensure that:
— The absolute signal power of the encoded analog signals, other than live voice and network control
signaling, will not exceed –12 dBm when averaged over any 3-second interval.
— For network control signals (such as DTMF), the level will not exceed –3 dBm.
The E&M, FXO and FXS voice lines are to be connected to locally attached equipment only. Under no
circumstances should voice lines be used on exposed (outside) plant lines.
After the telephone company has installed the requested service and jack, you can connect the equipment to the
network. An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug are provided with this equipment. This equipment is
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68
compliant.
Canada
Notice to Users of the Canadian Telephone Network
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets
telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to
the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The
customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some
situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or
alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines
and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly
important in rural areas.
CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate
electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum
number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of
any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the
devices does not exceed 5.
If your equipment is in need of repair, refer to the procedures described in the Warranty, Sales and Service
Information section on page A.
July 1998
9161-A2-GH30-31
E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
About This Guide
H
H
H
H
H
Document Purpose and Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Document Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Product-Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
1
2
About the T1 Access Mux
H
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
H
Management and Control
H
H
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Configuring Local Management Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Creating a Management Link Through the COM Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Configuring an External Device (Connected to the COM Port) . . . . . 2-3
Configuring End-to-End Management Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Management Control Using the ESF FDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Management Control Using an EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
H
3
Applications
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and E&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and APL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data, FXS and E&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and Drop & Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Channel Bank Replacement and Additions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Off-Premises Extension (OPX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Direct Inward Dial (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Video Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Consolidated T1 Access of DDS Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
4
User Interface
H
H
H
H
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Async Terminal User Interface Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Menu Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Main Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Screen Field Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
What Affects Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Screen Work Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Navigating the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Keyboard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Screen Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Selecting from a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Selecting a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Making Input Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Switching Between Screen Work Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Accessing the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
H
H
5
Setting Up
H
Considerations When Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Selecting a Management Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Logins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Adding System Identity Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Configuring the T1 Access Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Recommended Order of Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Configuration Option Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Changing Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Saving Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Configuring T1 and DSX-1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Configuring the Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Configuring the DSX-1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Configuring Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Configuring Sync Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Configuring Voice Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Configuring OCU-DP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Copying Port Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
H
H
H
H
H
H
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
H
Assigning Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Assigning DSX-1 Timeslots to the Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
DSX-1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Assigning Network 2 Timeslots to Network 1 Interface Timeslots . . . 5-43
Network to Network Signaling Assignments and Trunk
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Assigning Voice Ports to DSX-1 or Network Interface Timeslots . . . . 5-44
Assigning Sync Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Assigning OCU-DP Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Clearing Port Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Setting System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Setting User Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Setting Up the Communication Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
H
H
Setting Up the Communication Port to Support an External
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Setting Up to Support a Telnet or FTP Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Configuring for Alarms and Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Setting Management and Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Setting Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Setting Up for SNMP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Setting Up SNMP NMS Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Setting Up for SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Setting Up and Placing a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
H
H
H
H
6
Security
Limiting Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Limiting Async Terminal Direct Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Limiting Telnet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Controlling External Device Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Controlling SNMP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Disabling SNMP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Creating a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Deleting a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
H
H
H
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
7
Displaying System Information
H
H
H
H
H
Displaying System and NAM Identity Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Displaying APM Identity Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Displaying System and Test Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Displaying Voice APM Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Displaying Cross Connect Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Displaying Network Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Displaying DSX-1 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Displaying Port Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Displaying Device Name and SNMP System
Identification Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
H
Viewing Network and Sync Data Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
What Statistics Can Be Collected? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Network Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Sync Data Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Displaying Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Selecting Performance Statistics Intervals for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Clearing Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
System Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
System Health and Test Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Health and Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Self-Test Results Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Test Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
H
H
H
8
Operation and Maintenance
H
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Starting a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Supported SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Dialing Out and Sending SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Maintaining COM Port Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Displaying Directory Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing Directory Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing Device Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
H
H
H
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
H
Hot Swapping of APMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
APM Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
APM Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
NAM Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Downloading Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Performing an Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Backing Up Your Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Resetting the T1 Access Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Resetting the T1 Access Unit from the Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Restoring Access to the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
H
H
H
H
H
H
9
Troubleshooting
H
H
H
H
What Are the Troubleshooting Features? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
How Do I Know There Is a Problem? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
T1 NAM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
T1 NAM Test Jack Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9161 Single T1 NAM Test Jack Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9261 Dual T1 NAM Test Jack Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Dual DSX APM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9109 Dual DSX APM Test Jack Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Test Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Sync Data APM Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
OCU-DP APM Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Voice APM Front Panel LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
System Alarm Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Viewing Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
ASCII Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
System Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Automatic Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Manual Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Tests Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Interface Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Line Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Payload Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Repeater Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Remote Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Sending and Monitoring Pattern Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
H
H
Data Port Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
DTE Loopback (DTLB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
DTE Payload Loopback (DTPLB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Data Channel Loopback (DCLB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
V.54 Remote Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Sending and Monitoring Pattern Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Voice Port Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Digital Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Analog Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Line Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Test Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Force and Monitor Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
OCU-DP Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Sending a Latching Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Starting/Stopping Other Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
OCU-DP Local Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
DDS CSU/DSU Latching/Nonlatching Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
OCU Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
DS-0 Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Line Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Data Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
OCU-DP Remote Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Device Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Test Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Starting and Stopping a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Aborting All Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Determining Test Status and Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A Menus and Configuration Worksheets
H
H
H
H
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Recording Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Channel Assignments Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
B IP Addressing
H
H
Selecting an IP Addressing Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
IP Addressing Scheme Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Direct Management Links to Remote T1 Access Units . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Routing to Remote T1 Access Units on the Same Subnet . . . . . . . . . B-4
Routing to Remote Access Units Using Different Subnets . . . . . . . . . B-5
Routing to Remote T1 Access Units Using Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Assigning IP Addresses and Subnet Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
C SNMP Traps
H
H
H
H
Trap: warmStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Trap: authentificationFailure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Traps: linkUp and linkDown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Traps: Enterprise-Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
D SNMP Cross-Reference
E Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
H
COM Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
COM Port-to-PC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
COM Port-to-Terminal/Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
COM Port-to-Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Gender Adapter/Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
LAN Adapter and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
T1 Network Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
DSX-1 Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
T1 Line Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
EIA-530A Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
EIA-530A-to-V.35 DTE Adapter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
EIA-530A-to-RS449 DTE Adapter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
EIA-530A-to-X.21 DTE Adapter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Voice APM Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
FXO/FXS Voice APM Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E&M Voice APM Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Extension Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
OCU Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
OCU Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
T1 Mass Termination Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-26
RJ48H Connector Pinouts for T1 Mass Termination Cable . . . . . . . . E-26
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
F Technical Specifications
G Equipment List
Glossary
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Document Purpose and Intended Audience
This manual contains information needed to properly set up, configure and verify
operation of the 916x/926x T1 Access Mux. It is designed for system designers,
engineers, system administrators, and operators.
Document Summary
Section
Description
Chapter 1
About the T1 Access Mux. Provides an overview of the
components and features of the T1 access unit.
Chapter 2
Management and Control. Contains the steps you
need to provide management connectivity to the T1
access unit.
Chapter 3
Applications. Shows some typical T1 access unit
applications.
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
User Interface. Describes the async terminal interface.
Setting Up. Describes how to configure the T1 access
unit for operation in your network.
Chapter 6
Security. Describes how to administer security,
including log-in procedures, and limiting user interface,
telnet, and SNMP access.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Displaying System Information. Describes how to
display information about your system.
Operation and Maintenance. Provides information for
startup and monitoring, dialing out to send SNMP
traps, maintaining call directories, hot swapping APMs,
downloading, upgrading, and resetting the T1 access
unit.
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting. Explains troubleshooting and test
procedures of the T1 access unit.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Section
Description
Appendix A
Menus and Configuration Worksheets. Contains a
graphical representation of the system configuration
options and worksheets for you to record your
selections.
Appendix B
IP Addressing. Provides guidelines for selecting an IP
addressing scheme.
Appendix C
Appendix D
SNMP Traps. Lists SNMP traps.
SNMP Cross-Reference. Provides a cross-reference of
SNMP MIB objects and user interface commands.
Appendix E
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments. Describes
cables to be used with the T1 access unit, as well as
their connectors and pin assignments.
Appendix F
Appendix G
Glossary
Index
Technical Specifications.
Equipment List. Lists related equipment.
Defines acronyms and terms used in this document.
Lists key terms, acronyms, concepts, and sections in
alphabetical order.
Conventions Used
Convention
Indicates
Italic
Variable information (e.g., slot s, indicating slot
number 01, 02, etc.).
Menu selection sequence:
The selections to be made from a menu or
selections from within a menu before
performing a procedural step (e.g.,
Main Menu→ Status→ System and Test Status).
Brackets [ ]
Multiple selection choices (e.g., [Current
Configuration/Customer Configuration 1/
Customer Configuration 2]).
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Product-Related Documents
Document Number
Document Title
9000-A2-GN14
2-Slot and 5-Slot Housing Wall Mounting Kit
Installation Instructions
9000-A2-GN15
9000-A2-GN16
2-Slot Housing Installation Instructions
5-Slot Housing with AC Power Supply Installation
Instructions
9000-A2-GN17
5-Slot Housing and FrameSaver 9000 Series Access
Carrier AC Power Supply Installation Instructions
9000-A2-GN1A
9000-A2-GN1B
2-Slot Power Supply Installation Instructions
DC Power Supply for 5-Slot Housing Installation
Instructions
9000-A2-GN1C
5-Slot Housing with DC Power Supply Installation
Instructions
9000-A2-GN1D
9000-A2-GX42
9000 Series Access Carrier Installation Instructions
Affidavit Requirements for Connection to Digital
Service
9109-A2-GN10
9109-A2-GN11
9109-A2-GN12
9109-A2-GN13
9109-A2-GN14
9109-A2-GN15
9161-A2-GK41
9161-A2-GK43
9109 Sync Data Application Module (APM)
Installation Instructions
9109 E&M Analog Voice Application Module (APM)
Installation Instructions
9109 FXS Analog Voice Application Module (APM)
Installation Instructions
9109 Dual DSX Application Module (APM)
Installation Instructions
9109 FXO Analog Voice Application Module (APM)
Installation Instructions
9109 OCU-DP Application Module (APM) Installation
Instructions
916x T1 Access Mux Software Release 1 to
Release 2 Upgrade Instructions
9161/9261 T1 Network Access Module (NAM)
Upgrade Instructions
9161-A2-GL10
9161-A2-GN10
916x/926x T1 Access Mux Quick Reference
9161 Single T1 Network Access Module (NAM)
Installation Instructions
9261-A2-GN10
9261-A2-GZ10
9261 Dual T1 Network Access Module (NAM)
Installation Instructions
9161 Single T1 Network Access Module (NAM) to
9261 Dual T1 NAM Upgrade Instructions
Contact your sales or service representative to order additional product
documentation.
Paradyne documents are also available on the World Wide Web at:
http://www.paradyne.com
Select Service & Support → Technical Manuals
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Reference Documents
CSA-22.2 No. 950
CSA 108-M1983
FCC Part 15
UL 1950
Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-Based
Internets: MIBII. RFC 1213, March 1991
Definitions of Managed Objects for the DS1 and E1 Interface Types. RFC 1406,
January 1993
Evolution of the Interfaces Group of MIB II. RFC 1573, January 1994
Definitions of Managed Objects for RS-232-like Hardware Devices. RFC 1659,
July 1994
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the T1 Access Mux
1
Overview
The T1 Access Mux is the interface between your customer premises equipment
and a T1 network. The 916x/926x product line supports the following T1 Access
Mux configurations:
H
H
H
9161 Single T1 NAM or 9261 Dual T1 NAM in a 2-slot housing
9161 Single T1 NAM or 9261 Dual T1 NAM in a 5-slot housing
9161 Single T1 NAM or 9261 Dual T1 NAM in a 9000 Series Access Carrier
All configurations are referred to as the T1 access unit in this document.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter:ChapName
Components
The T1 access unit consists of either a 9161 or 9261 Network Access Module
(NAM) installed in a two-slot or five-slot chassis, along with optional Sync Data,
DSX, or voice Application Modules (APMs) for particular applications. Up to 14
NAMs can also be installed in the 14-slot access carrier.
Ground Screw
and Label
Slot 01 Slot 02
Slot 02 Slot 01
Front View
Rear View
(without Bezel)
98-15129-02
Fully Loaded 2-Slot Housing
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the T1 Access Mux
Ground Screw
and Label
Slot 01
Slot 05
Slot 01
Slot 05
Front View
(without Bezel)
Rear View
98-15138-02
Fully Loaded 5-Slot Housing
Slot 01
Slot 01
Slot 14
Slot 14
Front View
Rear View
98 -15743-02
Fully Loaded Access Carrier
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the T1 Access Mux
The 9161 Single T1 NAM is equipped with:
IN
H
H
H
One T1 network interface
One DSX-1 drop and insert port
Two DTE interface ports
IN
NTE1
NTE
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
NTE2
DXS
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
E1TMON
NTE
The 9261 Dual T1 NAM is equipped with:
MNO
OUT
OUT
H
H
Two T1 network interfaces
Two DTE interface ports
IN
IN
E2TMON
DXSMON
OUT
OUT
916
9261
OK
OK
ALM
ALM
TST
BKP
SIG
TST
BKP
SIG
NTEWORK
NTE1
OOF
ALM
SIG
OOF
ALM
1–
OOF
ALM
SIG
OOF
ALM
1–
NTE2
DXS
OK
P
OK
PRO
2–
2–
T
T
O
O
K
K
496-15206
97-15645
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the T1 Access Mux
There are six APM types:
H
The Synchronous Data APM, which supports:
IN
— Four ports, each supporting EIA-530A, V.35,
RS449, or V.11/X.21
OUT
IN
OUT
— Rates of Nx56 or Nx64
IN
— Standard RS232-like (RFC 1659) MIB
OUT
IN
— Enterprise MIB for testing, statistics, and
some configuration functions
OUT
OK
OK
See the 9109 Sync Data Application Module (APM)
Installation Instructions for more information.
1–
SIG
OK
H
H
The Dual DSX APM, which supports:
— Two DSX-1 drop and insert ports
2–
OOF
O
K
3–
ALM
O
K
4–
SIG
O
K
OOF
See the 9109 Dual DSX Application Module
(APM) Installation Instructions for more
information.
ALM
The E&M Voice APM, which supports:
— E&M Type I, II, IV, or V circuits
496-15154
97-15649-01
— mĆlaw PCM coding of analog voice line
— Enterprise MIB for testing and
some configuration functions
See the 9109 E&M Analog Voice
Application Module (APM) Installation
Instructions for more information.
H
H
The FXO Voice APM, which supports:
1
109FXS
190FX
OK
OK
— FXO circuits
O
— mĆlaw PCM coding of analog voice line
— Enterprise MIB for testing and some
configuration functions
See the 9109 FXO Analog Voice Application
Module (APM) Installation Instructions
for more information.
The FXS Voice APM, which supports:
496-15141
496-15139
97-15648
— FXS circuits
— mĆlaw PCM coding of analog voice line
— Enterprise MIB for testing and some
configuration functions
See the 9109 FXS Analog Voice Application Module (APM) Installation
Instructions for more information.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the T1 Access Mux
H
The OCU-DP APM, which supports:
— Either two or six ports
— Speeds of 56 kbps and 64 kbps, as well as 4-wire
Switched 56
— Enterprise MIB for testing and some
configuration functions
See the 9109 OCU-DP Application Module (APM)
Installation Instructions for more information.
OK
NOTE:
1-TST
2-TST
The following NAM I/O versions are required to use the
OCU-DP APM:
— SINGLE T1 NAM (870-3389-8000) for the
9161 Single T1 NAM
— DUAL T1 NAM (870-2585-8000) for the
9261 Dual T1 NAM
98-15927
98-15926
Features
The T1 access unit offers the following features:
H
Upgradability. There are three housings to select from: 2-slot, 5-slot and
14-slot access carrier. You can start with a 2-slot housing, and move your
NAM and APM to a 5-slot housing at a later time. Only NAMs may be used in
a 14-slot housing.
— The 2-slot housing holds one NAM and APM pair.
— The 5-slot housing holds one NAM and up to four APMs, allowing
expansion capability as your network needs grow.
— As you need additional DTE or voice ports for your network applications,
you can add APMs.
H
Modular Design. Any NAM or APM can be physically removed from one
housing and moved to another.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the T1 Access Mux
H
Hot Swapping. Provides the ability to insert and remove APMs without
powering-down the housing, and without having to reconfigure the cards
each time they are moved.
The APM configurations travel with the NAM. When an APM is inserted or
removed, the NAM senses that an APM has been inserted or removed, and
can automatically make the appropriate changes to screens, configuration
options, and MIB objects.
— When an APM is inserted in a previously unassigned slot, the T1 access
unit configures the APM using the factory default configuration.
— When the same type of APM is inserted into a previously assigned slot,
the T1 access unit uses the configuration for the APM that previously
occupied the slot; the APM does not have to be reconfigured.
— When another type of APM is inserted into a previously assigned slot, an
alarm and trap are generated for the slot. If accepted, the factory default
configuration is loaded for the new APM type; if rejected, the new APM is
ignored and the previous configuration is retained.
H
The NAM can be removed without powering down the unit; however, all
system functionality is lost. When a NAM is removed and inserted into
another housing, it applies the NAM’s configurations from the previous
housing to the current housing.
— If the NAM is moved from a 2-slot housing to a 5-slot housing, the
operator can use the configuration of the APM in slot 02 of the previous
housing. APMs in slots 03 – 05 will be configured with the factory default
settings.
— If the NAM is moved from a 5-slot housing to a 2-slot housing, the factory
default configuration options are loaded.
— If the NAM is moved from a 2-slot or a 5-slot housing to a 14-slot
housing, the factory default configuration options are loaded.
H
H
Multiple User Interfaces. Provides multiple means for configuring,
operating, managing, and monitoring the unit.
— Menu-Driven User Interface. Provides an easy to use, menu-driven
interface for configuring and managing the T1 access unit locally or
remotely.
Access to the user interface can be through an async terminal (or other
VT100-compatible terminal), PC emulation, modem, or a Telnet session.
— LED (Light-Emitting Diode) Monitoring. Provides LEDs on the circuit card
faceplates that indicate the status of the card’s operation.
Network Management Capability.
— SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Management. Provides
network management via an external SNMP management system using
industry-standard and Paradyne-specific MIB (Management Information
Base) objects.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the T1 Access Mux
H
Multiple Management Paths. Provides multiple methods for sending/
receiving management data.
— Embedded Data Link (EDL). Provides a path for management data over
a performance channel between two nodes. The performance channel
uses 8 Kbps of bandwidth, and is embedded in the synchronous data
channel. If you choose this method, you must have a Sync Data port.
— Direct Data Link (DDL). Provides a path between two nodes over the
T1/FT1 link itself, embedding the management data in the T1 bundle.
The management data always uses 1 DS0 (64 Kbps).
— Facility Data Link (FDL). Provides the management path over the FDL of
the DS1 extended superframe (ESF). Using this method does not use
any customer data bandwidth, but requires end-to-end connectivity. If you
select this method, you may need to work with your service provider to
ensure that ESF framing is used and the required FDL management path
exists end-to-end.
— COM Port. Provides a physical path over the communications
port/interface for local user interface access or network IP connectivity
data management.
H
H
H
IP Connectivity. Supports connectivity within an IP network for up to 300 IP
host and/or network routes. Using the four management paths described
above, provides IP routing for SNMP, Telnet, and file transfer protocol (FTP)
messages connectivity without requiring direct connections.
DSX-1 Drop and Insert port(s) allows DTEs/PBXs that support the DS1
signal format to share the T1 network with other high-speed equipment. One
DSX-1 port is provided on the 9161 T1 NAM. The DSX APM (for use with the
9261 T1 NAM) provides two drop/insert ports.
Alarm and Fault Condition Indication. Provides the capability of attaching
a terminal or printer to display/print alarm messages.
Alarms or traps that are generated include: power supply, loss of signal, out
of frame, alarm indication signal, excessive error rate, primary and secondary
clock failure, yellow alarm signal received, misconfiguration, and APM failure.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the T1 Access Mux
H
Extensive Testing Capability. Provides the capability to maintain the T1
access unit and diagnose device and network problems via:
— Menu-Driven User Interface. Accessed using an async (or other
VT100-compatible) terminal, PC emulation, or Telnet, provides T1
network, DSX-1, sync data port, voice port, and device (lamp) tests.
Loopbacks that can be selected for an interface include: line, payload,
repeater, remote line, DTE, DTE payload (V.54 loop 3), data channel,
remote data channel (V.54 loop 2 or FT1), V.54, digital, and analog.
Pattern Tests that can be selected for an interface include: QRSS,
all zeros, all ones, 1-in-8 (T1 interface only), 3-in-24 (T1 interface only),
15
20
63, 511, 2047, 2 -1, 2 -1, and 2-byte (user defined).
Tone and signal tests can also be selected for voice APMs.
— SNMP MIB Object Test Commands. Supports the same testing capability
as the user interface. Paradyne MIBs can be downloaded from our World
Wide Web site. See page A of this manual for our World Wide Web site
address.
— Test Jacks. Located on the T1 access unit’s faceplate, support using
external test equipment to perform break-in testing and monitoring of the
T1 network and DSX-1 interfaces. Remove the housing’s bezel to access
these jacks.
H
Extensive Monitoring Capability. Provides status information to help you
keep track of and evaluate the unit’s and network’s operation via:
— Status Branch. Provides system and test status, voice card status for all
eight ports for each card, channel status for all DS0 assignments for all
time slots of the T1 network interface, channel status for all DS0
assignments for all time slots of the DSX-1 interface, and all port
assignments for each voice and data port of both the NAM and APM
cards.
— Front Panel. Provides test jacks to monitor the unit’s T1 network and
DSX-1 interfaces, and LEDs to monitor the unit and its interfaces.
Test jacks. Accessed by removing the housing’s bezel, provide T1
network and DSX-1 monitoring.
LEDs. Visible without removing the bezel, provide unit and interface
monitoring that includes T1 network and DSX-1 interface received signal
status, as well as synchronous data port statuses.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the T1 Access Mux
H
Extensive Statistics Gathering. Provides a complete view of the network’s
and each data port’s performance through the statistical data collected from
those interfaces to assist in determining the duration of a condition or event.
— A total of 96 intervals (24 hours) of user and Telco statistical data is kept,
seven per screen page, over a 24 hour period, in 15-minute intervals.
— A total of 32 intervals (8 hours) of Synchronous Data Port statistical data
is kept, over an 8 hour period, in 15-minute intervals.
— Quick and easy access to any of the 96 sets of statistics is provided by
selecting a specific interval or occurrence timeframe. (Specifying an
occurrence timeframe is useful when you know about what time a
specific event occurred.)
— You can select a set of statistics to display at the following times:
following an event, preceding an event, immediately preceding and
following an event, or only those statistics that occurred at or after the
event that is the specified interval or time.
— Statistics collected measure or count the following: errored, unavailable,
severely errored, and bursty errored seconds, as well as controlled slip
seconds and loss-of-frame counts. In addition, yellow alarm, loss of
signal, excessive error rate, frame-synchronization bit error, and
line-code violation counts are kept for each 15-minute interval.
— The worst interval for each statistic is provided as an additional aid in
selecting statistical information surrounding trouble spots.
H
H
Configuration Upload/Download and Software Download Capability.
Provides quick, cost-effective software upgrades, and quick transfer of
configuration options to and from nodes using a standard file transfer protocol
(FTP).
Security. Provides multiple levels of security, which prevents unauthorized
access to the unit.
Security can be controlled by:
— Disabling any form of access to the unit.
— Requiring logins (login ID/password/access level combinations), with
three access levels to select from: read-only, limited-access, and
full-access.
— Enabling SNMP management, and specifying a community name and
access level Read or Read/Write.
— Enabling SNMP management, and specifying the IP addresses of only
selected NMSs.
H
H
Redundant power supply. Redundant load sharing supply (both AC and DC
versions available) for the 5-slot housing and the access carrier. Protects the
system from a service outage if one power supply fails.
Wall-Mount Bracket. Allows one 5-slot, or up to two 2-slot housings to be
mounted on a wall.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Management and Control
2
Overview
This chapter provides the steps needed to provide management connectivity to
the T1 access unit. You need to select and configure:
H
H
A method of local management connectivity for T1 access units.
A method for end-to-end management connectivity across the network.
See Appendix B, IP Addressing for an IP addressing scheme that fits the local
and end-to-end management connectivity methods.
Configuring Local Management Control
When managing the T1 access unit locally, you can establish a management link
in one of two ways. You can:
H
H
Create a management link directly connected through the COM port.
Connect through an external device (modem, LAN adapter, etc.) to the COM
port.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Management and Control
Creating a Management Link Through the COM Port
When the COM port is configured as the IP management link (Net Link), the user
interface is also accessible via Telnet. Although not shown in the illustration
below, a LAN adapter can be connected to the COM port to provide Ethernet or
Token Ring connectivity, or an async terminal (or other VT100-compatible)
interface can be directly connected to the COM port, as well.
Customer Data
T1
Access
Unit
DTE
Port
DCE
Port
T1
Network
WAN Link
Router
NET
Port
AUX
Port
COM
Port
Management Data
Physical Connection
Customer Data
• 2 Cables
– 1 for Management Data
496-15182
– 1 or more for Customer Data
The configuration options below show what should be configured for a
management link. These configuration options are configured from the user
interface based upon the Port Type selected, Asynchronous or Synchronous.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ User Interface→ Communication Port
Port Use Set to Net Link and
Port Type Set to Asynchronous
Port Use Set to Net Link and
Port Type Set to Synchronous
— Data Rate (Kbps)
— Character Length
— Parity
— Clock
— Data Rate (Kbps)
— Stop Bits
— Ignore Control Leads
See Table 5-10, Communication Port Options, in Chapter 5, Setting Up.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Management and Control
When the communication (COM) port is configured as the IP management link,
the async terminal interface is accessible through Telnet.
When this is the case, you also need to enable Telnet session configuration
options.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ User Interface→ Telnet/FTP Session
You must also have an IP address and a subnet mask assigned.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management and Communication
See Table 5-12, Telnet/FTP Session Options, in Chapter 5, Setting Up.
In addition, if you want to access the configuration files (upload, download), or
download new firmware files to the T1 access unit, you must set the FTP Session
configuration option to Enable.
Configuring an External Device (Connected to the COM Port)
The T1 access unit can be managed remotely by connecting an external device
like a modem or PAD (packet assembly/disassembly) facility to the COM port.
T1 Access
Simple
ASCII
Interface
Unit
T1
Network
WAN Link
Async or
VT100
Terminal
-or-
SNMP
NMS
COM
Port
VT100 Emulation
and Telnet or
NMS using SNMP
External
Modem
External
Modem
PSTN
97-15188-01
Using this out-of-band example, configure call processing using the following
pertinent configuration options, configured from the user interface.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ User Interface→ External Device (COM Port)
— External Device Commands
— Dial-In Access
— Port Usage
See Table 5-11, External Device (COM Port) Options, in Chapter 5, Setting Up.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Management and Control
Configuring End-to-End Management Control
When managing the T1 access unit remotely, you can establish a management
link across the network in one of three ways. You can:
H
H
H
Use the Facility Data Link (FDL) for a point-to-point ESF T1 link.
Use an Embedded Data Link (EDL) associated with a Sync Data port.
Use a Direct Data Link (DDL).
Management Control Using the ESF FDL
You can configure the T1 access unit to use FDL as a management link if
available for a point-to-point, ESF T1 link, where FDL is end-to-end.
T1 Access
Unit B
T1 Access
Unit A
LAN
T1
Network
NMS
Physical Connection
FDL
496-15183
As shown in the example, in-band management is accomplished through the FDL
between the two T1 access units. Management data for T1 Access Unit B goes to
T1 Access Unit A, which then routes it into the FDL between the units. This
example assumes that the NMS (or Host) that is attempting to access T1 Access
Unit B is attached (using SLIP or PPP) via the COM port on T1 Access Unit A.
Set the Management Link configuration option to FDL.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Network Interface
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Management and Control
Management Control Using an EDL
In the configuration below, the T1 access unit’s management data is multiplexed
with customer data by taking 8 Kbps of the allocated data on a port to use as the
EDL.
There is one configured EDL through the network to each unit:
H
A shared circuit for management and customer data
T1 Access
Unit C
Port y
Cluster
Controller
T1 Access
Unit A
T1 Access
Unit B
T1
Network
Port 1
FEP
Port 2
Router
Port x
Router
Physical Connection
EDL
496-15184
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Management and Control
This page intentionally left blank.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
3
Overview
This chapter provides information about the following applications:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and E&M
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and APL
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data, FXS and E&M
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and Drop & Insert
Channel Bank Replacement and Additions
Off Premises Extension (OPX)
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Video Conferencing
Consolidated T1 Access of DDS Circuits
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data
This application supports two ports of high speed data. The following diagram
depicts a router and a mainframe.
The data moving through the FEP and the cluster controller is heritage data that
is not available on the LAN. Because the T1 access unit includes two data ports,
the router-based data can easily be added to the network without disrupting the
existing network operations.
The data rates available to the two applications can be easily changed. This
allows the router connection to increase in speed. It also allows the FEP-based
data to reduce its data rate as the amount of data transmitted on this route
declines naturally over time.
Cluster
Controller
FEP
Terminal
Router
Router
Mainframe
T1 Access
Unit
T1 Access
Unit
496-15189
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and E&M
Analog PBXs (shown in the following diagram) typically communicate on trunk
lines (lines between switches) with a type of communications protocol called
E&M.
The T1 access unit fully supports this application. The T1 access unit supports up
to three 8-port E&M APMs. In the example shown in the diagram, eight time slots
could be assigned to the voice ports, two time slots to the FEP-Cluster controller
link, and up to 14 time slots to the router link. This provides the following:
H
H
H
Voice – Eight telephone calls
FEP-CC – 128 kbps
Router – 896 kbps
Downtown HQ
Cluster
Controller
FEP
Terminal
T1 Access
Unit
T1 Access
Unit
Router
Router
Mainframe
E&M
PBX
E&M
PBX
Analog
PBX
Analog
PBX
496-15190
Suburban Office
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and E&M
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and APL
In the example shown in the following diagram, E&M analog voice APMs are
used to transport analog private line (APL) modem traffic instead of voice traffic.
In some parts of the country digital circuits are hard to obtain, and many
applications do not require the higher speeds of digital circuits. This application
allows customers to use existing modems while reducing the cost of using them
by eliminating access lines.
The T1 access unit supports up to three 8-port E&M APMs. A typical application
consists of:
H
H
H
Modem Lines – Eight lines
FEP-CC – 128 kbps
Router – 896 kbps
E&M is used to transport the analog information, and no E&M signaling is
involved. In fact, the E&M signaling leads are disconnected in this application (the
operating mode is set to Transmit Only). See Chapter 4, Setting Up, for more
information on configuring voice ports.
Downtown HQ
Cluster
Controller
FEP
Terminal
T1 Access
Unit
T1 Access
Unit
Router
Router
Mainframe
E&M
(APL Modems)
497-15191-01
Suburban Office
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and APL
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data, FXS and E&M
In the example shown in the following diagram, data and regular voice traffic are
transported by the T1 access unit and the APL modem. E&M-type voice (in
Transmit mode only) is being used to transport the APL modem traffic, while FXS
is employed to transmit regular voice traffic.
Another variation of this application would have the lines connected to the
telephones terminate at a switch in the cloud, where they could be connected to
any other telephone in the world.
Downtown HQ
Cluster
Controller
FEP
Terminal
T1 Access
Unit
T1 Access
Unit
Router
Router
Mainframe
FXS and E&M
Voice
497-15192-01
APL
Modems
Warehouse
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data FXS and E&M (Transmit Only Mode)
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and
Drop & Insert
In the example shown in the following diagram, voice and data are mixed. The
Drop and Insert feature of the T1 access unit allows voice information to be sent
from a remote site to a large site that contains a digital PBX. People at the distant
end can make calls.
Multiple routers and data lines require adding a Sync Data APM to the T1 access
unit, because more than two data ports are needed.
Administration
Service
Router
Headquarters
T1 Access
Unit
T1 Access
Unit
Router
Router
Sales
Mainframe
T1 or DSX-1
Drop and Insert
FXS
PBX
Digital
PBX
Regional Office
97-15193-01
T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and Drop & Insert
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Channel Bank Replacement and Additions
In the example shown in the following diagram, the T1 access unit is a
replacement for a channel bank. The T1 access unit is more than just a
replacement for a channel bank. It can do many things that a channel bank
cannot do. A channel bank has no data ports, it passes data as if it comes from
external modems or DSUs. The T1 access unit provides both data and voice
ports. A channel bank is a “dumb” device, and therefore cannot be managed from
a remote site, while the T1 access unit can be managed via SNMP.
Public Switched
Telephone Network
T1 Access Unit
with E&M and
4-Wire
E&M Circuits
FXS APMs
PBX
D4
Analog
PBX
Switch
FXS Circuits
to Dial Modems
97-15194-01
Channel Bank Replacement
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Off-Premises Extension (OPX)
The configuration shown in the following diagram permits a branch location to
access the PBX line as if it were locally connected. Likewise, the branch office
phones appear as if they are locally connected. A call between the two sites does
not result in any long distance charges.
Branch Office
Headquarters
T1 Access
T1 Access
Unit
Unit
Router
Router
PBX
Line
FXO
FXS
X114
X114
PBX
Mainframe
X113
X112
X111
97-15672
Off-Premises Extension
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
The configuration shown in the following diagram allows an incoming call to dial
to an extension from the PBX, without going through the main switchboard.
T1 Access
Unit
DID Lines
Central
Office
(CO)
T1 Facility
FXO
PBX
97-15673
Direct Inward Dial
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Video Conferencing
The OCU-DP APM supports Switched 56 video as shown in the following
example. Here, an external video codec is connected to OCU-DP ports using
external Switched 56K DSU/CSUs. This connection can be up to 18,000 feet. The
OCU-DP APM converts the 56K digital format from the line side into a digital DS0
format. This DS0 format contains the 56K of data plus the necessary signaling
information required to set up the call to the far-end video equipment.
4-Wire
Switched
56K Facility
Video
Codec
Video
Codec
4-Wire
56K Facility
Switched
56K
DDS/PSTN
T1FT1
T1 Access
56K
DSU/CSU
Integral 56K
DSU/CSUs
Mux with
OCU-DP
Cards(s)
98-15972
Video Conferencing
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Consolidated T1 Access of DDS Circuits
The following example illustrates how to use the OCU-DP APM to reduce facility
costs associated with point-to-point 56/64K connections by consolidating these
lines into a single T1 facility. The T1 Access Muxes shown in this application
could also be used to support both voice and high-speed data.
Typically, T1 Access Muxes are placed at concentration points where a single T1
line is less costly than multiple (typically four or five) 56K lines. If DSUs are left at
both ends of the circuit, proprietary DSU Network Management Systems can be
used. Or, circuits associated with remote DSUs can be terminated directly on a
Sync Data APM at the Data Center to eliminate Data Center DSUs.
The OCU-DP APM does not support subrate DDS rates. Subrate applications can
be supported by installing a Paradyne 3610 or similar device configured for
56/64K line speed.
56 kbps
Data Center
56 kbps
T1
OCU-DP
Card
DCE
Manager
56 kbps
56 kbps
56 kbps
1 or 2
T1s
T1
Public
Network
DSU
Carrier
Remote DSUs
98-15971
Consolidated T1 Access of DDS Circuits
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
4
Introduction
The T1 access unit uses menu-driven asynchronous (async) terminal interface
menus and screens. Along with the LED status indicators on the front panel, the
menu-driven interface provides feedback and status on the:
H
H
H
H
T1 access unit
DSX-1 and Network T1 interfaces
Synchronous data ports
Voice ports
Async Terminal User Interface Access
You can access the user interface:
H
H
Locally through a direct connection to the communications port via an async
terminal (or other VT100-compatible terminal) or PC emulation.
Remotely through a Telnet session, although only one user interface session
may be active at one time.
Network Management
Manage the T1 access unit via an SNMP management system connected to the
communications port or through a remote in-band connection.
Menu Hierarchy
The menu hierarchy represents the organization of the system’s menus and
screens. Refer to the enclosed Quick Reference for a pictorial view of the menu
hierarchy.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
Main Menu Screen
Access to all of the T1 access unit’s tasks begins at the Main Menu screen, which
has four menus or branches.
The login’s access level appears at the top of the screen unless no security has
been set up. Menu branches are filtered based on effective security level, which
is the lower of the Session Access Level (Telnet/FTP Session options) and the
Login ID access level (Administer Logins under the Control branch).
Select . . .
To . . .
Security Level
Status
View diagnostic tests, voice interfaces, cross
connections, statistics, and T1 access unit
identity information.
1, 2, 3
Test
Select, monitor, and cancel test for the system’s 1, 2
interfaces.
Configuration
Control
Display and edit the configuration options.
1, 2, 3
Control the user interface for call setup, device
naming, date and time, login administration,
and system alarm relay cut-off (for the 5-slot
housing). Also, initiate a power-on reset of the
system.
1
Screen Field Types
Three types of screen fields are available on the async terminal.
Use screen field . . .
Menu selection
Input
To . . .
Display a list of available functions for user selection.
Add or change information on a screen.
H Underlines in the field value or selection indicate an input
or edit field.
Display
Display configuration information and results from
performance and system-specific tests.
H No underlines in the field value or selection indicate a
display-only field.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
What Affects Screen Displays
What appears on the screens depends on:
H
H
Current configuration – How your T1 access unit is currently configured.
Security access level – The security level set by the system administrator
for each user.
H
Data selection criteria – What you entered in previous fields or screens.
Screen Work Areas
There are two user work areas:
H
H
Screen area – Where you input information into fields.
Screen function key area – Where you perform specific screen functions.
Following is a sample async terminal interface screen.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
Menu Path
Model Number
Access Level
Date and Time
main
Device Name: Node A
Access Level: 1
Company Name 9162
01/26/96 23:32
Device
Name
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Configuration
Control
Screen
Area
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Screen
Function
Key Area
Ctrl-a to access these functions
Save
Exit
System
Message Area
Screen Format
Menu path
Description
Menu selections made to reach the current screen.
Customer-assigned identification of the system.
Currently assigned security access level.
Vendor company name.
Device name
Access level
Company Name
Model number xxxx
The T1 access unit’s model number:
H 9162 – 9161 Single T1 NAM in 2-slot housing
H 9165 – 9161 Single T1 NAM in 5-slot housing
H 9262 – 9261 Dual T1 NAM in 2-slot housing
H 9265 – 9261 Dual T1 NAM in 5-slot housing
H 9161 – 9161 Single T1 NAM in 14-slot housing
H 9261 – 9261 Dual T1 NAM in 14-slot housing
Date and Time
Screen area
Date and Time kept locally by the system
(24-hour clock).
Selection, display, and input fields for monitoring and
maintaining the system.
Screen function keys
Specific functions that can be performed on the
screen.
System messages and
field values
System-related information, valid values for input
fields, and System Health and Status messages.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
Navigating the Screens
You can navigate the screens by:
H
H
H
Using keyboard keys
Switching between the two screen work areas
Using screen function keys
Keyboard Keys
Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screens.
To . . .
Press . . .
Move cursor between the screen area and
the screen function keys area
Ctrl-a
Return to the previous screen
Move cursor to the next field
Esc
Right Arrow (on same screen row), or
Tab (on any screen row)
Move cursor to the previous field
Left Arrow (on same screen row), or
Ctrl-k
Move cursor one position to the left. If the
cursor is at the beginning of a field,
Backspace has no effect.
Backspace
Move cursor to the first character of the
previous field (backtab)
Ctrl-k
Display the next valid value for the field
Delete character that the cursor is on
Spacebar
Delete (Del)
Move cursor up one field within a column on
the same screen
Up Arrow or Ctrl-u
Move cursor down one field within a column
on the same screen
Down Arrow or Ctrl-d
Right Arrow or Ctrl-f
Move cursor one character to the right if in
edit mode
Move cursor one character to the left if in edit Left Arrow or Ctrl-b
mode
Redraw the screen display, clearing
information typed in but not yet entered
Ctrl-l
Accept entry or display valid options on the
last row of the screen when pressed before
entering data or after entering invalid data
Return (Enter)
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
Screen Function Keys
All screen function keys (located in the lower part of the screen) operate the
same way (upper- or lowercase) throughout the screens.
These keys use the following conventions:
For the screen
Select . . .
M or m
E or e
N or n
O or o
L or l
And press Return to . . .
Return to the Main Menu screen.
Terminate the async terminal session.
Enter new data.
function . . .
MainMenu
Exit
New
Modify
Modify existing data.
Delete
Save
Delete data.
S or s
R or r
Save information.
Refresh
ClrStats
Update screen with current information.
C or c
Clear network performance statistics and refresh the
screen.
U or u
D or d
PgUp
PgDn
Display the previous page.
Display the next page.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
Selecting from a Menu
You select from a menu to get subsequent menus or screens so you can perform
desired tasks.
" Procedure
To make a menu selection:
1. Tab or press an arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection. Each
menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from
position to position.
2. Press Return. The selected menu or screen appears.
3. Continue Steps 1 and 2 until you reach the screen you want.
Refer to the Quick Reference to guide you through menu selections.
Selecting a Field
Once you have reached the desired menu or screen, select a field to view,
change, or issue a command. Select a field from within a menu in the same way
you select from a menu – press the Tab or right arrow key.
Example:
Selecting Control from the Main Menu, selecting Administer Logins, then entering
or changing security information.
Making Input Selections
You can enter information into a field in one of several ways. Once the field is
selected, you can:
H
H
Manually type in (enter) the field value or command.
Example:
Entering abc as a user’s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen (from the
Control menu/branch).
Type in (enter) the first letter(s) of a field value or command, using the
character matching feature.
Example:
When configuring an FXS voice port’s operating mode with the Operating
Mode configuration option/field selected (values FXS, FXSDN,
FXSDN/WINK, PLAR and DPO), entering f or F displays the first value
starting with f – FXS. In this example, entering fxsd or FXSD would display
FXSDN as the selection.
H
H
Switch from the screen area to the screen function area and select or enter
the designated screen function key. See Switching Between Screen Work
Areas for an example.
Press the spacebar to make the next valid choice.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
Switching Between Screen Work Areas
Use Ctrl-a to switch between the two screen work areas to perform all screen
functions.
" Procedure
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch from the screen area to the screen function key area.
2. Select either the function’s designated (underlined) character or Tab to the
desired function key.
Example:
Enter e or E to Exit.
3. Press Return. The function is performed.
4. To return to the screen area, press Ctrl-a again.
Accessing the User Interface
T1 access unit connectivity can be established via a directly-connected terminal.
However, if for some reason you cannot access the user interface, do one of the
following:
H
Reset COM Port – Allows you to reset the configuration options related to
COM port usage. This also causes a device reset, where the T1 access unit
performs a Device Self-Test. No security-related configuration options are
changed.
H
Reload Factory Defaults – Allows you to reload the Default Factory
Configuration, resetting all of the configuration and control settings. This
method is also useful when the user’s password(s) have been forgotten.
Selecting this method also causes a device reset.
" Procedure
To reset COM port settings:
1. Attach the async terminal to the COM port.
2. At the async terminal, configure the terminal to operate at 19.2 kbps, using
character length of 8 bits, with one stop-bit, and no parity.
3. Ensure that any hardware or software flow control is disabled.
4. Reset the T1 access unit, then immediately and repeatedly press Return at a
rate of at least 1 press per second until the System Paused screen appears.
5. Tab to the desired method, and enter yes (or y) for the selected prompt.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
If entering yes to prompt . . . Then . . .
Reset COM Port usage
H Port Type is set to Terminal.
H Data Rate (Kbps) is set to 19.2.
H Character Length is set to 8.
H Stop Bits is set to 1.
H Parity is set to None.
H External Device Commands is set to Disable.
Reload Factory Defaults
All factory-loaded configuration and control
settings contained in the Default Factory
configuration area are loaded.
If no (or n) is entered, or if no selection is made within 30 seconds, the T1
access unit returns to the condition of operation it was in when the system
pause was initiated, with the COM port settings returning to their configured
states.
If you chose yes, the T1 access unit resets itself, going through a Device
Self-Test. Connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface
This page intentionally left blank.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
5
Considerations When Setting Up
When setting up the system, you need to:
H
Arrange for T1 service.
H
Plan your channel map. See Assigning Cross Connections on page 5-36 for
more information.
H
Choose a management configuration. Decide how you want to manage the
system:
— Locally through the T1 access unit’s communications (COM) port either
directly or remotely through a modem.
— Through an asynchronous terminal interface or Telnet session, or through
an SNMP NMS.
H
H
H
Determine whether you want alarms generated and how you would like the
system to communicate alarm information to an ASCII terminal/printer or a
management system. Configuring for Alarms and Traps on page 5-64 tells
you how to set alarms.
Determine whether you want traps generated and how you would like the
system to communicate trap information to an ASCII terminal/printer or a
management system. Setting Up for SNMP Management on page 5-70 tells
you how to set SNMP traps.
If you are managing the system using an SNMP NMS or Telnet, select an IP
addressing scheme.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Selecting a Management Interface
Select one of the following management interfaces:
H
Asynchronous terminal interface – Over the T1 access unit’s COM port for
local configuration and control when the system does not include an NMS.
An asynchronous terminal interface is also required for initial setup that
enables external management.
H
H
Telnet access to an asynchronous terminal interface – Over the T1 access
unit’s COM port, through the ESF Facility Data Link (FDL), via an associated
EDL (EDL) or Direct Data Link (DDL).
SNMP – SNMP manager(s) using the SNMP protocol to configure and
control the unit using standard MIBs and enterprise-specific MIB extensions.
Logins
Refer to Chapter 6, Security, to learn how to create and delete logins.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Adding System Identity Information
Use the Device Name screen to identify this system, and to change or display the
general name, location, and contact for the system.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Control → Device Name
2. Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the field where you want to add or
change information.
NOTE:
To clear existing information, place the cursor in the Clear field and press
Return.
If the selection is . . . Enter the . . .
Device Name
Unique name for device identification of up to
20 characters.
System Name
SNMP system name; can be up to 255 characters.
System Location
Your system’s physical location; can be up to
255 characters.
System Contact
Name and how to contact the person responsible for this
system; can be up to 255 characters.
3. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears in the message area
at the bottom of the screen.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting Date and Time
Use the Date & Time screen to set the date and time for the system.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Control → Date & Time
2. Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the field where you want to add or
change information.
NOTE:
To clear existing information, move the cursor to the Clear field and press
Return.
If the selection is . . . Enter the . . .
Date (mm/dd/yy)
Time (hh:mm)
Date in the format mm/dd/yy or mm-dd-yy.
Time (24-hour clock) in the format hh:mm.
3. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears in the message area
at the bottom of the screen.
Configuring the T1 Access Unit
Your system comes preconfigured with factory default settings as noted in the
configuration option tables in this chapter, as well as on the Quick Reference. If
you need to display or change these settings, use the system’s Configuration
branch.
To change configuration option settings you must perform the following tasks:
H
H
H
Access and display configuration option settings
Change configuration option settings
Save configurations option settings to a configuration option area
NOTE:
Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options.
Security Access Level 2 and 3 users can just view configuration options.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Recommended Order of Configuration
The menu tree is organized in the recommended order of configuration. See
Appendix A, Menus and Configuration Worksheets, for a graphical view of the
system layout. Use the worksheets to keep track of the configuration option
settings.
Configuration Option Areas
The T1 access unit offers four configuration option storage areas:
Configuration Option Area Description
Current Configuration
The T1 access unit’s set of currently active
configuration options.
Customer Configuration 1
Customer Configuration 2
The first of two alternate sets of configurations that can
be set up by the customer and stored for future use.
The second of two alternate sets of configurations that
can be set up by the customer and stored for future use.
Default Factory Configuration A read-only configuration area containing the factory
default configuration options.
You can load and edit the default factory configuration
settings, but you can only save those changes to the
Current, Customer 1, and Customer 2 configuration
option areas.
The Current, Customer 1, and Customer 2 configuration
option areas are identical to the Default Factory
Configuration until modified by the customer.
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options
To access and display the configuration options, you must first load (copy) the
applicable configuration option set into the edit area.
NOTE:
If your T1 access unit is operating at any speed other than the default
(19.2 kbps) and you attempt to load factory default configuration options, you
could lose your communication link.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration
2. The Load Configuration From screen appears. Select the configuration option
area you want to load and press Return. The selected configuration option
set is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration
Edit/Display screen appears.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Changing Configuration Options
Once the Configuration is loaded, use the Configuration Edit/Display screen to
display, change, and save a configuration in one of the configuration areas.
" Procedure
1. From the Configuration Edit/Display screen, select the configuration option
set you want to view or make changes to and press Return.
2. Select the configuration options applicable to your network, and make
appropriate changes to the setting(s).
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete.
Saving Configuration Options
When all changes to the configuration options are complete, use the Save
function key to save configuration option changes to either the Current,
Customer 1, or Customer 2 configuration areas.
" Procedure
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
2. Select the Save function key from any of the Configuration branch screens
and press Return. The Save Configuration To screen appears.
3. Select the configuration option area where you want to save the changes to
and press Return.
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears in the message area
at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE:
If you changed configuration options and try to exit the Configuration
branch without saving those changes, a Save Configuration screen
appears requiring a Yes or No response to saving the changes.
If you select . . . Then the . . .
No
Main Menu screen appears. Changes are not saved.
Yes
Save Configuration To screen appears. Choose a
configuration option area to save to (e.g., Customer
Configuration 1).
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Configuring T1 and DSX-1 Interfaces
You can configure the following interfaces:
H
H
Network Interface
DSX-1 Interface (if applicable)
Configuring the Network Interface
Use the Network Interface Options screen to configure the network interface on
the T1 NAM (see Table 5-1).
Configuration Edit/Display → Network
If you have a 9261 Dual T1 NAM, select the desired Network interface, 1 (default)
or 2, in the NETWORK field. For the 9161 Single T1 NAM, this field is read-only
and always displays a 1.
Table 5-1. Network Interface Options (1 of 7)
Interface Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable for Network interface 1
Enable for Network interface 2
Specifies whether the interface selected in the Network field is available for use.
H Interface Status is read-only if Network is set to 1 (first interface on the 9261 Dual
T1 NAM, or the interface on the 9161 Single T1 NAM).
Enable – The interface is available.
Disable – The interface is not available for use. When the interface is disabled, any
existing cross-connect assignments for this interface will be cleared, no alarms or traps
for this interface will be generated, no configuration options will be displayed, and all
LEDs associated with this interface will remain off. If you attempt to disable the
Network 2 interface for which cross connections exist, the message This action will
clear all Network n Cross Connections. Are You Sure? No appears. If you select:
No – The operation is cancelled.
Yes – The following occurs:
H All existing cross-connect assignments for this interface are cleared.
H Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated.
H LEDs associated with this interface are held in an “off’’ state.
Line Framing Format
Possible Settings: D4, ESF
Default Setting: ESF
Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the T1 network
interface.
D4 – Uses D4 framing format.
ESF – Uses Extended Superframe (ESF) framing format.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-1. Network Interface Options (2 of 7)
Line Coding Format
Possible Settings: AMI, B8ZS
Default Setting: B8ZS
Specifies the line coding format for the network interface.
AMI – Uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line coding format.
B8ZS – Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression (B8ZS) line coding format.
Line Build Out (LBO)
Possible Settings: 0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5
Default Setting: 0.0
Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the network.
0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5 – Specifies line build out in dB.
Bit Stuffing
Possible Settings: 62411, Part68, Disable
Default Setting: 62411
Determines the type of bit insertion to provide ones density requirements for data
transmitted to the network.
H Bit Stuffing does not appear if Line Coding Format is set to B8ZS.
62411 – Inserts a one in the data after 15 consecutive zeros are received or the density
of ones falls below 12.5%. This setting complies with AT&T TR 62411.
Part68 – Inserts a one in the data if 80 consecutive zeros are received or the density of
ones falls below 12.5%.
Disable – Does not enforce ones density on the data sent to the network.
Network Initiated LLB
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback (LLB) to be controlled by the
receipt of LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands from the network.
Enable – LLB is controlled by LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands. Receiving a
LLB-Actuate command causes the NAM to enter a line loopback (provided an LLB can
be performed in the T1 access unit’s current state). Receiving a LLB-Release command
terminates the LLB.
Disable – The T1 access unit ignores the LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands.
NOTE: When disabled, the NAM is not in compliance with ANSIT1.403 or
AT&T TR 62411.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-1. Network Interface Options (3 of 7)
Network Initiated PLB
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback (PLB) to be controlled by
the receipt of PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands from the network.
H Network Initiated PLB only appears if Line Framing Format is set to ESF.
Enable – PLB is controlled by PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands. Receiving a
PLB-Actuate command causes the T1 access unit to enter a payload loopback
(provided a PLB can be performed in the NAM’s current state). Receiving a
PLB-Release command terminates the PLB.
Disable – The T1 access unit ignores the PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands.
NOTE: When disabled, the unit is not in compliance with ANSIT1.403 or
AT&T TR 54016.
Transmit Timing
Possible Settings: System, Network
Default Setting: System
Allows transmit timing to be selected from either the system master clock source or from
the currently selected network interface.
H Transmit Timing only appears for the 9261 Dual T1 NAM.
System – Transmit timing is derived from the current system clock source (set using
System Options, see Table 5-9).
Network – Transmit timing is derived from this interface.
NOTE: When Network is configured, the clock must be synchronized to the system
clock source.
ANSI Performance Report Messages
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether ANSI T1.403 compliance performance report messages (PRMs) are
generated and sent to the network over the ESF FDL every second.
H ANSI Performance Report Messages only appears if Line Framing Format is set
to ESF.
Enable – Generates and sends PRMs.
Disable – Does not generate and send PRMs.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-1. Network Interface Options (4 of 7)
Management Link
Possible Settings: Disable, FDL, DDL
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies the network management link.
NOTES: – If both FDL and DDL are not available selections, the configuration
option is set to Disable and cannot be edited.
– If Management Link for the local T1 access unit is set to FDL or DDL,
configure the remote T1 access unit with the same settings.
Disable – Does not use the management link.
FDL – Uses FDL as the management link. FDL allows IP management traffic to flow
over the 4 kbps data link provided by the FDL. FDL requires an end-to-end FDL
connection and cannot be terminated within the network.
H FDL does not appear if:
– Line Framing Format is set to D4.
– EDL on any synchronous data port is set to Enable.
DDL – Uses DDL as the management link.
H DDL does not appear if all network time slots are assigned.
IP Address
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the internet protocol address for the management link.
H IP Address only appears if Management Link is set to FDL or DDL.
000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – The IP address for the management link which
you can view or edit. The first digit (i.e., xxx.255.255.255) cannot be 0 or 127, or greater
than 223. However, 000.000.000.000 is valid, representing a null address.
Clear – Resets the IP address and fills the address with zeros.
Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask for the management link.
H Subnet Mask only appears if Management Link is set to FDL or DDL.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – The subnet mask for the management link which
you can view or edit.
Clear – Resets the node subnet mask and fills the address with zeros
(i.e., 000.000.000.000). When the subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates a
default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-1. Network Interface Options (5 of 7)
Routing Information Protocol
Possible Settings: None, Proprietary
Default Setting: Proprietary
Specifies whether routing information protocol (RIP) is used for routing of management
information between NAMs.
H Routing Information Protocol only appears if Management Link is set to FDL or
DDL.
None – No routing protocol is used. Use this setting when the device at the other end of
the management link cannot accept routing information.
Proprietary – A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing
information between NAMs to enable the routing of IP traffic.
Network Time Slot
Possible Settings: 01 – 24
Default Setting: lowest available time slot
Specifies the time slot for the DDL management link.
H Network Time Slot only appears appears if Management Link is set to DDL.
NOTE: If Management Link is not set to DDL, the assigned time slot will be set to
unassigned.
01 – 24 – Valid settings consist of any unassigned time slot within the 01 – 24 range.
Circuit Identifier
Possible Settings: Text Field, Clear
Default Setting: blank
Identifies the transmission vendor’s circuit information for the purpose of facilitating
troubleshooting.
Text Field – Edit or display circuit identifier information (maximum 255 characters).
Clear – Removes the circuit identifier information.
Loss of Signal (LOS) Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when a loss of signal condition is
detected on the network interface.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
Out of Frame (OOF) Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm is generated when an out-of-frame condition is detected on
the network interface.
Enable – Generates an alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-1. Network Interface Options (6 of 7)
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when an alarm indication signal
condition is detected on the network interface.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
Yellow Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when a yellow alarm condition is
detected on the network interface.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
Excessive Error Rate (EER) Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when an excessive error rate
condition is detected on the network interface.
H Excessive Error Rate only appears if Line Framing Format is set to ESF.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-1. Network Interface Options (7 of 7)
Excessive Error Rate Threshold
Possible Settings: 10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
Default Setting: 10E-4
Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an excessive error rate (EER)
condition is declared. The excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number
of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time.
H Excessive Error Rate Threshold only appears if Line Framing Format is set to
ESF.
10E-4 – Declares an EER if more than 1,535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10-second
period. Clears when fewer than 1,536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time
period.
10E-5 – Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60-second
–4
period or a 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are
detected within the same time period.
10E-6 – Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60-second
–5
–4
period or a 10 or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are
detected within the same time period.
10E-7 – Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60-second
–6
–5
–4
period or a 10 , or 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6
errors are detected within the same time period.
10E-8 – Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15-minute
–7
–6
–5
–4
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6
errors are detected within the same time period.
10E-9 – Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15-minute
–8
–7
–6
–5
–4
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than
5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Configuring the DSX-1 Interface
Use the DSX-1 Interface Options screen to configure the DSX-1 interface on the
T1 NAM (see Table 5-2).
Configuration Edit/Display → DSX-1
NOTE:
If the DSX-1 interface is disabled, Disable appears on the screen. No other
options are shown.
If you are using a Dual DSX APM, enter the port number of the desired DSX-1
interface in the PORT field. For the DSX port on the 9161 Single T1 NAM, a 1 is
displayed and is read-only.
Table 5-2. DSX-1 Interface Options (1 of 3)
Interface Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines if the DSX-1 interface is provided by the port.
Enable – The DSX-1 interface port transmits and receives data.
Disable – The DSX-1 interface port does not transmit or receive data. If time slots are
assigned to the DSX-1 interface when an attempt is made to disable this configuration
option, the message This action will clear all DSX-1 Cross Connections. Are You
Sure? No appears. If you select:
No – The operation is cancelled.
Yes – The following occurs:
H All existing DSX-1 interface cross-connect assignments are cleared.
H Alarms or traps associated with the DSX-1 interface are not generated.
H LEDs associated with the DSX-1 interface are held in an “off’’ state.
Line Framing Format
Possible Settings: D4, ESF
Default Setting: ESF
Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the DSX-1
interface.
D4 – Uses D4 framing format.
ESF – Uses Extended Superframe (ESF) framing format.
Line Coding Format
Possible Settings: AMI, B8ZS
Default Setting: B8ZS
Specifies the line coding format for the DSX-1 interface.
AMI – Uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line coding format.
B8ZS – Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression (B8ZS) line coding format.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-2. DSX-1 Interface Options (2 of 3)
Line Equalization
Possible Settings: 0–133, 133–266, 266–399, 399–533, 533–655
Default Setting: 0–133
Permits a standard DSX signal to be delivered over a distance of up to 655 feet.
0–133 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 133 feet of cable between the
NAM and the DTE.
133–266 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 266 feet of cable between the
NAM and the DTE.
266–399 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 399 feet of cable between the
NAM and the DTE.
399–533 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 533 feet of cable between the
NAM and the DTE.
533–655 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 655 feet of cable between the
NAM and the DTE.
Send All Ones on DSX-1 Failure
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether action is taken when a valid signal cannot be recovered for the
DSX-1 (LOS, continuous OOF, or AIS).
Enable – Sends all ones on the DS0 channels allocated to the DSX-1 interface in the
event of an LOS, AIS, or continuous OOS condition on the DSX-1 interface.
Disable – No action is taken when a signal fails on the DSX-1 interface. The data
received is passed through the network interface channels unchanged.
Loss of Signal (LOS) Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when a loss of signal condition is
detected on the DSX-1 interface.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
Out of Frame (OOF) Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when an out-of-frame condition is
detected on the DSX-1 interface.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-2. DSX-1 Interface Options (3 of 3)
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when an alarm indication signal
condition is detected on the DSX-1 interface.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
Yellow Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when a yellow alarm condition is
detected on the DSX-1 interface.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
Configuring Ports
Configure the following ports on the T1 NAM and any APMs that are installed in
your system.
H
H
Sync Data ports on the T1 NAM or the Sync Data APM
Voice ports on the FXS, FXO and E&M APMs
Once you have a port configured, you can copy that configuration to other ports
of the same type (see Copying Port Configurations on page 5-35).
Configuring Sync Data Ports
Use the Synchronous Data Port Options to configure the synchronous data
port(s) on the T1 NAM or on any Sync Data APM associated with the NAM (see
Table 5-3).
Configuration Edit/Display → Sync Data Ports
NOTE:
If the selected Synchronous Data Port is disabled, Disable appears on the
screen. No other options are shown.
The Synchronous Data Port Options screen appears for Port 1 of the first slot
containing a Sync Data APM. If desired, enter the slot and port number of
another sync data port.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-3. Synchronous Data Port Options (1 of 7)
Port Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the synchronous data port is being used and can be configured.
H Synchronous data port options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable.
Enable – The port is active, and can be used to transmit and receive data.
Disable – The port is not active. When the port is disabled, the following will occur:
H No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated.
H LED for the port will be held in an Off state.
H Existing cross-connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared. The
message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port. Are You
Sure? No appears. If you select:
No – The operation is cancelled. (Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl-a key acts as a
No.)
Yes – Port status is disabled.
Port Type
Possible Settings: E530, V.35, RS449, X.21
Default Setting: E530
Selects the synchronous data port type for the data port.
E530 – The port is an EIA-530A-compatible DCE. An EIA-530-compatible DTE can be
directly connected to the DB25 connector.
V.35 – The port is a V.35-compatible DCE. A V.35-compatible DTE can be connected to
the DB25 connector by using an MS34-to-DB25 adapter cable.
RS449 – The port is an RS449-compatible DCE. An RS449-compatible DTE can be
connected to the DB25 connector by using DB37-to-DB25 adapter cable.
X.21 – The port is a V.11/X.21-compatible DCE. A V.11/X.21-compatible DTE can be
connected to the DB25 connector by using a DB15-to-DB25 adapter cable.
Port Base Rate
Possible Settings: Nx64, Nx56
Default Setting: Nx64
Specifies the base rate for the synchronous data port. The data rate for the port is a
multiple (from 1 to 24) of the base rated specified by this configuration option.
Nx64 – The base rate for the port is 64 kbps. The data rate available for the port is
Nx64, where N is the number of channels to which the port is cross-connected (1–24).
Nx56 – The base rate for the port is 56 kbps. The data rate available for the port is
Nx56, where N is a number between 1 and 24.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-3. Synchronous Data Port Options (2 of 7)
Transmit Clock Source
Possible Settings: Internal, External
Default Setting: Internal
Determines whether the transmitted data is clocked by the synchronous data port
internal clock, or by the clock supplied by the DTE connected to the synchronous data
port.
Internal – The DCE clocks transmitted data, and uses the interchange circuit DB
(CCITT 114) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (TXC) (DCE source) for timing the
incoming transmitted data.
External – The DTE externally provides the clock for the transmitted data, and the
synchronous data port uses the interchange circuit DA (CCITT 113) – Transmit Signal
Element Timing (XTXC) (DTE source) for timing the incoming transmitted data.
NOTE: When external clock is used, it must be synchronized to the same clock
source as the system.
Invert Transmit Clock
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the clock supplied by the DCE on interchange circuit DB
(CCITT 114) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (DCE Source) TXC is phase inverted
with respect to interchange circuit BA (CCITT 103) – Transmitted Data (TD). Use this
configuration option when long cable lengths between the NAM and the DTE are
causing data errors.
Enable – Phase inverts the TXC clock on the DCE.
Disable – Does not phase invert the TXC clock on the DCE.
Invert Transmit and Received Data
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the transmitted and received data for the synchronous data port is
logically inverted before being transmitted or after being received from the network. Use
this configuration option for applications where data is being transported using HDLC
protocol, whereby inverting the data ensures that the ones density requirements for the
network are met.
Enable – Inverts the transmitted and received data for the port.
Disable – Does not invert the transmitted and received data for the port.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-3. Synchronous Data Port Options (3 of 7)
Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready
Possible Settings: Disable, DTR, RTS, Both
Default Setting: Both
Specifies the conditions on the synchronous data port that determine when valid data is
not being sent from the DTE. When this condition is detected, all ones are sent to the
network on the DS0 channels allocated to the port.
Disable – Interchange circuits from the DTE are not monitored. Data sent from the DTE
is always sent to the network for the port.
DTR – Monitors DTE Ready (DTR) to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE.
When DTR is off, all ones are sent to the network.
H DTR does not appear if Port Type is set to X.21.
RTS – Monitors Request to Send (RTS) to determine when valid data is sent from the
DTE. When RTS is off, all ones are sent to the network.
Both – Monitors both DTR and RTS to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE.
If either DTR or RTS is off, all ones are sent to the network.
H Both does not appear if Port Type is set to X.21.
Action on Network Yellow Alarm
Possible Settings: None, Halt
Default Setting: Halt
Specifies the action to take on the synchronous data port when a yellow alarm is
received on the network interface. (A yellow alarm indicates a problem with the signal
being transmitted to the network.)
None – No action taken when a yellow alarm is received.
Halt – Halts the transmission of data received on the synchronous data port and all
ones are sent on circuit BB (ITU 104) – Receive Data (RD) and circuit CB (ITU 106) –
Clear-to-Send (CTS) is deasserted to the port when a yellow alarm is received.
Network Initiated Data Channel Loopback (DCLB)
Possible Settings: Disable, V.54, FT1, Both
Default Setting: Disable
Allows the initiation and termination of the data channel loopback (V.54 loop 2) to be
controlled by the receipt of a DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequence (either V.54,
or FT1 [ANSI] compliant sequences) from the network or far end unit. When this
configuration is enabled (V.54, FT1, or Both), receiving a DCLB-actuate sequence on a
particular port causes the NAM to initiate a DCLB on that port (provided that a DCLB
can be performed based on the current state of the port and NAM). Receiving a
DCLB-release sequence terminates the DCLB.
Disable – Ignores the DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release for the port.
V.54 – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with the V.54 standard
for “inter-DCE signaling for point-to-point circuits” are recognized and will control the
initiation and termination of a DCLB (V.54 Loop 2) for the port.
FT1 – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with either the
ANSI.403, Annex B standard for “in-band signaling for fractional T1 (FT1) channel
loopbacks” are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB for
the port.
Both – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with either the ANSI
or V.54 standard are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB
for the port.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-3. Synchronous Data Port Options (4 of 7)
Port (DTE) Initiated Loopbacks
Possible Settings: Disable, DTPLB, DCLB, Both
Default Setting: Disable
Allows the initiation and termination of a local Data Payload Loopback (DTPLB) or a
remote Data Channel Loopback (DCLB) to be controlled by the DTE for the
synchronous data port.
Disable – The DTE attached to the port does not control the Local DTPLB and remote
DCLBs.
DTPLB – The DTE attached to the port may control the DTPLB for the port. The
loopback is controlled by the interchange circuit LL (CCITT 141) – Local Loopback as
specified by V.54. The port remains in DTPLB loopback as long as interchange circuit
remains on.
DCLB – The DTE attached to the port may control the DCLB for the connected remote
port. The loopback is controlled by the interchange circuit RL (CCITT 140) – Remote
Loopback as specified by V.54.
NOTE: The remote equipment must support in-band V.54 loopback.
Both – The DTE attached to the port may control both the local DTPLB and remote
DCLBs.
Embedded Data Link
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the Embedded Data Link (EDL) is enabled for the synchronous data
port. When the EDL is enabled, 8 kbps of the total bandwidth allocated for the port are
not available to the synchronous data port. For example, if the port rate is 256 kbps
(4 DS0 channels allocated) and the EDL is enabled, then only 248 kbps are available to
the port. The EDL provides detection of frame synchronization, CRC of the data stream
(excluding the 8 kbps EDL), and a 4 kbps inband data link between the local and remote
units. The 4 kbps in-band data link can be used for performance report messages
(PRMs) and as a management link for IP traffic.
H EDL does not appear if Management Link is set to FDL.
Enable – EDL is enabled for the port.
NOTE: EDL must be enabled for both the local port and associated remote port.
Disable – EDL is disabled for the port.
EDL Management Link
Possible Settings: Disable, Enable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the EDL management link is enabled for IP traffic on the synchronous
data port.
H EDL Management Link does not appear if:
– EDL is set to Disable.
– Management Link is set to FDL.
Enable – EDL management link is enabled for IP traffic flow over the 4 kbps in-band
data link provided by the EDL.
Disable – EDL management link is disabled for IP traffic.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-3. Synchronous Data Port Options (5 of 7)
IP Address
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the internet protocol address needed to access the EDL.
H IP Address does not appear if EDL Management Link is set to Disable.
000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Enter the IP address for the EDL. The first digit
(i.e., xxx.255.255.255) cannot be 0 or 127, or greater than 223. However,
000.000.000.000 is valid, representing a null address.
Clear – Clears the IP address and fills the address with zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000).
Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask for the EDL.
H Subnet Mask does not appear if EDL Management Link is set to Disable.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Enter the subnet mask for the EDL. Subnet Mask
is based on the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.
Clear – Clears the subnet mask and fills the field with zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000).
Routing Information Protocol
Possible Settings: None, Proprietary
Default Setting: Proprietary
Specifies which routing information protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of
management between devices.
H Routing Information Protocol does not appear if:
– EDL is set to Disable.
– EDL Management Link is set to Disable.
– Management Link is set to FDL.
None – Does not use routing information protocol. Use this setting when the device at
the other end of the management link cannot accept routing information.
Proprietary – Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing
information between devices.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-3. Synchronous Data Port Options (6 of 7)
Near-End Performance Statistics
Possible Settings: Disable, Maintain, Send, Both
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the T1 access unit maintains near-end performance statistics and
sends Performance Report Messages (PRMs) for the synchronous data port.
H Near-End Performance Statistics does not appear if:
– EDL is set to Disable.
– Management Link is set to FDL.
NOTE: If the local T1 access unit is configured to send near-end performance
statistics, then the remote T1 access unit must be configured to maintain
far-end performance statistics.
Disable – Does not maintain near-end performance statistics or send PRMs.
Maintain – Maintain near-end performance statistics for the port.
Send – Send PRMs over the port’s EDL every second. Each PRM contains the
performance statistics for the previous 4 seconds.
Both – Maintain near-end performance statistics and send PRMs over the port’s EDL.
Far-End Performance Statistics
Possible Settings: Disable, Maintain
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the T1 access unit maintains far-end performance statistics and
sends Performance Report Messages (PRMs) for the synchronous data port.
H Far-End Performance Statistics does not appear if:
– EDL is set to Disable.
– Management Link is set to FDL.
NOTE: If the local T1 access unit is configured to maintain far-end performance
statistics, then the remote T1 access unit must be configured to send
near-end performance statistics.
Disable – Does not monitor the port’s EDL for PRMs or maintain far-end performance
statistics.
Maintain – Monitors the port’s EDL for PRMs and maintains far-end performance
statistics.
Out of Frame (OOF) Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Out of Frame (OOF). Specifies whether an alarm is generated when an out-of-frame
condition is detected on the synchronous data port.
H Out of Frame does not appear if:
– Embedded Data Link is set to Disable.
– Management Link is set to FDL on the Network Interface Options screen (see
Table 5-1).
Enable – Generates an alarm.
Disable – Does not generate an alarm.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-3. Synchronous Data Port Options (7 of 7)
Excessive Error Rate (EER) Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an alarm is generated when an excessive error rate condition is
detected on the synchronous data port.
H Excessive Error Rate does not appear if:
– Embedded Data Link is set to Disable.
– Management Link is set to FDL on the Network Interface Options screen (see
Table 5-1).
Enable – Generates an alarm.
Disable – Does not generate an alarm.
Excessive Error Rate Threshold
Possible Settings: 10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
Default Setting: 10E-4
Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an excessive error rate (EER)
condition is declared for a synchronous data port. The EER is determined by the ratio of
the number of CRC5 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time.
H Excessive Error Rate Threshold does not appear if:
– Excessive Error Rate is set to Disable.
– Embedded Data Link is set to Disable.
– Management Link is set to FDL on the Network Interface Options screen (see
Table 5-1).
– Both Near-End and Far-End Performance Statistics are set to Disable.
10E-4 – Declares an EER if more than 1,535 CRC5 errors are detected in a 10-second
period. Clears when fewer than 1,536 CRC5 errors are detected within the same time
period.
10E-5 – Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60-second
–4
period or a 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 922 CRC5 errors are
detected within the same time period.
10E-6 – Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60-second
–5
–4
period or a 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 93 CRC5 errors are
detected within the same time period.
10E-7 – Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60-second
–6
–5
–4
period or a 10 , 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 10 CRC5
errors are detected within the same time period.
10E-8 – Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15-minute
–7
–6
–5
–4
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than
42 CRC5 errors are detected within the same time period.
10E-9 – Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15-minute
–8
–7
–6
–5
–4
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than
5 CRC5 errors are detected within the same time period.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Configuring Voice Ports
Use the E&M (Table 5-4), FXO (Table 5-5), and FXS (Table 5-6) Voice Options to
configure the voice port on the voice APM in the selected slot.
Configuration Edit/Display → Voice Ports
The Voice Port Options screen appears for Port 1 of the first slot containing a
voice APM (either FXS, FXO or E&M). The displayed fields differ, depending on
the type of voice APM in the selected slot.
For E&M Voice Ports:
Table 5-4. E&M Voice – Slot ss Port p Options (1 of 2)
Port Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the E&M voice port is in use, and can be configured and assigned to
a time slot on the T1 or DSX-1 interface in order to transmit and receive voice frequency
signals.
H E&M Voice options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable.
Enable – The port is active, and can be configured and assigned to a timeslot.
Disable – The port is not active, cannot be configured, and does not take up a time slot.
H No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated.
H Existing cross-connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared. The
message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port. Are You
Sure? No appears. If you select:
No – The operation is cancelled. (Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl-a key acts as a
No.)
Yes – Port status is disabled and any cross connections are cleared.
Operating Mode
Possible Settings: E&M, Transmit Only
Default Setting: E&M
Selects the operating mode for the E&M voice port.
H Operating Mode only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
E&M – Enables normal earth and magnetic (E&M) mode.
Transmit Only – Enables the mode used to support 4-wire private-line modems that do
not require E&M signaling.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-4. E&M Voice – Slot ss Port p Options (2 of 2)
Rx Gain (dB)
Possible Settings: –17.0, –16.5, –16.0, –15.5, –15.0 ..., 0.0, ..., +6.5, +7.0, +7.5
Default Setting: 0.0
Determines the receive path analog signal amplification on the E&M voice port in
decibels. This is the gain (increased signal level) or attenuation (decreased signal level)
applied to the signal before it is presented to the user’s analog equipment.
The range differs depending on the T1 NAM and E&M software revision, and the
hardware revision. Go to Main Menu → Status → Identity → System & NAM to view the
revision levels.
H Rx Gain (dB) only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
–17.0 to +7.5 – Increases or decreases the signal level. The more positive the number,
the greater the signal level.
Tx Attenuation (dB)
Possible Settings: –17.0, –16.5, –16.0, –15.5, –15.0 ..., 0.0, ..., +6.5, +7.0, +7.5
Default Setting: 0.0
Determines the amount of attenuation, in dB, that the E&M voice receive port applies to
the analog signal presented by the user’s analog equipment transmit port. Positive TX
Attenuation settings reduce the level of the encoded analog signals sent towards the
telephone network, and negative settings will introduce gain. The proper setting of this
strap is crucial to ensuring compliance with Part 68, FCC Rules and Industry Canada’s
CS-03 Specification.
The range differs depending on the T1 NAM and E&M software revision, and the
hardware revision. Go to Main Menu → Status → Identity → System & NAM to view the
revision levels.
H Tx Attenuation (dB) only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
–17.0 to +7.5 – Increases or decreases the signal level. The more positive the number,
the greater the signal level.
Trunk Cond in CGA
Possible Settings: Busy, Idle
Default Setting: Busy
Determines the trunk condition or state that the port is forced into as a result of the
Carrier Group Alarm (CGA).
H Trunk Cond in CGA only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
Busy – Forces the port to Busy during a CGA.
Idle – Forces the port to Idle during a CGA.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
For FXO Voice Ports:
Table 5-5. FXO Voice – Slot ss Port p Options (1 of 3)
Port Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the FXO voice port is in use, and can be configured and assigned to
a time slot on the T1 or DSX interface in order to transmit and receive voice frequency
signals.
H FXO Voice options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable.
Enable – The port is active, and can be configured and assigned to a timeslot.
Disable – The port is not active, cannot be configured, and does not take up a time slot.
H No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated.
H Existing cross-connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared. The
message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port. Are You
Sure? No appears. If you select:
No – The operation is cancelled. (Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl-a key acts as a
No.)
Yes – Port status is disabled and any cross connections are cleared.
Operating Mode
Possible Settings: FXO, FXODN, FXODN/WINK, DPT
Default Setting: FXO
Selects the operating mode for the FXO voice port.
H Operating Mode only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
FXO – Enables the Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) mode, supporting a bidirectional
connection to a PBX phone line. This mode uses 4-state signaling (A&B).
FXODN – Enables Foreign Exchange Office Software-Defined Network (FXODN) mode
for operation on software-defined networks. This mode is used by Class 4 switches and
uses 2-state signaling (A=B).
FXODN/WINK – Enables the mode FXODN with WINK which is similar to FXODN, but
in addition provides an indication toward the network interface when the attached
analog equipment is ready to receive signaling information. This consists of detecting an
off-hook signal from the network interface, which initiates a configurable “wink delay”
followed by a configurable off-hook signal back to the network interface.
DPT – The Dial Pulse Terminating (DPT) mode is similar to FXO, except for supporting
in-coming, one-way trunks to a PBX (direct inward dialing) or key system.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-5. FXO Voice – Slot ss Port p Options (2 of 3)
Signaling Type
Possible Settings: Loop-Start, Loop-Start/Fwd Disc, Ground-Start
Default Setting: Loop-Start
Determines the type of signaling for the FXO voice port.
H Signaling Type only appears if:
– Port Status is set to Enable.
– Operating Mode is not set to DPT.
Loop-Start – Enables the signaling used for basic telephone service stations, simple
PBX trunks, or key systems.
Loop-Start/Fwd Disc – Enables the signaling used for automated answering
equipment.
Ground-Start – Enables the signaling used for two-way PBX trunks. Helps to prevent
“glaring”, i.e., call collision.
Terminating Impedance (ohms)
Possible Settings: 600, 900
Default Setting: 600
Determines the terminating impedance (in ohms) for the port.
H Terminating Impedance only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
600 – The terminating impedance is 600 ohms.
900 – The terminating impedance is 900 ohms.
Wink Delay (10 ms)
Possible Settings: 1 – 99
Default Setting: 15
Determines the amount of delay before the wink signal is generated towards the
network, and when an off-hook signal from the CO is detected in increments of
10 milliseconds.
H Wink Delay only appears if:
– Port Status is set to Enable.
– Operating Mode is set to FXODN/WINK or DPT.
10 to 990 – The valid range is from 10 to 990 ms, in 10 ms increments. The settings are
numbers between 1 and 99, representing such increments. The default is 15, for a wink
delay of 150 ms.
Wink Duration (10 ms)
Possible Settings: 1 – 99
Default Setting: 20
Determines the duration of the wink signal generated towards the network when an
off-hook signal for the CO is detected and after the wink delay has elapsed in
increments of 10 milliseconds.
H Wink Duration only appears if:
– Port Status is set to Enable.
– Operating Mode is set to FXODN/WINK or DPT.
10 to 990 ms – The valid range is from 10 to 990 ms, in 10 ms increments. The settings
are numbers between 1 and 99, representing such increments. The default is 20, for a
wink duration of 200 ms.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-5. FXO Voice – Slot ss Port p Options (3 of 3)
Rx Gain (dB)
Possible Settings: –10.00, –9.5, –9.0, –8.5, ..., 0.0, +0.5, +1.0, +1.5, +2.0
Default Setting: 0.0
Determines the receive path analog signal amplification, or gain, on the FXO voice port
in decibels. This is the gain (increased signal level) or attenuation (decreased signal
level) applied to the signal.
H Rx Gain (dB) only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
–10.00 to +2.0 – Increases or decreases the signal level. The more positive the
number, the greater the signal level.
Tx Attenuation (dB)
Possible Settings: –10.00, –9.5, –9.0, –8.5, ..., 0.0, ..., +4.0, +4.5, +5.0
Default Setting: 0.0
Determines the amount of attenuation, in dB, that the FXO voice port applies to the
analog signal presented by the user’s analog equipment. Positive TX Attenuation
settings reduce the level of the encoded analog signals sent towards the telephone
network and negative settings introduce gain. When connecting permissive mode
modems and fax machines, a setting of +3 dB should result in a compliant, encoded
analog of less than –12 dBm. The proper setting of this strap is crucial to ensuring
compliance with Part 68, FCC Rules and Industry Canada’s CS-03 Specification.
H Tx Attenuation (dB) only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
–10.00 to +5.0 – Increases or decreases the signal level. The more negative the
number, the greater the signal level (opposite of Rx Gain settings).
Trunk Cond in CGA
Possible Settings: Busy, Idle
Default Setting: Busy
Determines the trunk condition or state that the port is forced into as a result of the
Carrier Group Alarm (CGA).
H Trunk Cond in CGA only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
Busy – Forces the port to Busy during the Carrier Group Alarm.
Idle – Forces the port to Idle during the Carrier Group Alarm.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
For FXS Voice Ports:
Table 5-6. FXS Voice – Slot ss Port p Options (1 of 4)
Port Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the FXS voice port is in use, and can be configured and assigned to a
time slot on the T1 or DSX-1 interface in order to transmit and receive voice frequency
signals.
H FXS Voice options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable.
Enable – The port is active, and can be configured and assigned to a timeslot.
Disable – The port is not active, cannot be configured, and does not take up a time slot.
H No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated.
H Existing cross-connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared. The
message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port. Are You
Sure? No appears. If you select:
No – The operation is cancelled. (Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl-a key acts as a
No.)
Yes – Port status is disabled and any cross connections are cleared.
Operating Mode
Possible Settings: FXS, FXSDN, FXSDN/WINK, PLAR, DPO
Default Setting: FXS
Selects the operating mode for the FXS voice port.
H Operating Mode only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
FXS – Enables the Foreign Exchange Station (FXS) mode, supporting a bidirectional
connection to a telephone device, PBX, or key system trunk. This mode uses 4-state
signaling (A&B).
FXSDN – Enables Foreign Exchange Station Software-Defined Network (FXSDN)
mode for operation on software-defined networks. This mode is used by Class 4
switches and uses 2-state signaling (A=B).
FXSDN/WINK – Enables the mode FXSDN with WINK which is similar to FXSDN, but in
addition provides an indication to the central office (CO) when the station equipment is
ready to receive signaling information. This consists of detecting an off-hook signal from
the CO, which initiates a configurable “wink delay” followed by a configurable off-hook
signal back to the CO.
PLAR – Private Line Automatic Ring-down (PLAR) allows “hotline” point-to-point
dedicated connection of two phones. When one phone goes off-hook, the other phone
starts ringing.
DPO – The Dial Pulse Originating (DPO) mode is similar to FXS, except for supporting
out-going, one-way trunks from a PBX (direct outward dialing) or key system, or station
instrument. No ringing is provided in this mode.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-6. FXS Voice – Slot ss Port p Options (2 of 4)
Signaling Type
Possible Settings: Loop-Start, Loop-Start/Fwd Disc, Ground-Start,
Ground-Start-Immediate, Ground-Start-Automatic, d3, d4
Default Setting: Loop-Start
Determines the type of signaling for the FXS voice port.
H Signaling Type only appears if:
– Port Status is set to Enable.
– Operating Mode is not set to DPO.
Loop-Start – Enables the signaling used for basic telephone service stations, simple
PBX trunks, or key systems. Loop Start only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS,
FXSDN, or FXSDN/WINK.
Loop-Start/Fwd Disc – Enables the signaling used for automated answering
equipment. This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS, FXSDN, or
FXSDN/WINK.
Ground-Start – Enables the signaling used for two-way PBX trunks. Helps to prevent
“glaring”, i.e., call collision. This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS,
FXSDN, or FXSDN/WINK.
Ground-Start-Immediate – Enables the signaling used for fast response time to the
PBX or station. This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS.
Ground-Start-Automatic – Enables the signaling used for fast response time to the
central office. This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS.
d3 – The APM meets the pre-1988 specifications for PLAR circuits. This selection only
appears if Operating Mode is set to PLAR.
d4 – The APM meets the post-1988 specifications for PLAR circuits. This selection only
appears if Operating Mode is set to PLAR.
Terminating Impedance (ohms)
Possible Settings: 600, 900
Default Setting: 600
Determines the terminating impedance (in ohms) for the port.
H Terminating Impedance only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
600 – The terminating impedance is 600 ohms.
900 – The terminating impedance is 900 ohms.
Wink Delay (10 ms)
Possible Settings: 1 – 99
Default Setting: 15
Determines the amount of delay before the wink signal is generated towards the
network, and when an off-hook signal from the CO is detected in increments of
10 milliseconds.
H Wink Delay only appears if:
– Port Status is set to Enable.
– Operating Mode is set to FXSDN/WINK.
10 to 990 – The valid range is from 10 to 990 ms, in 10 ms increments. The settings are
numbers between 1 and 99, representing such increments. The default is 15, for a wink
delay of 150 ms.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-6. FXS Voice – Slot ss Port p Options (3 of 4)
Wink Duration (10 ms)
Possible Settings: 1 – 99
Default Setting: 20
Determines the duration of the wink signal generated towards the network when an
off-hook signal for the CO is detected and after the wink delay has elapsed in
increments of 10 milliseconds.
H Wink Duration only appears if:
– Port Status is set to Enable.
– Operating Mode is set to FXSDN/WINK.
10 to 990 ms – The valid range is from 10 to 990 ms, in 10 ms increments. The settings
are numbers between 1 and 99, representing such increments. The default is 20, for a
wink duration of 200 ms.
Rx Gain (dB)
Possible Settings: –10.00, –9.5, –9.0, –8.5, ..., 0.0, +0.5, +1.0, +1.5, +2.0
Default Setting: 0.0
Determines the receive path analog signal amplification, or gain, on the FXS voice port
in decibels. This is the gain (increased signal level) or attenuation (decreased signal
level) applied to the signal.
H Rx Gain (dB) only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
–10.00 to +2.0 – Increases or decreases the signal level. The more positive the
number, the greater the signal level.
Tx Attenuation (dB)
Possible Settings: –10.00, –9.5, –9.0, –8.5, ..., 0.0, ..., +4.0, +4.5, +5.0
Default Setting: 0.0
Determines the amount of attenuation, in dB, that the FXS voice port applies to the
analog signal presented by the user’s analog equipment. Positive TX Attenuation
settings reduce the level of the encoded analog signals sent towards the telephone
network and negative settings introduce gain. When connecting permissive mode
modems and fax machines, a setting of +3 dB should result in a compliant, encoded
analog of less than –12 dBm. The proper setting of this strap is crucial to ensuring
compliance with Part 68, FCC Rules and Industry Canada’s CS-03 Specification.
H Tx Attenuation (dB) only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
–10.00 to +5.0 – Increases or decreases the signal level. The more negative the
number, the greater the signal level (opposite of Rx Gain settings).
Ring-Back Tone
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Allows generation of an audible tone toward the network in response to an incoming call
request, normally referred to as a ring-back. This feature is invoked only when the
central office (CO) does not provide it, as with a Class 4 ESS switch. This tone indicates
to the calling party that the called line has been reached and ringing has started. Use
the ring-back tone when you have a PLAR application.
H Ring-Back Tone only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
Enable – Generates a ring-back tone toward the network in response to an incoming
call request.
Disable – Does not generate a ring-back tone toward the network in response to an
incoming call request.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-6. FXS Voice – Slot ss Port p Options (4 of 4)
Trunk Cond in CGA
Possible Settings: Busy, Idle
Default Setting: Busy
Determines the trunk condition or state that the port is forced into as a result of the
Carrier Group Alarm (CGA).
H Trunk Cond in CGA only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
Busy – Forces the port to Busy during the Carrier Group Alarm.
Idle – Forces the port to Idle during the Carrier Group Alarm.
Configuring OCU-DP Ports
Use the OCU-DP Options (Table 5-7) to configure the ports (either two or six) on
the OCU-DP APM in the selected slot.
Configuration Edit/Display → OCU-DP Ports
The OCU-DP Options screen appears for Port 1 of the first slot containing an
OCU-DP APM.
Table 5-7. OCU-DP Options – Slot ss Port p Options (1 of 3)
Port Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the OCU-DP port is in use, and can be configured and used to
transmit and receive data.
H OCU-DP options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable.
Enable – The port is active, and can be configured used to
Disable – The port is not active, cannot be configured, and cannot transmit/receive
data.
H No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated.
H Existing cross-connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared. The
message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port. Are You
Sure? No appears. If you select:
No – The operation is cancelled. (Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl-a key acts as a
No.)
Yes – Port status is disabled and any cross connections are cleared.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-7. OCU-DP Options – Slot ss Port p Options (2 of 3)
Port Rate
Possible Settings: 56K, 64KCC, Switched_56
Default Setting: 56K
Selects the rate for the port.
H Port Rate only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
56K – The setting for 56 kbps.
64KCC – The setting for 64 kbps Clear Channel.
Switched_56 – The rate for 4-wire Switched 56.
Loopback Detection
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the the T1 access unit will detect loopback activation codes coming
from the network.
H Loopback Detection only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
Enable – Loopback code detection is enabled.
Disable – Loopback code detection is disabled.
Loss of Signal Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when a Loss of Signal condition
is detected.
H Loss of Signal Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
Enable – An alarm is generated when a Loss of Signal condition is detected on the
interface.
Disable – Alarms are not generated for a Loss of Signal condition.
Abnormal Station Code Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when an Abnormal Station code
is received from the network.
H Abnormal Station Code Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
Enable – An alarm is generated when an Abnormal Station Code is received from the
network.
Disable – Alarms are not generated when an Abnormal Station Code is received.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-7. OCU-DP Options – Slot ss Port p Options (3 of 3)
64KCC Loop OOF Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when a 64KCC Loop Out of
Frame (OOF) condition is detected.
H A 64KCC Loop Out of Frame (OOF) Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to
Enable.
Enable – An alarm is generated when a 64KCC Loop Out of Frame condition is
detected on the interface.
Disable – Alarms are not generated for a 64KCC Loop Out of Frame condition.
DDS Network Failure Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when a DDS Network Failure
code is received from the network.
H DDS Network Failure Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
Enable – An alarm is generated when a DDS Network Failure code is received from the
network.
Disable – Alarms are not generated for a DDS Network Failure.
Loss of Loop Timing Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when a Loss of Loop Timing
condition is received from the network.
H Loss of Loop Timing Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to Enable.
Enable – An alarm is generated when a Loss of Loop Timing condition is detected on
the interface.
Disable – Alarms are not generated for a Loss of Loop Timing condition.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Copying Port Configurations
Copy Ports provides an easy way to configure similar ports. Only enabled ports
may be copied. They may be copied to either enabled or disabled ports.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Copy Ports
2. The Copy Ports screen appears. Select the desired slot number to copy
configuration options from. Upon entering the screen, the slot number of the
T1 NAM is displayed. Use the spacebar to cycle through the slots. You can
also type in the desired slot number.
3. Select the desired port number to copy configuration options from. Use the
spacebar to cycle through the ports available on the card in the selected slot.
Only slots matching the type shown in the From: field are displayed. You can
also type in the desired slot number.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to select the slot and port to copy configuration options
to.
5. Press Enter to begin the copy process.
If the . . .
Then the . . .
Copy To slot and Copy To port Copy To slot and port configuration options are
are set to a specific slot and
port number
replaced by the Copy From slot and port
configurations options.
Copy To slot is set to a
Configuration options of all ports on the Copy To
specific number and the Copy slot are replaced by the Copy From slot and port
To port is set to All
configuration options.
Copy To slot is set to All the
Copy To port is set to a
specific number
Configuration options of the Copy To port of all
slots containing the same type of port (Voice E&M,
Voice FXO, Voice FXS, Sync Data, or OCU-DP) as
on the Copy From slot are replaced by the Copy
From slot and port configuration options.
Copy To slot and the Copy To Configuration options of all ports of all slots
port are both set to All
containing the same type of port (Voice E&M, Voice
FXS, Sync Data, or OCU-DP) as on the Copy From
slot are replaced by the Copy From slot and port
configuration options.
6. Select Perform Copy Then Increment if you want to automatically change
the values to the next higher port of the same type. If the last port of the
highest slot was specified, the value will change to Port 1 of the lowest slot
containing the same port type.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Assigning Cross Connections
The system allows you to assign data paths between the various interfaces to
share the T1 network. Assuming that both the Network and DSX-1 interfaces are
enabled and that at least one voice port APM is installed, you can make the
following cross connections:
H
H
H
H
Assign DSX-1 time slots to the Network interface
Assign Network 2 interface timeslots to the Network 1 interface
Assign voice ports to DSX-1 or Network interface timeslots
Assign Sync Data ports to DSX-1 or Network interface timeslots, or to
another Sync Data port
H
Assign OCU-DP data ports to DSX-1 or Network interface timeslots
You can also clear cross-connection assignments.
NOTE:
Although it is not required, it is suggested that you progress through each
screen in order, from top to bottom.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
The following figures illustrate various cross-connection assignments.
T1
Access Mux
Sync Data
Port
Network T1 Interface
DSX-1
98-15983
Assigning Sync Data Ports to Network Interface Timeslots
T1
Access Mux
Sync Data
Port
Network T1 Interface
DSX-1
98-15984
Assigning Sync Data Ports to DSX-1 or Network Interface Timeslots
(9161 Single T1 NAM Only)
T1
Access Mux
24 DS0s with 9161 Single T1 NAM
16 DS0s with 9261 Dual TI NAM
Sync Data
Port
Sync Data
Port
Network T1 Interface
DSX-1
98-15985
Assigning Sync Data Ports to DSX-1 Timeslots or to Another Sync Data Port
Use the worksheets in Appendix A and the following procedures to assign cross
connections.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Assigning DSX-1 Timeslots to the Network Interface
DSX-1 timeslots are assigned by channel allocation, where you specify individual
timeslots. The DSX-1 interface must be enabled to assign DSX-1 timeslots to the
Network interface.
Value
Meaning
Nxx
The lower field represents timeslot xx of the selected Network
interface.
Assigned
The timeslot is already assigned to something other than a DSX-1
timeslot, so it is unavailable. Assigned timeslots cannot be modified
from this screen.
Available
Dss-p/yy
The timeslot is currently unassigned.
Timeslot yy of DSX-1 interface p in slot ss is assigned to the
Network timeslot identified right above it (Nxx).
Timeslot assignment rules:
H
H
H
Valid Network timeslots are either labeled as Available, or contain a DSX-1
timeslot assignment
Valid DSX-1 timeslots are those that are unassigned, and the currently
assigned timeslot
Order of display is as follows:
— Available is the first selection
— Then, from lowest DSX-1 interface to the highest DSX-1 interface
— Then lowest available timeslot number to the highest available timeslot
number
For example, if the cursor is on a field with the Available value under assigned
timeslot Nxx, pressing the Spacebar causes this field’s values to cycle through all
valid DSX-1 timeslots, starting with Dss-p/yy, assuming it is unassigned. If
Dss-p/yy is already assigned, the next valid timeslot in the order described above
is displayed.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Cross Connect → DSX-1 to Network
Assignments
2. The DSX-1 to Network Assignments screen appears. This screen contains a
matrix of the current cross-connect status of all time slots on the Network
interface.
3. If you are using the 9261 Dual T1 NAM, you must choose which Network
interface to use. Enter 1 or 2 in the NETWORK field.
4. Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot (underlined). Use the spacebar
or type in the desired timeslot to display the desired timeslot assignment.
5. Repeat Step 3 until all desired timeslots are assigned. Select Save to save
the assignments, or press ESC to save and return to the Cross Connect
menu.
DSX-1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning
The second page of the DSX-1 to Network 1/2 Assignments screen enables you
to define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each timeslot on
the DSX-1 interface. You can specify whether robbed bit signaling information is
being passed within a given DS0, and the value of the signaling bits that will be
transmitted for that DS0 to the other cross-connected T1 interface if a Carrier
Group Alarm (CGA) occurs on a T1 interface.
Only those DSX-1-to-Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this
page, from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order, by network and
timeslot.
When a CGA condition (LOS, OOF or AIS) is declared for a T1 interface, the
signaling bits being transmitted to the other T1 interface for the DS0 are forced to
idle for two seconds (except for user-defined patterns which are transmitted
immediately). This drops any call in progress. The signaling bits are then forced
to the selected state (Busy or Idle), and remain in this state until the CGA
condition clears. At this point, the received signaling bits from the T1 interface
which formerly had the CGA condition are passed through to the other T1
interface.
NOTE:
Trunk conditioning will only occur on DS0s that are cross-connected to
another T1 interface. All other DS0s remain unaffected by trunk conditioning.
Enter one of the values shown in Table 5-8 in each of the fields on both the
Network side and the DSX-1 side. Although you can choose any value for the
DSX-1 side, the default value displayed is based on a typical setting that would
be used with the corresponding Network side value. Typical pairs of values are
shown in the table below. If you change the setting of None to anything else, the
DSX side value is changed to the corresponding default value.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-8. Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values (1 of 2)
Network
DSX-1 Side
Default
Value
Meaning
Side Value
None
No signaling used on this DS0. Use this setting if there is
no voice signaling information being passed on this DS0
(clear channel).
None
RBS
(default)
Robbed Bit Signaling is used on this DS0, but no trunk
conditioning. Signaling bits will be passed to the T1
interface to which this DS0 is cross-connected when this
T1 interface is not in CGA, but the signaling bits will be all
ones when CGA is present.
RBS
The following values will configure the cross-connect for RBS, as well as perform the
trunk conditioning indicated when a CGA condition occurs. Although the ABCD signaling
bits for each setting are described, only AB bits are transmitted when the
cross-connected T1 interface is using D4 framing.
E&M-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an E&M
interface (ABCD = 0000).
E&M idle
E&M-busy
FXOg-idle
FXOg-busy
FXOl-idle
FXOl-busy
FXSg-idle
FXSg-busy
FXSl-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an
E&M interface (ABCD = 1111).
E&M busy
FXSg-idle
FXSg-busy
FXSl-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO
Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an
FXO Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO
Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an
FXO Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
FXSl-busy
FXOg-idle
FXOg-busy
FXOl-idle
FXOl-busy
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS
Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an
FXS Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS
Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).
FXSl-busy
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an
FXS Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 1111).
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-8. Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values (2 of 2)
Network
DSX-1 Side
Default
Value
Meaning
Side Value
FXOD-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an
FXODN interface (ABCD = 0000).
FXSD-idle
FXSD-busy
FXOD-idle
FXOD-busy
PLAR3idle
PLAR3busy
PLAR4idle
PLAR4busy
DPT-idle
FXOD-busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an
FXODN interface (ABCD = 1111).
FXSD-idle
FXSD-busy
PLAR3idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an
FXSDN interface (ABCD = 0000).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an
FXSDN interface (ABCD = 1111).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR
D3 interface (ABCD = 0000).
PLAR3busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an
PLAR D3 interface (ABCD = 1111).
PLAR4idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR
D4 interface (ABCD = 1111).
PLAR4busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an
PLAR D4 interface (ABCD = 0000).
DPO-idle
DPO-busy
DPT-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPO
interface (ABCD = 0000).
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPO
interface (ABCD = 1111).
DPT-busy
DPO-idle
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPT
interface (ABCD = 0000).
DPT-busy
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPT
interface (ABCD = 1111).
DPO-busy
1
USER-xxxx
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected T1
interface during a CGA represent a user-defined pattern of
ABCD = xxxx.
USER-xxxx
1
xxxx is the same value on both the Network and the DSX-1 sides.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Assigning Network 2 Timeslots to Network 1 Interface Timeslots
If you are using a 9261 Dual T1 NAM, you can assign Network 2 interface
timeslots to Network 1 interface timeslots.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Cross Connect → Network to Network
Assignments
2. The Network to Network Assignments screen appears. This screen contains
a matrix of the current cross-connect status of all time slots on the Network 1
interface.
3. Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot (underlined). Use the spacebar
or type in the desired timeslot to display the desired timeslot assignment.
4. Repeat Step 3 until all desired timeslots are assigned. Select Save to save
the assignments, or press ESC to save and return to the Cross Connect
menu.
Network to Network Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning
The second page of the Network to Network Assignments screen enables you to
define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each timeslot on the
Network 1 interface.
Only those Network-to-Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this
page, from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order, by network timeslot.
See DSX-1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning on page 5-40 for more
information.
Enter one of the values shown in Table 5-8 in each of the fields on both the
Network 1 side and the Network 2 side. Although you can choose any value for
the Network 2 side (except None), the default value displayed is based on a
typical setting that would be used with the corresponding Network 1 side value.
Typical pairs of values are shown in Table 5-8, with the Network 1 side on the left
side of the table and the Network 2 side on the right side of the table. If you
change the setting of None to anything else, the Network 2 side value is changed
to the corresponding default value.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Assigning Voice Ports to DSX-1 or Network Interface Timeslots
Use the Voice Port Assignments screen to view the status of all DS0 assignments
on the Network or DSX-1 interface. You can also use this screen to assign voice
ports to selected timeslots.
NOTE:
You can assign voice ports to the DSX-1 interface on the 9161 Single T1
NAM. Voice port assignments on the Dual DSX APM are not supported.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Cross Connect → Voice Port Assignment
2. The Cross Connect menu appears. Select Voice Port Assignment and press
Return. The Voice Port Assignments screen appears.
3. Enter Net1, Net2, or DSX01-1 into the Assign To field to assign voice ports to
the Network 1, Network 2, or DSX-1 interface, respectively.
4. Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot (underlined). Use the spacebar
or type in the desired slot and port. Repeat this step until all desired timeslots
are assigned.
5. Select Save to save the assignments, or press ESC to save and return to the
Cross Connect menu.
Assigning Sync Data Ports
Use the Sync Data Port Assignments screen to view the status of
H
H
H
All DS0 assignments on the Network interface
All DS0 assignments on the DSX-1 interface
A port-to-port assignment
You can also use this screen to assign synchronous data ports to
H
H
Network interface timeslots
DSX-1 interface timeslots
NOTE:
You can assign sync data ports to the DSX-1 interface on the 9161 Single
T1 NAM. Sync data port assignments on the Dual DSX APM are not
supported.
H
Another synchronous data port
NOTE:
Only one port-to-port assignment is allowed, with a maximum of 24 DS0s
for 9161 Single T1 NAM, 16 DS0s for 9261 Dual T1 NAM.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Cross Connect → Sync Data Port
Assignment
2. The Sync Data Port Assignments screen appears. Enter one of the following
into the Assign To field:
If you want to assign to . . .
Then enter . . .
Net1 or Net2
DSX01-1
Network interface timeslots
DSX-1 interface timeslots on the 9161
Single T1 NAM
Another Sync Data port
Port
3. Enter the number of DS0s to allocate.
4. Enter one of the following into the Assign By field:
Enter . . .
To . . .
Channel
Assign ports individually. However, a Sync Data port can be
assigned to multiple timeslots which do not have to be
contiguous. As you assign multiple timeslots to a port, the data
port rate increases by the Port Base Rate defined on the
Synchronous Data Port Options screen (see Configuring Sync
Data Ports on page 5-16).
Block
Assign a block of contiguous channels by specifying the number
of DS0s. The number of DS0s is limited to the largest
contiguous block of timeslots, and only starting timeslots that
have enough contiguous timeslots following will be selectable.
ACAMI
Assign a block of contiguous channels as in the Block method,
except that the number of channels assigned is twice the
number of DS0s to allocate. Every other timeslot is filled with all
ones to maintain ones density on the interface.
5. Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot (underlined). Use the spacebar
or type in the desired slot and port. Repeat this step until all desired timeslots
are assigned.
6. Select Save to save the assignments, or press ESC to save and return to the
Cross Connect menu.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Assigning OCU-DP Data Ports
Use the OCU-DP Port Assignments screen to view the status of:
H
H
All DS0 assignments on the Network interface
All DS0 assignments on the DSX-1 interface
You can also use this screen to assign OCU-DP data ports to:
H
H
Network interface timeslots
DSX-1 interface timeslots
NOTES:
You can assign OCU-DP ports to the DSX-1 interface on the 9161 Single
T1 NAM. OCU-DP port assignments on the Dual DSX APM are not
supported.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Cross Connect → OCU-DP Port Assignment
2. The OCU-DP Port Assignments screen appears. Enter one of the following
into the Assign To field:
If you want to assign to . . .
Then enter . . .
Net1 or Net2
DSX01-1
Network interface timeslots
DSX-1 interface timeslots on the 9161
Single T1 NAM
3. Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot (underlined). Use the spacebar
or type in the desired slot and port. Repeat this step until all desired timeslots
are assigned.
4. Select Save to save the assignments, or press ESC to save and return to the
Cross Connect menu.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Clearing Port Assignments
Clearing port assignments sets the selected timeslots to unassigned. You can
clear all port assignments for:
H
H
H
This device
A specified slot
A specified interface
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Cross Connect → Clear Assignments
2. Select one of the following:
To clear . . .
Then select . . .
All assignments for the DSX-1 time slots, Clear All
Network time slots, voice ports, and
Sync Data ports
All assignments for the Network 1
Interface time slots
Clear Network 1 Interface Time Slots
All assignments for the Network 2
Interface time slots
Clear Network 2 Interface Time Slots
Clear DSX01-1 Time Slots
All assignments for the DSX01-1 time
slots on a 9161 Single T1 NAM
Assignments for the synchronous data
ports on the NAM in slot ss
Clear Slot ss – NAM Sync Data Ports
Clear DSXss-1 Interface Time Slots
Clear DSXss-2 Interface Time Slots
All assignments for the DSX-1
interface 1 time slots in slot ss
All assignments for the DSX-1
interface 2 time slots in slot ss
Assignments for timeslots or ports on the Clear Slot ss – xxxxx
APM in slot ss
where xxxxx = name or type of APM
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting System Options
Use the System Options screen (see Table 5-9) to set the:
H
H
H
H
Generation of yellow alarm signals
User-initiated test timeout
Clock Source (primary, secondary, external clock rate)
Generation of primary/secondary clock failure ASCII alarm messages
Use the following menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → System Options
Table 5-9. System Options (1 of 4)
Generate Yellow Alarm Signals
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the T1 access unit generates yellow alarm signals on the network
and DSX-1 Drop/Insert T1 interfaces. The yellow alarm signal is generated in
accordance with AT&T Pub TR 62411 when a continuous LOS/OOF condition (red
Carrier Failure Alarm (CFA) or AIS signal (Blue CFA)) is detected.
H Generate Yellow Alarm Signals does not appear if:
– DSX-1 Interface on the 9161 Single T1 NAM is set to Disable or,
– 9261 Dual T1 NAM is installed
Enable – The T1 access unit generates yellow alarm signals.
Disable – The T1 access unit does not generate yellow alarm signals.
NOTE: When this configuration option is disabled, the DTE equipment connected
to the DSX-1 interface is responsible for generation of the yellow alarm
signal for CFAs on the network T1.
Test Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether or not user-initiated loopback and pattern tests have a duration
after which they are terminated. This option does not pertain to a DTE-initiated
loopback.
Enable – User-initiated loopback and pattern tests have a timeout. This setting is
recommended when the T1 access unit is managed remotely through an in-band data
stream such as EDL, FDL, or DDL. If the T1 access unit is accidently commanded to
execute a test on the interface providing the management access, control can be
regained after the timeout expires, terminating the test.
Disable – Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-9. System Options (2 of 4)
Test Duration (min)
Possible Settings: 1 – 120
Default Setting: 10
Specifies the duration of the user-initiated loopback or pattern tests.
H Test Duration (min) only appears if Test Timeout is set to Enable.
1 to 120 – Timeout values in minutes.
Primary Clock Source
Possible Settings: Net1, Net2, DSXss-p, Internal, External, Sync Data
Default Setting: Net1
The source selected for this configuration option provides all of the timing within the
T1 access unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces. Failure of the clock
specified by this configuration option results in automatic fallback to the Secondary
Clock Source configuration option setting. Only one APM clock source can be selected
for either primary or secondary clock.
NOTE: For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options, only Sync Data and
Internal can be selected for both options. All other selections must have
different settings (e.g., if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1, Secondary
Clock Source cannot be set to Net1).
Net1 – The primary clock for the unit is derived from the Network 1 T1 interface.
Net2 – The primary clock for the unit is derived from the Network 2 T1 interface.
DSXss-p – The primary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX-T1 interface, where
ss is the slot number and p is the port number. This selection is only available if a
DSX-1 interface is enabled.
Internal – The primary clock for the unit is the internal clock.
External – The primary clock for the unit is the external clock (XTXC) provided through
one of the synchronous data ports (specified in the Port options). Only a disabled port
can be selected, and the port cannot be used for data. This selection only appears if at
least one synchronous data port is disabled.
Sync Data – The primary clock for the unit is derived from the XTXC signal of a
synchronous data port (specified in the Port configuration options). Only an enabled port
can be selected. This selection only appears if at least one synchronous data port is
enabled.
NOTE: If an EDL for the port is enabled, the external device must provide a clock
8 kbps less than the expected data port rate. For example, if 64 kbps is the
selected port rate, the external clock source should supply a 56 kbps clock
signal.
Port (for Primary Clock Source)
Possible Settings: SssPp
Default Setting: the first available port
Selects a slot and a port number for the Primary Clock Source.
H Port only appears if Primary Clock Source is set to Sync Data or External.
SssPp – Where ss is the slot number and p is the port number for the Primary Clock
Source.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-9. System Options (3 of 4)
Secondary Clock Source
Possible Settings: Net1, Net2, DSXss-p, Internal, External, Sync Data
Default Setting: Internal
Provides a secondary clock source when the primary clock source fails. The source
selected for this configuration option provides all of the timing within the unit and the
clocks for all of the external interfaces. Only one APM clock source can be selected as
the clock source for either primary or secondary clock. The clock source will switch back
to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds. If the
secondary clock source fails, the clock source will switch to internal. The clock source
will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for
10 seconds.
NOTE: For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options, only Sync Data and
Internal can be selected for both options. All other selections must have
different settings (e.g., if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1, Secondary
Clock Source cannot be set to Net1).
Net1 – The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the Network 1 T1 interface.
Net2 – The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the Network 2 T1 interface.
DSXss-p – The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX-1 interface, where
ss is the slot number and p is the port number. This selection is only available if a
DSX-1 interface is enabled.
Internal – The secondary clock for the unit is the internal clock.
External – The secondary clock for the unit is the external clock (XTXC) provided
through one of the synchronous data ports (specified in the Port configuration option).
Only a disabled port can be selected and the port cannot be used for data. This
selection only appears if at least one synchronous data port is disabled.
Sync Data – The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the XTXC signal of a
synchronous data port (specified in the Port configuration options). Only an enabled port
can be selected. This selection only appears if at least one synchronous data port is
enabled.
NOTE: If an EDL for the port is enabled, the external device must provide a clock
8 kbps less than the expected data port rate. For example, if 64 kbps is the
selected port rate, the external clock source should supply a 56 kbps clock
signal.
Port (for Secondary Clock Source)
Possible Settings: SssPp
Default Setting: the first available port
Selects a slot and a port number for the Secondary Clock Source.
H Port only appears if Secondary Clock Source is set to Sync Data or External.
SssPp – Where ss is the slot number and p is the port number for the Secondary Clock
Source.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-9. System Options (4 of 4)
External Clock Rate (KHz)
Possible Settings: 8, 1544, 2048
Default Setting: 1544
Determines the clock rate when a clock source is configured for an external clock in
kilohertz.
H External Clock Rate only appears if Primary or Secondary Clock Source is set to
External.
8 – The external clock rate is 8 KHz.
1544 – The external clock rate is 1544 KHz.
2048 – The external clock rate is 2048 KHz.
Primary Clock Failure Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an ASCII alarm message is generated when a Primary Clock Failure
is detected.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
Secondary Clock Failure Alarm
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether an ASCII alarm message is generated when a Secondary Clock
Failure is detected.
Enable – Generates an ASCII alarm message.
Disable – Does not generate an ASCII alarm message.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting User Interface Options
Use the User Interface options to set up:
H
H
H
The Communication Port
Support an external device connected to the Communication Port
Support a Telnet or FTP session through an interconnected IP network
Setting Up the Communication Port
Use the Communication Port Options screen (see Table 5-10) to configure the
COM port for one of the following functions:
H
H
H
ASCII terminal interface
Network communication link to an IP network or IP device
Alarm port for sending ASCII alarm messages
This screen differs depending upon whether the COM port is configured for
synchronous or asynchronous operation.
Configuration Edit/Display → User Interface → Communication Port Options
Table 5-10. Communication Port Options (1 of 5)
Port Use
Possible Settings: Terminal, Net Link, Alarm
Default Setting: Terminal
Assigns a specific use to the communication (COM) port.
Terminal – The COM port is the asynchronous terminal interface port.
NOTES: – ASCII alarm messages may also be supported when the asynchronous
terminal interface is not in use.
– If the Default Network Destination is set to COM (see Table 5-14) and
you change Port Use to Terminal or Alarm, the Default Network
Destination is forced to None.
Net Link – The COM port is the network communication link to the IP network or
IP device port.
CAUTION: If Net Link is used with an external modem attached to the COM port, be
aware of the potential security risk of unwanted access to the NMS, or to
other devices on the LAN to which the access device has routing table
entries for subnet or host routes.
Alarm – The COM port is the ASCII alarm message port.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-10. Communication Port Options (2 of 5)
Port Type
Possible Settings: Asynchronous, Synchronous
Default Setting: Asynchronous
Specifies whether the port transmits synchronous or asynchronous data.
Asynchronous – The port uses asynchronous communication.
Synchronous – The port uses synchronous communication. Synchronous is only valid
when Port Use is set to Net Link.
Clock Source
Possible Settings: Internal, External
Default Setting: Internal
Specifies whether the port uses internal or external clocking when the COM port is set
for synchronous transmission. For synchronous operation, the COM port is always
defined as a DCE. This configuration option reverses the direction of the clock (TXC,
and RXC) interchange circuits and allows the COM port to accept clocking from an
external device.
Connection to another DCE requires the use of a crossover cable.
H Clock Source does not appear if Port Type is set to Asynchronous.
Internal – The COM port uses internal clocking.
External – The COM port uses external clocking.
Data Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings: 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2
Default Setting: 19.2
Specifies the bits per second rate for the COM port.
H Data Rate (Kbps) does not appear if:
– Port Type is set to Synchronous and,
– Clock Source is set to External.
9.6 – Sets the COM port rate to 9600 bps.
14.4 – Sets the COM port rate to 14,400 bps.
19.2 – Sets the COM port rate to 19,200 bps.
28.8 – Sets the COM port rate to 28,800 bps. (Running above 28.8 may cause problems
on older PCs.)
38.4 – Sets the COM port rate to 38,400 bps.
CAUTION: The following speeds (57.6 and 115.2 Kbps) are intended to be used for
FTP file transfers only. If you configure one of these rates, be sure to
use the standard 14′ COM port cable or an equivalent short, low
capacitance cable.
57.6 – Sets the COM port rate to 57,600 bps.
115.2 – Sets the COM port rate to 115,200 bps.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-10. Communication Port Options (3 of 5)
Character Length
Possible Settings: 7, 8
Default Setting: 8
Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character. The character length
must be set to 8 bits when using the communication port as the network communication
link.
H Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net Link
and Port Type is set to Asynchronous.
7 – Sets the character length to seven bits.
8 – Sets the character length to eight bits. You must use this setting if using the COM
port as the network communication link.
Parity
Possible Settings: None, Even, Odd
Default Setting: None
Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port.
None – Provides no Parity.
Even – Makes the sum of all 1 bits in the character and its corresponding parity bit
always even.
Odd – Makes the sum of all 1 bits in the character and its corresponding parity bit
always odd.
Stop Bits
Possible Settings: 1, 1.5, 2
Default Setting: 1
Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port.
1 – Provides one stop bit.
1.5 – Provides one and a half stop bits.
2 – Provides two stop bits.
Ignore Control Leads
Possible Settings: Disable, DTR
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether Data Terminal Ready (DTR) is used.
Disable – Treats control leads as standard operation.
DTR – Ignores DTR. This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD (Packet
Assembly and Disassembly) devices.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-10. Communication Port Options (4 of 5)
Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether a user ID and password is required in order to log on to the
asynchronous terminal interface on the COM port.
H Login Required does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms.
Enable – Requires a user ID and password to access the asynchronous terminal
interface.
Disable – Does not require a user ID and password to access the asynchronous
terminal interface.
Port Access Level
Possible Settings: Level 1, Level 2, Level 3
Default Setting: Level 1
Specifies level of user access privilege for the asynchronous terminal interface.
H Port Access Level does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms.
Level-1 – Allows full access and control of the device, including monitoring, diagnostics,
and configuration. The user can add, change, and display configuration options, save,
and perform device testing.
Level-2 – Allows limited access and control of the device. The user can monitor and
perform diagnostics, display status and configuration options information.
Level-3 – Allows limited access with monitoring control only. The user can monitor and
display status and configuration screens only.
Inactivity Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity
(no keyboard activity).
H Inactivity Timeout does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms.
NOTE: Changing this setting does not affect the current session; it changes all
subsequent sessions.
Enable – Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity.
Disable – Does not disconnect user session.
Disconnect Time (Minutes)
Possible Settings: 1 – 60
Default Setting: 5
Determines the amount of lapsed time before disconnecting a user session in minutes.
H Disconnect Time (Minutes) does not appear if:
– Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms.
– Inactivity Time is set to Disable.
1 – 60 – Set the time from 1 to 60 minutes.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-10. Communication Port Options (5 of 5)
RIP
Possible Settings: None, Proprietary
Default Setting: None
Specifies which routing information protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of
management between devices.
H RIP only appears if Port Use is set to Net Link.
NOTE: Changing this setting does not affect the current session; it changes all
subsequent sessions.
None – No routing is used. Use this setting when the device at the other end of the
management link is not a Paradyne device.
Proprietary – A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing
information between devices to enable routing of IP traffic.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting Up the Communication Port to Support an External Device
NOTE:
To detect when the external device connection has been lost, the
communication port’s DTR lead should be connected to the external device’s
DSR lead using a standard EIA-232 crossover cable (the communication
port’s DTR lead is monitored for loss of connection). The external device
must be configured to drop DSR when a disconnect occurs, and to ignore
DTR.
Use the External Device Options screen (see Table 5-11) to set up the COM port
to support an external device such as a modem or a PAD. These options control
call processing for an external device.
Configuration Edit/Display → User Interface → External Device
Table 5-11. External Device (COM Port) Options (1 of 3)
External Device Commands
Possible Settings: Disable, AT, Other
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies the external device commands to be sent out from the COM port to control the
device.
NOTE: The Carrier Detect (CD) lead detects loss of the external device, therefore
the external device must not force CD on.
Disable – Commands are not sent out from the communication port.
NOTE: You must use this setting if you have an async terminal connected to the
COM port.
AT – AT commands are sent out from the COM port. All AT command strings end with a
carriage return (hex 0x0D) and a line feed (hex 0x0A).
Other – Commands configured by the user are sent out from the COM port.
CAUTION: You must not use this setting if you have an async terminal connected to
the COM port.
NOTE: Connect Prefix, Connect Indication String, Escape Sequence, Escape
Sequence Delay, and Disconnect String options will only be used when the
setting is Other. Refer to the Control Characters table on page 5-60.
Dial-In Access
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Controls whether external devices can dial-in to the T1 access unit through the
communication port (based on the Communication Use configuration option setting).
Enable – Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or
IP address.
Disable – Does not answer incoming calls. Refer to the Control Characters table on
page 5-60.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-11. External Device (COM Port) Options (2 of 3)
Connect Prefix
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: Clear
Specifies the Connect Prefix to dial the directory telephone number. Only used by the
T1 access unit when External Device Commands is set to Other.
ASCII Text Field – Changes the Connect Prefix (maximum 20 characters). Refer to the
Control Characters table.
Clear – Clears the connect prefix. No connect prefix is used. Refer to the Control
Characters table on page 5-60.
H Connect Prefix only appears if External Device Commands is set to Other.
Connect Indication String
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: Clear
Specifies the connect indication string and determines whether a connection (alarms or
traps have been dialed out) is established through the COM port. The T1 access unit
searches the COM port’s receive data stream for the Connect Indication String. If not
received within 1 minute, the connection times out. Only used by the T1 access unit
when External Device Commands is set to Other.
ASCII Text Field – Adds to or changes the Connection Indication String (maximum
20 characters). Refer to the Control Characters table on page 5-60.
Clear – Clears the connect prefix. The COM port’s receive data stream is not searched,
and the Carrier Detect (CD) lead is used to determine that a connection has been
established.
H Connect Indication String only appears if External Device Commands is set to
Other.
Escape Sequence
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: Clear
Specifies the COM port’s escape sequence used to switch an external device to
command mode before commanding the external device to disconnect. Only used by the
T1 access unit when External Device Commands is set to Other.
ASCII Text Field – Changes the Escape Sequence (maximum 20 characters).
Clear – Clears and sets the Escape Sequence. No Escape Sequence is sent out.
H Escape Sequence only appears if External Device Commands is set to Other.
Escape Sequence Delay (Sec)
Possible Settings: None, 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0
Default Setting: None
Specifies the delay before sending the first character of the escape sequence and the
delay after the last character of the escape in seconds. During the delay, no data is sent
from the communication port. Only used by the T1 access unit when External Device
Commands is set to Other.
None – No communication port escape delay.
x.x – The delay (0.2, 0.4. 0.6, 0.8, 1.0) used during the COM port’s escape sequence.
This delay must be configured for a delay greater than or equal to the escape guard time
required by the external device.
H Escape Sequence Delay only appears if External Device Commands is set to
Other.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-11. External Device (COM Port) Options (3 of 3)
Disconnect String
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: Clear
Specifies the command used to disconnect an external device. Only used by the
T1 access unit when External Device Commands is set to Other.
ASCII Text Field – Adds to or changes the Disconnect String (maximum 20 characters).
Refer to the Control Characters table on page 5-60.
Clear – Clears and sets the Disconnect String.
H Disconnect String only appears if External Device Commands is set to Other.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Control Characters
ASCII
Sequence
^A or ^a
^B or ^b
^C or ^c
^D or ^d
^E or ^e
^F or ^f
^G or ^g
^H or ^h
^I or ^i
Hex
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
0x0F
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x1F
HT
^J or ^j
^K or ^k
^L or ^l
^M or ^m
^N or ^n
^O or ^o
^P or ^p
^Q or ^q
^R or ^r
^S or ^s
^T or ^t
^U or ^u
^V or ^v
^W or ^w
^X or ^x
^Y or ^y
^Z or ^z
^{ or ^[
LF or NL
VT
FF or NP
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
^\ or ^|
^] or ^}
GS
^^ or ^~
^–
RS
US
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting Up to Support a Telnet or FTP Session
Use the Telnet/FTP Session Options screen to allow a Telnet or FTP session
through an interconnected IP network. These options also set up security for the
Telnet or FTP session (see Table 5-12). Only one Telnet session can be active at
any one time.
" Procedure
1. Set the Node IP Address, Node Subnet Mask, Default Network Destination,
and the Communication Protocol Port Link (see Table 5-14). Follow this menu
selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Management and
Communication → Communication Protocol
2. Set the Telnet/FTP configuration options (see Table 5-12). Follow this menu
selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → User Interface → Telnet Session
3. The Telnet/FTP Session Options screen appears. Enter the desired setting in
each selected field.
4. Set the Port Use configuration option to Net Link (see Table 5-10). Follow this
menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → User Interface → Communication Port
Or, set the Management Link configuration option to FDL or DDL, and set the
IP address (see Table 5-12). Follow this menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Network Interface Options
Or, set the Embedded Data Link configuration option to Enable for the
Synchronous Data Port, and set the IP address (see Table 5-3). Follow this
menu selection sequence:
Configuration Edit/Display → Synchronous Data Port Options
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-12. Telnet/FTP Session Options (1 of 2)
Telnet Session
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether the unit responds to a Telnet session request from a Telnet client on
an interconnected IP network.
Enable – Allows Telnet sessions between the unit and Telnet client.
Disable – Telnet sessions are not allowed.
Telnet Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether a user ID and password is required to sign on the async terminal
interface through a Telnet session. If required, the login used is the same login used for
an async terminal interface session.
Enable – Requires a user ID and password to sign on a Telnet session.
Disable – Does not require a user ID and password to sign on a Telnet session.
Session Access Level
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3
Default Setting: Level-1
Specifies the highest access level allowed during a Telnet session. Effective access
level is the lower of either your personal or Telnet session access levels.
Level-1 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with
the capability to view system information, change configuration options, and run tests.
This is the highest access level allowed. Use this setting when downloading files.
Level-2 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with
the capability to view system information and run tests only; they cannot change
configuration options.
Level-3 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with
the capability to view system information only; they cannot change configuration options
or run tests.
Inactivity Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of
keyboard inactivity.
NOTE: Changing this setting does not affect the current session; it changes all
subsequent sessions.
Enable – Terminates Telnet session after the specified time of inactivity.
Disable – Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity.
Disconnect Time (Minutes)
Possible Settings: 1 – 60
Default Setting: 5
Determines the amount of keyboard inactive time before disconnecting.
H Disconnect Time (Minutes) does not appear if Inactivity Timeout is set to Disable.
1 – 60 – Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-12. Telnet/FTP Session Options (2 of 2)
FTP Session
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the T1 access unit responds as a server to an FTP session request
from an FTP client on an interconnected IP network. Must be enabled when
downloading files.
Enable – Allows an FTP session between the T1 access unit and an FTP client.
Disable – Does not allow an FTP session.
FTP Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether a user ID and password is required for an FTP session. If required,
the login used is the same login used for an async terminal interface session.
Enable – User is prompted for a user ID and password for an FTP session.
Disable – User is not prompted for a user ID and password for an FTP session.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Configuring for Alarms and Traps
Use the Alarm options screen (see Table 5-13) to control when and how alarm
and trap conditions are automatically initiated by the system.
Configuration Edit/Display → Alarm
Table 5-13. Alarm Options (1 of 3)
ASCII Alarm Message
Possible Settings: Com Port, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Controls the generation and routing of alarm messages to an ASCII terminal or printer
attached to the COM port (either local or remote via an external device).
Com Port – Generates and sends alarm messages to COM port when the Port Use
option is set to Alarm (see Table 5-10).
Disable – Does not generate alarm messages.
Alarm & Trap Dial Out
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Controls whether alarm or SNMP trap messages initiate a call if a connection on the
COM port’s external device has not already been established. If the call is incomplete
and the Call Retry configuration option is set to Enable, the alarm or SNMP trap
message is held until the call completes or the maximum retry count is exceeded. If
more that one alarm message is received while waiting for a call retry, only the highest
priority alarm message received is held; all previous messages are discarded. When the
port is configured as a network communication link, up to 10 SNMP messages are held
(queued) at the interface.
Enable – Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Alarm directory.
Disable – Holds (queues) SNMP trap messages sent to the COM port external device if
the COM port external device was not previously established. Does not hold alarm
messages.
Trap Disconnect
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the COM port external device connection is disconnected after
sending an SNMP trap message. This configuration option only applies to COM port
external device connections initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message.
Enable – Disconnects the COM port external device call after sending an SNMP trap
message.
Disable – Does not disconnect the COM port external device call after sending an
SNMP trap message and holds the line until it is disconnected manually or by the
remote modem. This enables the NMS to poll the NAM for more information after
receiving the SNMP traps.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-13. Alarm Options (2 of 3)
Call Retry
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Controls whether an incomplete call (busy, no answer, etc.) from the alarm or SNMP
trap to the COM port’s external device is retried. Attempts the call up to 5 times per
alarm or SNMP trap message.
Enable – Retries incomplete calls with a delay as specified by the Dial-Out Delay Time
configuration option between call attempts.
Disable – Does not retry an incomplete call.
Dial-Out Delay TIme (Min)
Possible Settings: 1 – 10
Default Setting: 5
Specifies the number of minutes to wait between successive dial-out alarms and SNMP
trap messages and call retry attempts in minutes.
1 – 10 – The number of minutes to delay between calls.
Alternate Dial-Out Directory
Possible Settings: None, 1 – 5
Default Setting: None
Specifies whether an incomplete call (busy, or no answer, etc.) from the alarm or SNMP
trap to the COM port’s external device is retried using an alternate telephone number.
Attempts the call up to 5 times per alarm or SNMP trap message.
None – Alternate alarm dial out is not performed.
1 – 5 – Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call in the event
that a call cannot be completed to the phone number contained in the Alarm directory.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-13. Alarm Options (3 of 3)
System Alarm Relay
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether an alarm condition for the T1 access unit will activate the system
alarm relay. The alarm relay is deactivated when the condition causing the alarm is
corrected. If more than one alarm condition is present, the alarm relay remains active
until all alarm conditions are cleared for that T1 access unit. You can also deactivate an
alarm via the System Alarm Relay Cut-Off selection from the Control menu.
H System Alarm Relay only appears if the NAM is installed in a 5-slot housing or
access carrier.
Alarm conditions are:
H Power supply/fan tray alarm.
H Continuous Loss of Signal (LOS) condition at either the Network or DSX-1
interface, or on any OCU-DP port.
H Continuous Out of Frame (OOF) condition at either the Network or DSX-1
interface.
H Yellow alarm on either the Network or DSX-1 interface.
H Continuous Out of Frame (OOF) condition at any synchronous data port that has
the EDL set to Enable.
H Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) received at either the Network or DSX-1 interface.
H Excessive Error Rate (EER) detected at the Network interface.
H Excessive Error Rate (EER) detected at any synchronous data port that has
Embedded Data Link set to Enable (see Table 5-3).
H Primary or Secondary Clock Failure.
H Failure of an APM.
H An APM is inserted that does not match the configuration.
H Abnormal Station Code on any OCU-DP port.
H DDS Network Failure on any OCU-DP port.
H Loss of Loop Timing on any OCU-DP port.
Enable – Activates alarm conditions on the system alarm relay when an alarm condition
occurs.
Disable – Does not activate alarm conditions on the system alarm relay when an alarm
condition occurs.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting Management and Communication Options
Use the Management and Communication Options to set up:
H
H
H
H
H
Communication Protocol
General SNMP Management
SNMP NMS Security
SNMP Traps
Telnet/FTP
Setting Communication Protocol
Use the Communication Protocol Options (see Table 5-14) to specify what is
needed to support the IP communication network.
Configuration Edit/Display → Management and Communication →
Communication Protocol
NOTE:
Be sure to choose an operational link for the default. Should the default link
become disabled, unrouteable data will be discarded.
Table 5-14. Communication Protocol Options (1 of 3)
Node IP Address
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the IP address needed to access the node. Since this IP address is not bound
to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a logical management link.
000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the node, which you
can view or edit. The first digit (i.e., xxx.255.255.255) cannot be 0 or 127, or greater
than 223. However, 000 is valid, representing a null address.
Clear – Clears the Node IP address and fills the address with zeros
(i.e., 000.000.000.000).
Node Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Node Subnet Mask. Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node. Since this
subnet mask is not bound to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a
logical management link.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the node, which you
can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the node subnet mask and fills the address with zeros. When the node
subnet mask is all zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000), the IP protocol creates a default subnet
mask based on the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-14. Communication Protocol Options (2 of 3)
Default Network Destination
Possible Settings: None, COM, FDL1, FDL2, DDL, EDLss-p
Default Setting: None
Specifies where the default network is connected.
H Default Network Destination is forced to None if:
– Default Network Destination is set to FDL1, FDL2 or DDL and Network
Interface is set to Disable on the Network Interface Options screen (see
Table 5-1).
– Management Link on the Network Interface Options screen is changed to a
value inconsistent with the value of Network Interface Destination.
– Default Network Destination is set to COM and COM Port Use is set to
Terminal or Alarms on the Communication Port Options screen (see
Table 5-10).
– Default Network Destination is set to EDLss-p and EDL Management Link is
set to Disable on the Synchronous Data Port Options screen for Port p of
Slot ss (see Table 5-3).
None – No default network destination. Data that cannot be routed is discarded.
COM – The communication port is the default network destination. This selection only
appears if Port Use is set to Net Link on the Communication Port Options screen (see
Table 5-10).
FDL1 – The FDL is the default network destination on Network Interface 1. This
selection only appears if Management Link is set to FDL on the Network Interface 1
Options screen (see Table 5-1).
FDL2 – The FDL is the default network destination on Network Interface 2. This
selection only appears if Management Link is set to FDL on the Network Interface 2
Options screen (see Table 5-1).
DDL – The DDL is the default network destination. This selection only appears if
Management Link is set to DDL on the Network Interface Options screen (see
Table 5-1).
EDLss-p –The EDL-ss-p port (where ss is the slot number of the NAM or the
synchronous data APM belonging to the ports, and p is the number of the port). This
selection only appears if EDL Management Link is set to Enable on the Synchronous
Data Port Options screen (see Table 5-3) for port p of slot ss.
Communication Port IP Address
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit when the COM port is configured as
a network communication link. The IP address is only in effect when the Communication
Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link (see Table 5-10).
000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the communication port IP address,
which you can view or edit. The first digit (i.e., xxx.255.255.255) cannot be 0 or 127, or
greater than 223. However, 000 is valid, representing a null address.
Clear – Clears the IP address for the communication port and fills the address with
zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000).
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-14. Communication Protocol Options (3 of 3)
Communication Port Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the port is configured as a
network communication link. The subnet mask is only in effect when the Communication
Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link (see Table 5-10).
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the node, which you
can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the communication port and fills the address with
zeros. When the node subnet mask is all zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000), the IP protocol
creates a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address:
Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.
Communication Port Link Protocol
Possible Settings: PPP, SLIP
Default Setting: PPP
Specifies the link layer protocol to use when the communication port is configured as a
network communication link.
PPP – Point-to-Point Protocol.
SLIP – Serial Line IP Protocol.
H This protocol is only in effect when the Communication Port Use configuration
option is set to Net Link (see Table 5-10).
Alternate Communication Port IP Address
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the alternate IP address for the communication port. The Alternate IP Address
is used when a call attempt does not complete on the primary alarm/trap telephone
number contained in the Alarm directory and the alternate dial-out directory is used to
try another telephone number.
000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the communication port IP address,
which you can view or edit. The first digit (i.e., xxx.255.255.255) cannot be 0 or 127, or
greater than 223. However, 000 is valid, representing a null address.
Clear – Clears the alternate IP address for the communication port and fills the address
with zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000).
Alternate Communication Port Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the alternate subnet mask needed for the communication port. The alternate
subnet mask is used when a call attempt does not complete on the primary alarm/trap
telephone number contained in the Alarm directory and the alternate dial-out directory is
used to try another telephone number.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – View or edit the alternate subnet mask for the
node.
Clear – Clears the alternate subnet mask for the communication port and fills the
address with zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000). When the alternate subnet mask is all zeros,
the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address:
Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting Up for SNMP Management
Use the General SNMP Management Options (see Table 5-15) to specify what is
needed to allow the system to be managed as an SNMP agent by an NMS
supporting the SNMP protocol.
Configuration Edit/Display → Management and Communication → General
SNMP Management
Table 5-15. General SNMP Management Options (1 of 2)
SNMP Management
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether SNMP can be used for management of the T1 access unit.
Enable – The T1 access unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP
compatible NMS.
Disable – The T1 access unit will not respond to SNMP messages or send SNMP
traps.
Community Name 1
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: [public] in ASCII text entry
Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the unit’s
Management Information Base (MIB). The community name must be supplied by an
external SNMP manager whenever that manager tries to access an object in the MIB.
ASCII Text Field – Adds to or changes the Community 1 name (maximum
255 characters).
Clear – Clears the Community Name 1 field.
Name 1 Access
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write
Default Setting: Read
Specifies the type of access allowed for community name 1. This is the type of access
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using the
Community Name 1 configuration option.
Read – Allows read-only access to the objects in the MIB for the NAM when using the
Community Name 1 configuration option. This includes all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
Read/Write – Allows read and write access to the objects in the MIB for the NAM when
using the Community Name 1 configuration option. Allows access for all objects
specified as read/write in the MIB RFCs. However, access for all read-only objects is
specified as read-only.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-15. General SNMP Management Options (2 of 2)
Community Name 2
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: blank
Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the unit’s
Management Information Base (MIB). The community name must be supplied by an
external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB.
ASCII Text Field – Add or change the community 2 name (maximum 255 characters).
Clear – Clears the Community Name 2 field.
Name 2 Access
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write
Default Setting: Read
Specifies the type of access allowed for Community Name 2. This is the type of access
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using the
Community Name 2 configuration option.
Read – Allows read-only access to the objects in the MIB for the NAM when using the
Community Name 2 configuration option. This includes all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
Read/Write – Allows read and write access to the objects in the MIB for the NAM when
using the Community Name 2 configuration option. Allows access for all objects
specified as read/write in the MIB RFCs. However, access for all read-only objects is
specified as read-only.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting Up SNMP NMS Security
Use the SNMP NMS Security Options (see Table 5-16) to specify whether a
security check is performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems
attempting to access the node.
Configuration Edit/Display → Management and Communication → SNMP
NMS Security
Table 5-16. SNMP NMS Security Options (1 of 2)
NMS IP Validation
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP
management systems attempting to access the node. Allows access only if IP address
of the sending manager is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen.
Enable – Performs security checks.
Disable – Does not perform security checks.
Number of Managers
Possible Settings: 1 – 10
Default Setting: 1
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send
SNMP messages to the T1 access unit. An IP address must be configured for each
management system allowed to send messages. Configure the IP addresses in the
NMS n IP Address configuration option.
1 – 10 – Specifies the number of managers allowed to send SNMP messages.
NMS n IP Address
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager(s) authorized to send SNMP
messages. If an SNMP message is received from the NMS whose IP address does not
match an address contained in this field, access is denied and an authenticationFailure
trap is generated. If a match is found, the type of access (read-only or read/write) is
determined by the corresponding access level.
000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds or changes the NMS IP address. The first
digit (i.e., xxx.255.255.255) cannot be 127; 127 is a reserved number.
Clear – Clears the NMS IP address and fills the address with zeros
(i.e., 000.000.000.000).
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-16. SNMP NMS Security Options (2 of 2)
Access Level
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write
Default Setting: Read
Specifies the access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is
performed. If the IP address for the NMS sending an SNMP message is on the list of
allowed managers, this configuration option determines the type of access allowed for
that manager.
Read – Read-only access to the objects in the MIB for the T1 access unit. This includes
all objects specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
Read/Write – Read and write access to the objects in the MIB for the T1 access unit.
Allows write access for all objects specified as read/write in the MIB RFCs. However,
access for all read-only objects is specified as read-only.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting Up for SNMP Traps
Use the SNMP Traps Options (see Table 5-17) to specify the information needed
to support SNMP traps. Use the SNMP Trap Options screen to configure the
necessary configuration options needed to support the SNMP traps.
Configuration Edit/Display → Management and Communication → SNMP
Traps
To configure the T1 access unit for SNMP traps you must set:
H
The number of SNMP managers that are to receive SNMP traps from the T1
access unit.
H
H
An IP address for each SNMP manager specified.
The type of SNMP traps to be sent from the T1 access unit.
NOTE:
Be sure to choose an operational link for the default. Should the default link
become disabled, unrouteable traps will be discarded.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Enable sending of SNMP trap
messages
SNMP Traps to Enable.
Specify the number of SNMP
Number of SNMP Managers to the desired
managers that will receive SNMP trap number (maximum of 6) of SNMP
messages from the T1 access unit managers to receive SNMP traps.
Specify an IP address for each SNMP NMS n IP Address to the IP address that
manager specified in the Number of identifies each SNMP manager(s) indicated
SNMP Managers configuration option in the Number of SNMP Managers
configuration option.
Specify the network destination for
the Trap Manager
Destination to one of the following:
Default
COM
FDL
EDL (slot and port number)
Select the type of SNMP trap
messages to be sent from the T1
access unit
H General Traps to enable or disable
warmStart and authenticationFailure
traps.
H Enterprise Specific Traps to enable or
disable enterpriseSpecific traps.
H Link Traps to enable or disable linkDown
and linkUp traps.
H Link Traps Interfaces to specify which
interfaces will generate linkDown, linkUp
and enterpriseSpecific traps.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-17. SNMP Trap Options (1 of 3)
SNMP Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines if SNMP trap messages are sent to the currently configured trap
manager(s).
Enable – Sends trap messages.
Disable – Does not send trap messages.
Number of Trap Managers
Possible Settings: 1 – 6
Default Setting: 1
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems to receive SNMP trap messages
from the NAM. An NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS n IP Address
configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages.
1 – 6 – Specifies the number of trap managers.
NMS n IP Address
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager(s) to receive SNMP traps.
H NMS n IP Address appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap
Managers configuration option.
000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap
manager. The first digit (i.e., xxx.255.255.255) cannot be 0 or 127, or greater than 223.
However, 000 is valid, representing a null address.
Clear – Clears the IP address and fills the address with zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000).
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-17. SNMP Trap Options (2 of 3)
Destination
Possible Settings: Default, COM, FDL1, FDL2, DDL, EDLss-p
Default Setting: Default
Specifies the network destination for the Trap Manager number configuration option.
H Destination appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap
Managers configuration option.
Default – Uses the default network.
COM – Uses the communication port as the network destination. This selection only
appears if the Communication Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link.
FDL1 – Uses FDL as the network destination on Network Interface 1. This selection
only appears if the Management Link configuration option is set to FDL for the network
interface (see Table 5-1).
FDL2 – Uses FDL as the network destination on Network Interface 2. This selection
only appears if the Management Link configuration option is set to FDL for the network
interface (see Table 5-1).
DDL – Uses DDL as the network destination. This selection only appears if the
management link configuration option is set to DDL for the Network interface (see
Table 5-1).
EDLss-p – Uses EDL as the network destination for the synchronous port in slot ss,
port p.
H This selection only appears if the EDL Management Link configuration option is
set to Enable for the given slot and port (see Table 5-3).
NOTE: If the selected network destination link is disabled, the SNMP traps are
discarded. Ensure that an operational link is selected as the default route,
or change the default route if the link becomes nonoperational.
General Traps
Possible Settings: Disable, Warm, AuthFail, Both
Default Setting: Both
Determines if SNMP trap messages for warmStart and/or authenticationFailure events
are sent to the currently configured trap manager(s).
Disable – Does not send trap messages for warmStart or AuthenticationFailure events.
Warm – Sends trap messages for warmStart events.
AuthFail – Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events.
Both – Sends trap messages for both warmStart and AuthenticationFailure events.
Enterprise Specific Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines if trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently
configured trap manager(s).
Enable – Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.
Disable – Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Table 5-17. SNMP Trap Options (3 of 3)
Link Traps
Possible Settings: Disable, Up, Down, Both
Default Setting: Both
Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured
trap manager(s). A linkDown trap indicates that the T1 access unit recognizes a failure
in one of the communication interfaces. A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes
one of its communication interfaces is active. Use the Link Traps Interface configuration
option to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages.
Disable – Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages.
Up – Sends SNMP trap messages for linkUp events.
Down – Sends SNMP trap messages for linkDown events.
Both – Sends SNMP trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events.
Link Traps Interfaces
Possible Settings: Network, DSX-1, T1s, Ports, All
Default Setting: All
Specifies which interface monitors and generates linkUp, linkDown, and
enterpriseSpecific trap messages.
NOTE: These traps are supported on the T1 interfaces, synchronous data ports,
and OCU ports only. They are not supported for the voice ports or
communication port.
Network – Generates trap messages for linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific
events on the T1 interface.
DSX-1 – Generates trap messages for linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific events
on the DSX-1 interfaces.
T1s – Generates trap messages for linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific events on
both the T1 Network and DSX-1 interfaces.
Ports – Generates trap messages for linkUp, linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events
on the synchronous data ports and OCU ports.
All – Generate SNMP trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on the
synchronous data ports, the OCU ports, the T1 network interface, and the DSX-1
interface.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up
Setting Up and Placing a Call
Configure your external device. Then, use the Call Setup screen to:
H
H
H
Look up the desired telephone number
Dial a call
Disconnect a call
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main → Control→ Call Setup
2. The Control menu appears. Select Call Setup and press Return.
3. The Call Setup screen appears. Enter the number of the directory containing
the desired telephone number in the Directory Number field. The telephone
number appears in the Directory Phone Number field. See Displaying
Directory Numbers and Changing Directory Numbers in Chapter 9,
Troubleshooting and Maintenance, for information about the call directory.
4. Select Dial and press the Enter key to initiate dialing.
5. To end the call, select Disconnect and press the Enter key.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
6
Limiting Access
The T1 access unit provides several methods of security by limiting user access
through the following user interfaces:
H
H
H
H
Async Terminal Interface
Telnet
External Devices
SNMP
Limiting Async Terminal Direct Access
The access unit provides the following methods for limiting async terminal direct
access on the communication (COM) port.
H
H
H
Disabling the async terminal direct connection.
Requiring a user login ID and password.
Assigning an access level to the port.
The Communication Port Options screen provides the configuration options to
limit async terminal access on the COM port.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
" Procedure
To limit COM port async terminal access:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration
2. Select the desired configuration area and press Return.
Load Configuration From → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
3. Follow this menu selection sequence, pressing Return after each selection:
Configuration Edit/Display → User Interface → Communication Port
The Communication Port Options screen appears.
4. Select and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Disable an async terminal interface
direct connection
Port Use to Alarms.
Require a user’s login ID and
Login Required to Enable.
password to access the COM port
NOTE: User login ID and password
combinations must be defined.
Refer to Creating a Login on
page 6-8.
Limit the effective access level to
Level 2 or lower
Port Access Level to Level-2.
1
Limit the effective access level to
Level 3
Port Access Level to Level-3.
1
1
Make sure you have at least one login with Level 1 security set. The effective
access level of the session is the lower of either the level set to access the port
(COM port or Telnet), or the login access level.
NOTE:
See Restoring Access to the User Interface in Chapter 8, Operation and
Maintenance, should you inadvertently be locked out.
5. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
6. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
7. Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and
press Return.
Save Configuration To → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears at the bottom of the
screen.
Refer to Chapter 5, Setting Up, for more information about Communication Port
configuration options.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
Limiting Telnet Access
The T1 access unit provides the following methods for limiting access through a
Telnet session:
H
H
H
Disabling Telnet access completely.
Requiring a user login ID and password.
Assigning an access level for the port.
" Procedure
To limit access through a Telnet Session:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration
2. Select the desired configuration area and press Return.
Load Configuration From → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
3. Follow this menu selection sequence, pressing Return after each selection:
Configuration Edit/Display → User Interface → Telnet/FTP Session
The Telnet/FTP Session Options screen appears.
4. Select and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Disable Telnet
Telnet Session to Disable.
Require a user’s login ID and
password
Telnet Login Required to Enable.
NOTE: User login ID and password
combinations must be defined.
Refer to Creating a Login on
page 6-8.
Assign an access level for all Telnet Session Access Level to Level-1, Level-2,
sessions or Level-3.
5. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
6. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
7. Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and
press Return.
Save Configuration To → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears at the bottom of the
screen.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
Controlling External Device Access
The T1 access unit allows you to control whether dial-in access for an external
device (modem) is allowed on the communication port. To connect to an external
device,
H
H
Use the appropriate cable to attach to the COM port as defined in
Appendix E, Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments.
Set the modem for DTR Disconnect using the AT command AT\D2.
Use the External Device Options screen to set the necessary configuration
options that allow dial-in access through the COM port.
" Procedure
To control dial-in access:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration
2. Select the desired configuration area and press Return.
Load Configuration From → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
3. Follow this menu selection sequence, pressing Return after each selection:
Configuration Edit/Display → User Interface → External Device
(Com Port)
The External Device Options screen appears.
4. Select a setting for the Dial-In Access configuration option.
To . . .
Set the Dial-In Access configuration option to . . .
Enable dial-in access
Disable dial-in access
Enable.
Disable.
NOTE:
The data that you enter determines which options display and their order.
5. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
6. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
7. Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and
press Return.
Save Configuration To → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears at the bottom of the
screen.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
See Limiting Async Terminal Direct Access on page 6-1 if you want to limit
access to the dial-in session.
Refer to Setting Up the Communication Port to Support an External Device in
Chapter 5, Setting Up, for more information.
Controlling SNMP Access
The T1 access unit supports SNMP Version 1, which only provides limited
security through the use of community names. There are three methods for
limiting SNMP access:
H
H
H
Disabling SNMP access.
Assigning SNMP community names and access levels.
Assigning IP addresses of NMSs that can access the unit.
Disabling SNMP Access
The General SNMP Options screen provides the configuration option to disable
SNMP access to the unit. When this configuration option is disabled, the access
unit will not respond to any SNMP messages and will not send SNMP traps.
" Procedure
To disable SNMP access:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration
2. Select the desired configuration area and press Return.
Load Configuration From → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
3. Follow this menu selection sequence, pressing Return after each selection:
Configuration Edit/Display → Management and
Communication → General SNMP Management
The General SNMP Management Options screen appears.
4. Set the SNMP Management configuration option to Disable; Disable is the
factory default setting.
5. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
6. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
7. Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and
press Return.
Save Configuration To → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears at the bottom of the
screen.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
Refer to Setting Up for SNMP Management in Chapter 5, Setting Up, for more
information about SNMP configuration options.
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels
The General SNMP Options screen provides the configuration options that allow
the T1 access unit to be managed by an SNMP manager supporting the SNMP
protocol. Use this screen to:
H
H
Assign the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the unit’s
Management Information Base (MIB).
Specify the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name.
NOTE:
Community names are case-sensitive.
" Procedure
To assign SNMP community names and access levels:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration
2. Select the desired configuration area and press Return.
Load Configuration From → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
3. Follow this menu selection sequence, pressing Return after each selection:
Configuration Edit/Display → Management and
Communication → General SNMP Management
The General SNMP Management Options screen appears.
4. Select and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Enable SNMP management for the
access unit
SNMP Management to Enable.
Assign SNMP community names
Community Name 1 and Community
Name 2 to a community name text up to
255 characters in length.
Assign the type of access allowed for Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to
the SNMP community names Read or Read/Write.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
5. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
6. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
7. Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and
press Return.
Save Configuration To → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears at the bottom of the
screen.
Refer to Setting Up for SNMP Management in Chapter 5, Setting Up, for more
information about SNMP configuration options.
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses
The access unit provides an additional level of security by:
H
H
Limiting the IP addresses of the NMSs that can access the unit.
Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management
systems attempting to access the unit.
H
Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address
validation is performed.
The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that
determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP
management systems attempting to communicate with the unit.
Make sure that the SNMP Management configuration option is set to Enable.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Desired configuration area→
Management and Communication→ General SNMP Management→
SNMP Management→ Enable
" Procedure
To limit SNMP access through IP addresses:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration
2. Select the desired configuration area and press Return.
Load Configuration From → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
3. Follow this menu selection sequence, pressing Return after each selection:
Configuration Edit/Display → Management and Communication →
SNMP NMS Security
The SNMP NMS Security Options screen appears.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
4. Select and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Enable IP address checking
NMS IP Validation to Enable.
Specify the number (between 1 and 10) of
SNMP management systems that are
authorized to send SNMP messages to the
access unit
Number of Managers to the desired
number.
Specify the IP address(es) that identifies
the SNMP manager(s) authorized to send
SNMP messages to the access unit
NMS n IP Address to the appropriate
IP address.
Specify the access allowed for an
authorized NMS when IP address validates
is performed
Access Type to Read or Read/Write.
5. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
6. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
7. Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and
press Return.
Save Configuration To → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears at the bottom of the
screen.
Refer to Setting Up for SNMP Management in Chapter 5, Setting Up, for more
information about SNMP configuration options.
Creating a Login
A login ID and password is required if security is enabled.* You can define up to
six logins (login ID/password combinations). Each login must be unique and have
a specified access level.
" Procedure
To create a login:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Control → Admin Login
2. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
3. Select New and press Return.
4. Enter login ID, password, and security level information.
* Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the Communication Port, and Telnet Login
Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet/FTP Session.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
In the field . . .
Login ID
Enter the . . .
ID of 1 to 10 characters.
Password from 1 to 10 characters.
Password
Re-enter Password
Password again to verify that you entered the
correct password into the device.
Access Level
Access level: 1, 2, or 3.
5. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
6. To save login information, select Save and press Return.
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears in the message area
at the bottom of the screen. The cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field,
ready for another entry.
Refer to Chapter 5, Setting Up, for more information about security and login
configuration options.
Deleting a Login
A login record can be deleted.
NOTE:
To change a login, delete the current login and create a new one.
" Procedure
To delete a login record:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Control → Admin Login
2. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
3. Select PgUp or PgDn and press Return to page through login pages/records
until you find the one to be deleted.
4. Once the correct record is displayed, select Delete and press Return.
5. To save the deletion, select Save and press Return.
When the deletion is complete, Command Complete appears in the message
area at the bottom of the screen. The number of login pages/records reflects
one less record, and the record following the deleted record appears.
Example:
Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
This page intentionally left blank.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
7
Displaying System and NAM Identity Information
Use the System & NAM Identity screen to display identification information about
the system and T1 NAM. This information is useful if you are purchasing
additional or replacement units and/or making firmware upgrades. Use the
following menu sequence to display System and NAM identity information.
Main Menu → Status → Identity → System & NAM
View this field . . .
System Name
To find the . . .
System name configured for the unit.
Contact person for the unit.
System location of the unit.
NAM’s 4-digit model number (9161 or 9261).
NAM’s 7-digit serial number.
NAM’s software version.
System Contact
System Location
Model Number
Serial Number
Software Revision
Hardware Revision
NAM’s hardware version.
The above information is entered using the following menu sequence.
Main Menu → Control → Device Name
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Displaying APM Identity Information
Use the APM Identity screen to display identification information about a
particular APM. This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or
replacement APMs.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu sequence to display the APM Identity Slot screen.
Main Menu → Status → Identity → APM
2. Press the spacebar to cycle through the set of slots consisting of the NAM
and all APMs associated with it. The slot order sequence consists of the slot
assignment for the APMs in order from lowest (02) to highest (05 for 5-slot
housing) slot number.
The following information is available for viewing. Use the right and left arrow
keys to scroll additional text into view.
View this field . . .
To find the . . .
1
APM Type
APM type (Sync Data, DSX-1, E&M Voice, FXS Voice,
FXO Voice, OCU (2) or OCU (6)).
Serial Number
APM’s 7-digit serial number.
Software Revision
APM’s software version level (6-digit) of the installed
firmware. The software revision will be the same as the
NAM software revision if the APM has no
processor/code of its own.
Hardware Revision
APM’s hardware revision level (7-digit) of the main
circuit card assembly (CCA).
1
The APM Type field can also display:
Empty – If the APM slot is empty and was not previously configured.
Unsupport – If an unrecognized APM is installed.
Misconfig – If a misconfiguration condition occurs. Refer to ASCII Alarm Messages
in Chapter 9, Troubleshooting.
Failed – The APM was removed from the slot, or the APM is not operational.
Displaying System and Test Status
Use the System and Test Status screen to display information concerning:
H
H
H
System Health and Status
Self-Test results
Status of tests currently running
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Chapter 7, Maintenance and Troubleshooting, contains a list of all status
messages and recommended action for you to take. Use the following menu
sequence to display system and test status information.
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status
Displaying Voice APM Status
Use the Voice APM Status screen to display information concerning voice cards
that you have installed in your system.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu sequence to display the Voice APM Status screen.
Main Menu → Status → Voice Status
2. Enter the slot number of the desired voice APM in the SLOT field. The Voice
Port Status screen differs, depending on whether you are accessing an E&M,
FXO or FXS Voice APM.
View this field . . .
For the E&M Voice APM
Port Status
To find the . . .
Status of the port.
Assigned To
Interface the port is assigned to.
Operating Mode
Operating mode of the voice port that was configured
using the Operating Mode configuration option on the
Voice Ports screen. See the Technical Reference for
configuration information.
Signaling Type
Type of signaling used by the voice port that was
configured using the switches on the E&M APM. See
the 9109 E&M Analog Voice Application Module (APM)
Installation Instructions for more information.
Call Progress
TX ABCD bits
Current condition of the port.
Current value of the ABCD bits that are being
transmitted to the T1 interface.
RX ABCD bits
Current value of the ABCD bits that are being received
from the T1 interface.
E-Lead State
Current status of the E-lead (On or Off).
Current status of the M-lead (On or Off).
M-Lead State
Trunk Cond CGA
Displays the status of trunk conditioning (On for CGA,
Off for no CGA).
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
View this field . . .
To find the . . .
For the FXO Voice APM
Port Status
Status of the port.
Assigned To
Interface the port is assigned to.
Operating Mode
Operating mode of the voice port that was configured
using the Operating Mode configuration option on the
Voice Ports screen. See the Technical Reference for
configuration information.
Signaling Type
Type of signaling used by the voice port that was
configured using the Signaling Type configuration option
on the Voice Ports screen. See the Technical Reference
for configuration information.
Call Progress
TX ABCD bits
Current condition of the port.
Current value of the ABCD signaling bits that are being
transmitted to the T1 interface.
RX ABCD bits
T-R Control
Current value of the ABCD signaling bits that are being
received from the T1 interface.
Current status of the tip and ring leads:
H Loop. Tip and Ring are connected together.
H Rgnd. Ring lead is attached to ground.
H Open. Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip
lead or the ground.
H Lpgnd. Tip and Ring are connected together, and are
connected to ground.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
View this field . . .
To find the . . .
For the FXO Voice APM (Cont’d)
T-R Receive
Status of what the attached device is doing with the Tip
and Ring leads of the FXO port.
H RbTo. Attached device has battery applied to the
Ring lead and the Tip lead is opened
H RbTg. Attached device has battery applied to the
Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded
H TbRg. Attached device has battery applied to the Tip
lead and the Ring lead is grounded
H Ring. Attached device is applying Ringing voltage
between Tip and Ring
H ToRo. Attached device has both Tip and Ring leads
open.
H TgRo. Attached device has the Tip lead grounded
and the Ring lead open.
H TgR*. Attached device has the Tip lead grounded
and the Ring lead state is unknown.
H ToR*. Attached device has the Tip lead open and the
Ring lead state is unknown.
H RoT*. Attached device has the Ring lead open and
the Tip lead state is unknown.
Trunk Cond CGA
Displays the status of trunk conditioning (On during
CGA, Off for no CGA).
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
View this field . . .
To find the . . .
For the FXS Voice APM
Port Status
Status of the port.
Assigned To
Interface the port is assigned to.
Operating Mode
Operating mode of the voice port that was configured
using the Operating Mode configuration option on the
Voice Ports screen. See the Technical Reference for
configuration information.
Signaling Type
Type of signaling used by the voice port that was
configured using the Signaling Type configuration option
on the Voice Ports screen. See the Technical Reference
for configuration information.
Call Progress
TX ABCD bits
Current condition of the port.
Current value of the ABCD signaling bits that are being
transmitted to the T1 interface.
RX ABCD bits
T-R Control
Current value of the ABCD signaling bits that are being
received from the T1 interface.
Current status of the tip and ring leads:
H RbTo. A –48 Vdc battery is applied to the Ring lead
and the Tip lead is opened
H RbTg. A –48 Vdc battery is applied to the Ring lead
and the Tip lead is grounded
H TbRg. A –48 Vdc battery is applied to the Tip lead
and the Ring lead is grounded
H Ring. Ringing voltage is applied between Tip and
Ring
T-R Receive
Status of what the attached device is doing with the Tip
and Ring leads of the FXS port.
H Loop. Tip and Ring are connected together
H Rgnd. Ring lead is grounded by attached device
H Open. Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip
lead or the ground
Trunk Cond CGA
Displays the status of trunk conditioning (On for CGA,
Off for no CGA).
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Displaying Cross Connect Status
Slot assignments are made using the Cross Connect configuration option. See
Assigning Cross Connections in Chapter 5, Setting Up, for making time slot
assignments. Use the Cross Connect Status screen to display time slot
assignments for:
H
H
H
Network Channels
DSX-1 Channels
Ports
Displaying Network Channels
Use the Network Channel Display screen to display DS0 assignments for each
DS0 on the network interface. This screen also provides information on the slot
assignment for each NAM or APM type.
Use the following menu sequence to display network channel information.
Main Menu → Status → Cross Connect Status →Network Channel Display
Select the desired network interface: 1 for Network 1, 2 for Network 2 (only the
Model 926x provides Network 2).
The Network Channel Display screen displays 24 two-field entries in three rows.
Together, each two-field entry defines the assignment for one Network interface
time slot. The top field represents the time slot of the Network Interface. The
bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated (top field)
network time slot.
The following information is available for viewing.
The Network Time Slot Fields (top) . . . Indicates . . .
N01 to N24
The Network Interface time slot (01 to 24).
The Cross Connect Status Field
(bottom) . . .
Indicates . . .
Unassgn
SssPp
The time slot is unassigned.
The voice or sync data port (p) of slot (ss)
is assigned to the Network Interface time
slot (01 to 24).
Netn/yy
Network n (1 or 2) time slot yy is assigned
to the Network Interface time slot (01 to
24), using Clear Channel.
Netn/yyr
Network n (1 or 2) time slot yy is assigned
to the Network Interface time slot (01 to
24), using Robbed Bit Signaling (r ).
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
The Cross Connect Status Field
(bottom) . . .
Indicates . . .
Dss-p/yy
The DSX-1 on slot ss, port p, time slot yy
is assigned to the Network Interface time
slot (01 to 24).
Dss-p/yyr
RsvdAPM
The DSX-1 on slot ss, port p, time slot yy
is assigned to the Network Interface time
slot (01 to 24), using Robbed Bit Signaling
(r ).
The time slot is assigned to an APM which
is either:
H failed,
H removed or not installed, or
H has been replaced by an APM type that
is not compatible with the configuration.
DDL
The time slot is reserved for a
management path using Direct Data Link
(DDL).
Slot Assignment information. NAM or APM physical slot assignment
information appears below the time slot fields.
The following information is available for viewing.
Physical Slot . . .
Identifies the assigned card type . . .
01 to 14 (based on model)
T1 NAM – T1 NAM.
Empty – The slot is empty.
02 to 05 (based on model)
Sync Data – 4-port synchronous data APM.
DSX-1 – 2-port Dual DSX APM.
E&M Voice – 8-port E&M Voice APM.
FXO Voice – 8-port FXO Voice APM.
FXS Voice – 8-port FXS Voice APM.
OCU (2) – 2-port OCU-DP APM.
OCU (6) – 6-port OCU-DP APM.
Empty – The slot is empty.
Misconfig – The slot contains a misconfigured APM.
Unsupport – The slot contains an unrecognized APM.
Failed – The slot contained an APM that has been
removed or is no longer operational.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Displaying DSX-1 Channels
Use the Network Channel Display screen to display all of the DS0 assignments
for each DS0 on the DSX-1 interface. This screen also provides information on
the slot assignment for each NAM or APM type.
Use the following menu sequence to display DSX-1 channel information.
Main Menu → Status → Cross Connect Status →DSX-1 Channel Display
Select the desired DSX-1 slot and port.
NOTE:
The DSX-1 Channel screen will not appear if the Interface Status field on the
DSX-1 Interface Option screen is set to Disable.
The DSX-1 Channel Display screen displays 24 two-field entries in three rows.
Together, each two-field entry defines the assignment for one DSX-1 interface
time slot. The top field represents the time slot of the DSX-1 Interface. The
bottom field represents the cross-connect status of the associated (top field)
DSX-1 time slot.
The following information is available for viewing.
The DSX-1 Time Slot Fields (top) . . .
Indicate . . .
D01 to D24
The DSX-1 Interface time slot (01 to 24).
The Cross Connect Status Field
(bottom) . . .
Indicates the . . .
blank
Time slot is unassigned.
SssPp
Voice or sync data port (p) of slot (ss) is
assigned to DSX-1 time slot (01 to 24).
Netnyy
Network Interface n (1 or 2), time slot (yy )
is assigned to DSX-1 time slot (01 to 24),
using Clear Channel.
Netnyyr
RsvdAPM
Network Interface n (1 or 2), time slot (yy)
is assigned to DSX-1 time slot (01 to 24),
using Robbed Bit Signaling (r ).
Time slot is assigned to an APM which is
either:
H failed,
H removed or not installed, or
H has been replaced by an APM type that
is not compatible with the configuration.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Slot Assignment information. NAM or APM physical slot assignment
information appears below the DSX-1 interface time slot fields.
The following information is available for viewing.
Physical Slot . . .
Identifies the assigned card type . . .
01 to 14 (based on model)
T1 NAM – T1 NAM.
Empty – The slot is empty.
02 to 05 (based on model)
Sync Data – 4-port synchronous data APM.
DSX-1 – 2-port Dual DSX APM.
E&M Voice – 8-port E&M Voice APM.
FXO Voice – 8-port FXO Voice APM.
FXS Voice – 8-port FXS Voice APM.
OCU (2) – 2-port OCU-DP APM.
OCU (6) – 6-port OCU-DP APM.
Empty – The slot is empty.
Misconfig – The slot contains a misconfigured APM.
Unsupport – The slot contains an unrecognized APM.
Failed – The slot contained an APM that has been
removed or is no longer operational.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Displaying Port Assignments
Use the Port Assignments Display screen to display port assignment information
for each voice and data port on the NAM and APMs.
Use the following menu sequence to display port assignment information.
Main Menu → Status → Cross Connect Status →Port Assignment Display
The following information is available for viewing.
View this field . . .
To find the . . .
Slot
Slot number.
Type
Type of NAM or APM occupying the slot. Possible
values are:
T1 NAM – T1 NAM.
Sync Data – 4-port synchronous data APM.
DSX-1 – 2-port DSX APM.
E&M Voice – 8-port E&M APM.
FXO Voice – 8-port FXO Voice APM.
FXS Voice – 8-port FXS Voice APM.
OCU (2) – 2-port OCU-DP APM.
OCU (6) – 6-port OCU-DP APM.
Empty – The slot is empty.
Misconfig – The slot contains a misconfigured APM.
Unsupport – The slot contains an unrecognized APM.
Failed – The slot contained an APM that has been
removed or is no longer operational.
Assignment
Port assignment. Possible values are:
Blank – slot is empty or port does not exist on the NAM
or the APM.
Disable – The port is disabled.
Unassgn – The port is unassigned.
Netn – The port is assigned to the Network Interface 1
or 2.
DSXss-p – The port is assigned to the DSX-1 interface
in slot ss (always 01), port p on a clear channel time
slot. Ports cannot be cross-connected to the DSX APM.
SssPp – The port-to-port assignment of the slot (ss)
and sync data port (p) shown in this field.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Displaying Device Name and SNMP System Identification Information
Use the Device Name screen to display the name of the device, SNMP system
name, location, and contact name for the device.
Use the following menu sequence to display device name and SNMP system
identification information.
Main Menu → Control →Device Name
The following information is available for viewing.
View this field . . .
Device Name
To find the administratively-assigned. . .
Name of the device for device identification.
Name for this SNMP-managed node.
System Name
System Location
System Contact
Physical location of this SNMP-managed node.
System contact person for this SNMP node.
Viewing Network and Sync Data Performance
Statistics
Use the Network Performance Statistics screen to display a complete view of the
performance of the network interface and the port interface over the previous
24-hour period. Use the Sync Data Performance Statistics screen to display a
complete view of the performance of the network interface and the port interface
over the previous 8-hour period. Statistics are defined in AT&T Technical
Reference (TR) 54016.
What Statistics Can Be Collected?
You can collect the following metrics:
H
H
H
Errored Seconds (ES) – Any second with one or more ESF Error events.
Unavailable Seconds (UAS) – Any second in which service is unavailable.
Severely Errored Seconds (SES) – Any second with 320 or more CRC
errors or one or more Out Of Frame (OOF) events.
H
H
Bursty Errored Seconds (BES) – Any second with more than one but less
than 320 CRC errors.
Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) – Any second with one or more controlled
slips (a replication or deletion of a DS1 frame by the receiving device). This is
collected for network performance statistics only.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
H
H
Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) – The number of Loss of Frame conditions.
Complete – Indicates whether or not the 15 minutes worth of far-end
statistics contain 900 seconds worth of statistics. Bad T1 network conditions
or a loopback test can prevent far-end statistics from reaching the T1 access
unit. If one or more seconds of far-end performance statistics are missing,
then this field displays No. Otherwise, Yes is displayed. This field appears on
the Sync Data Performance Statistics screen only.
Network Performance Statistics
For the network performance statistics, these metrics are kept for each 15-minute
interval over the past 24-hour period. A Telco set and a user set are kept for each
metric. The user set is a copy of the Telco set, but the user set can be cleared.
In addition to the metrics kept for the network interface, the value of the Status
Event Register is kept for each 15-minute interval (user count only). The system
records the occurrence of the following events in the Status column:
H
H
H
H
H
H
Yellow Alarm (Y)
Loss of Signal (L)
Excessive Error Rate (E)
Frame Synchronization Bit Error (F)
Line Code Violation (V)
None
NOTE:
Network performance statistics are only available for those interfaces using
ESF framing. Verify that the Line Framing Format field on the Network
Interface screen is set to ESF.
To help you in selecting trouble spots, a Worst Interval is displayed on Line 18.
The Worst Interval contains the largest number of seconds for either ES, UAS,
SES, BES, or CSS, or the greatest Loss of Frame Count (LOFC). If more than
one interval contains the same worst value, then the oldest interval is displayed.
Sync Data Performance Statistics
For the sync data performance statistics, these metrics are kept for each
15-minute interval over the past 8-hour period. Both near-end and far-end
statistics are kept.
To help you in selecting trouble spots, a Worst Interval is displayed on Line 18 for
both near-end and far-end values. The Worst Interval contains the largest number
of seconds for either ES, UAS, SES, BES, or the greatest LOFC. If more than
one interval contains the same worst value, then the oldest interval is displayed.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Displaying Performance Statistics
Use the following menu sequence to display network performance statistics.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → Network
For Network statistics, you must select the Network Interface (1 or 2) for which
you want to display statistics. Only the Model 926x provides Network 2.
Use the following menu sequence to display sync data performance statistics.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → Sync Data Port
For Sync Data statistics, you must select the desired slot and port for which to
collect statistics.
Selecting Performance Statistics Intervals for Display
Only seven intervals appear on the screen at any one time. You can choose
which intervals to display on your screen by entering:
H
H
Interval Number, or
Time
NOTE:
Interval 01 is the interval occurring just prior to the current one; Interval 02 is
2 intervals prior to the current one, etc.
To select intervals . . .
You must enter an interval or time on . . .
Occurring on and after a
selected interval or time
Line 16. The display will include the selected interval plus
the 6 intervals recorded after it.
Occurring on and before a
selected interval or time
Line 10. The display will include the selected interval plus
the 6 intervals recorded before it.
Bracketing a selected
interval or time
Line 13. The display will include the selected interval plus
the 3 intervals recorded before it and the 3 intervals
recorded after it.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Example of Network Performance Statistics Screen
main/status/performance/network
Device Name: Node A
9162
01/26/96 23:32
NETWORK 1 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
ESF Error Events
Telco = 15 User = 12
Current Interval Timer
Telco=124 User = 124
–––ES–– ––UAS–– ––SES–– ––BES–– ––CSS–– –LOFC–– -Status-
Time
Tel Usr Tel Usr Tel Usr Tel Usr Tel Usr Tel Usr
(User)
Y
Current: 10:37
Int 01: 10:35
Int 02: 10:20
Int 03: 10:05
Int 04: 09:50
Int 05: 09:35
Int 06: 09:20
Int 07: 09:05
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
Line 10
Line 13
Line 16
Line 18
Worst Interval: 24 24
Tel Tot(valid 96): 00010
Usr Tot(valid 96): 00010
14 14
00000
00000
14 14
00000
00000
09 09
00000
00000
18 16
002
002
44 44
003
003
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh PgDn PgUp ClrStats
Example of Sync Data Performance Statistics Screen
main/status/performance/port
Device Name: Node A
9162
01/26/96 23:32
SYNC DATA PORT PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Current Interval Timer
Error Events
Near=3 Far=10
Near=32
Far=120
Slot 03 Data Port 4
–––ES–– ––UAS–– ––SES–– ––BES–– ––LOFC–– -Complete-
Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far
Far
no
Current: 10:37
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Int 01: 10:35
Int 02: 10:20
Int 03: 10:05
Int 04: 09:50
Int 05: 09:35
Int 06: 09:20
Int 07: 09:05
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Line 10
Line 13
Line 16
Line 18
Worst Interval: 28 09
Near Tot(valid 32): 00010
Far Tot(valid 32): 00010
14 18
00009
00009
18 18
00004
00004
24 24
00000
00000
10 10
000
000
no
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh
PgDn PgUp
ClrNear ClrFar
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Clearing Performance Statistics
Use the following menu sequence to clear performance statistics.
Main Menu → Status → Clear Statistics
You can also use the ClrStats function at the bottom of the Performance Statistics
screen.
To clear all . . .
Select . . .
User performance registers, including
network and ports statistics
All
User performance registers for the
selected Network Interface
Network 1 or Network 2 (only the Model
926x provides Network 2)
Performance registers for all Sync Data
ports
All Sync Data Ports
NOTE:
You can only clear User statistics. Telco statistics cannot be cleared.
Status Information
Select system and test status information from the Status menu:
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status
System Status Messages
These messages, listed in alphabetical order, appear in the messages area at the
bottom of the screens (see Table 7-1).
Table 7-1. System Status Messages (1 of 2)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Already Active
The selected test is currently
running.
1. Allow test to continue.
2. Stop the test.
Command Complete
Connection Refused
A system command (save,
clear, abort) completed
normally.
No action needed.
User interface is in use. This
will only appear during
Wait and try again.
initiation of a Telnet session.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Table 7-1. System Status Messages (2 of 2)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Please Wait
Command takes longer than
5 seconds.
1. Wait until message clears.
2. If the message does not
clear within 2 minutes, reset
the device.
User Interface Already Access to the user interface
1. Wait and try again.
in Use
via Telnet is in use; access to
the interface is denied.
2. Contact IP address user
and request that they log
off.
IP address and login of the
user currently accessing the
interface are also provided.
User Interface Idle
Previously active session is
now closed/ended, and
access via the COM port is
now available.
Log onto the access unit.
Session has ended due to
timeout.
Normal condition; no action
needed.
System Health and Test Status Messages
The System and Test Status screen (Path: main→status→system→test status)
displays the following types of messages:
H
H
H
Health and Status – Displays Health and status information in priority order
(highest to lowest).
Self-Test Results – Displays the results of the power-up self-test
diagnostics.
Test Status – Indicates which tests are currently active.
Health and Status Messages
These messages appear in the first column of the System and Test Status screen
in priority (highest to lowest) order, as shown in Table 7-2.
Clear device failure messages from the System Health and Status screen using
the following menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Control → Clear Device Fail
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Table 7-2. Health and Status Messages (1 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
System Operational
Power Supply Alarm
This message appears when
there are no status messages
to report.
No action needed.
A power supply or fan tray
problem is detected on the
system.
1. Check that the power
supply or fan tray is
mounted correctly in the
housing.
2. Contact your service
representative.
LOS at Networkn
A Loss of Signal (LOS)
condition is detected on
Network Interface 1 or 2.
Clears when the ratio of ones
to zeros received is greater
than or equal to 12.5%.
1. Network cable problem.
1. Check that the network
cable is securely attached
at both ends.
2. No signal is being
transmitted at the far-end
T1 access unit.
2. Check far-end T1 access
unit status.
3. T1 facility problem.
3. Contact your network
provider.
LOS at DSXss-p
A Loss of Signal (LOS)
condition is detected on the
DSX-1 interface in slot ss,
port p. Clears when the ratio of
ones to zeros received is
greater than or equal to
12.5%.
1. DSX-1 cable problem.
1. Check that the DSX-1 cable
is securely attached at both
ends.
2. No signal being transmitted 2. Check the DTE status.
from the DTE.
OOF at Networkn
An Out of Frame (OOF)
condition is detected on
Network Interface 1 or 2.
1. Incompatible framing format 1. Check that the framing
between the network and
the T1 access unit.
format for the network
interface is correct.
2. Network cabling problem.
3. T1 facility problem.
2. Check that the network
cable is securely attached
at both ends.
3. Contact your network
provider.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Table 7-2. Health and Status Messages (2 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
OOF at DSXss-p
An Out of Frame (OOF)
condition is detected on the
DSX-1 interface in slot ss,
port p.
1. Incompatible framing format 1. Check that the framing
between the DTE and the
T1 access unit.
format for the DSX-1 (DTE)
interface is correct.
2. DSX-1 cabling problem.
2. Check that the DSX-1 cable
is securely attached at both
ends.
AIS at Networkn
An Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS) is received by Network
Interface 1 or 2. AIS is an
unframed, all ones signal.
1. Upstream T1 access unit is 1. Check status of upstream
transmitting AIS (keep-alive
signal).
T1 access unit(s).
2. The network is transmitting 2. Report problem to carrier.
an AIS.
AIS at DSXss-p
An Alarm Indication Signal
Check the DTE attached to
(AIS) is received by the DSX-1 the DSX-1 interface.
interface in slot ss, port p. AIS
is an unframed, all ones
signal.
EER at Networkn
The error rate of the received
network signal exceeds the
currently configured threshold.
This condition only occurs if
Network Interface 1 or 2 is
configured for ESF framing.
This condition clears when the
error rate falls below the
threshold value.
Contact network provider.
Yellow at Networkn
A yellow alarm signal is
received on Network
Interface 1 or 2.
1. Network cable problem.
1. Check that your network
cable is securely attached
at both ends.
2. Far-end T1 access unit has 2. Check the status of the
lost framing sync on the T1
line.
far-end device.
3. T1 facility problem.
3. Contact your network
provider.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Table 7-2. Health and Status Messages (3 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Yellow at DSXss-p
A yellow alarm signal is
received on the DSX-1
interface in slot ss, port p.
DTE has detected an LOS or
OOF condition.
1. Check that the DSX-1 cable
is securely attached at both
ends.
2. Check the status of the
attached equipment.
APM Card Failed,
Slot ss
The NAM detects an APM
failure for the identified slot.
1. Check if APM is removed
from the slot.
1
2. Remove, then reinstall the
APM.
3. Contact your service
representative.
OOF(EDL), Slot ss
Port p
An Out of Frame (OOF)
condition is detected for the
1
identified slot and port. This
condition occurs when any two
of five consecutive frame
synchronizing bits received
from the remote unit are
incorrect. This condition clears
when a reframe occurs.
1. Cabling problem.
2. T1 facility problem.
1. Check that the far end is
configured for EDL.
2. Contact your network
provider.
EER, Slot ss Port p
An Excessive Error Rate
(EER) condition is detected for
the identified slot and port.
Contact network provider.
1
Loss of Signal, Slot ss A Loss of Signal (LOS)
1. Check that the DSU is
powered up.
Port p
condition has been detected
on the identified OCU-DP
interface. An LOS is declared
when a signal has been
absent on the local loop for
more than two consecutive
seconds.
2. Check the cable.
Abnormal Station
Code, Slot ss Port p
An Abnormal Station Code is
being received from the
network DS0 for the identified
OCU-DP interface. This
condition indicates that the
far-end DSU is disconnected
or powered-off.
1. Check the that the far-end
DSU is operational.
2. Check the cable to the
far-end DSU.
1
ss represents physical slots.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Table 7-2. Health and Status Messages (4 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
64KCC Loop OOF,
Slot ss Port p
An Out of Frame (OOF)
condition has been detected
for the identified OCU-DP
interface.
1. Check the that DSU is
configured for the correct
speed.
2. Check the cable to ensure
that the pairs are not
crossed.
DDS Net Failure, Slot
ss Port p, cccccc
The identified OCU-DP
Contact the DDS service
provider.
interface is receiving a DDS
network code of cccccc from
the network. This is a 6-bit
code representing bits 2–7 of
the DS0 code defined in AT&T
PUB 62310. The least
significant bit is to the left.
Loss of Loop Timing,
Slot ss Port p, cccccc
The identified OCU-DP
interface cannot recover
timing from the received signal rate.
on the local loop. This typically
occurs when the CPE
Check that the CPE CSU/DSU
rate matches the OCU-DP
CSU/DSU is misconfigured for
the wrong rate (e.g., 19.2
kbps) when the OCU-DP is
configured for 56K or
Switched 56 operation.
Primary Clock Failed
A failure of the primary clock
source configured for the NAM
is detected and the secondary
clock is providing the timing
for the NAM. This condition
clears when the configured
primary clock is restored.
1. If the primary clock was
derived from the network,
contact the network
provider.
2. Check the clock source
connector.
Secondary Clock
Failed
A failure of the secondary
clock source configured for the
NAM is detected and the
internal clock is providing the
timing for the NAM. The clock
source will not automatically
switch from internal until the
primary clock source returns.
1. If the secondary clock was
derived from the network,
contact the network
provider.
2. Check the clock source
connector.
Network Com Link
Down
The network communication
link is down for the COM port.
This condition occurs only
when the COM port is
configured for Net Link and
communications between the
management system and the
T1 access unit is not currently
possible for the port.
1. Check that the Port Use
configuration option is
properly set (see the
Technical Reference for
configuration option
information).
2. Check cables.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Table 7-2. Health and Status Messages (5 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Device Fail yyyyyyyy
The operating software
Contact your service
representative.
detects an internal error.
(yyyyyyyy represents an
eight-digit hexadecimal failure
code for use by service
personnel) This condition
clears after a reset of the unit.
Module MisConfig,
Slot ss
The APM in slot xx is not the
one specified in the NAM’s
configuration table.
1. Replace the APM with the
type of APM specified by
the configuration table.
1, 2
2. Change the current
configuration to reflect the
type of APM in the slot. To
do this, edit the
configuration, accept the
APM, then save the
configuration.
Module Unsupported,
Slot ss
The NAM does not recognize
the APM.
1. Check that an E&M Voice
APM, FXS Voice APM,
1, 2
FXO Voice APM, Dual DSX
APM, or Sync Data APM is
1
installed in Slot ss.
2. For Model 926x T1 Access
Mux, check that there is not
more than one DSX APM
installed (only one is
supported).
3. Re-download the NAM
software if new APMs are
supported in later releases.
4. Replace the APM.
5. Contact your service
representative.
A Dual DSX APM has been
installed in a Model 916x T1
Access Unit.
Remove the Dual DSX APM.
1
ss represents physical slots.
Does not apply to the access carrier.
2
Self-Test Results Messages
All self-test results messages appear in the middle column of the System and
Test Status screen (see Table 7-3).
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Table 7-3. Self-Test Results Messages
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
CPU Fail
The CPU failed internal
testing.
1. Reset the unit and try
again.
2. Call your service
representative for
assistance.
3. Return the unit to the
factory.
NAM Fail
One or more of the NAM’s
integrated circuit chips failed
internal device level testing.
1. Reset the unit and try
again.
2. Call your service
representative for
assistance.
3. Return the unit to the
factory.
Networkn T1 Fail
DSXss-p T1 Fail
Memory Fail
The NAM failed to internally
loop data on the selected
Network T1 circuit.
1. Reset the unit and try
again.
2. Call your service
representative for
assistance.
3. Return the unit to the
factory.
The NAM failed to internally
loop data on the selected
DSX-1 circuit.
1. Reset the unit and try
again.
2. Call your service
representative for
assistance.
3. Return the unit to the
factory.
The unit failed memory
verification.
1. Reset the unit and try
again.
2. Call your service
representative for
assistance.
3. Return the unit to the
factory.
Failure xxxxxxxx
Passed
An internal failure occurred.
(xxxxxxxx represents an
eight-digit hexadecimal failure representative.
code for use by service
personnel.)
Record the failure code and
contact your service
No problems were found
during power-up.
No action needed; no
problems were found during
power-up or reset.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Test Status Messages
The right-most column of the System and Test Status screen display the tests
that are currently active on the card (NAM or APM) (see Table 7-4).
Table 7-4. Test Status Messages (1 of 2)
Message
What It Indicates
No Test Active
No tests are currently running.
Networkn LLB Test Active
A network Line Loopback (LLB) test is active on specified
Network interface (n).
DSXss-p LLB Test Active
Networkn PLB Test Active
DSXss-p PLB Test Active
Networkn RLB Test Active
DSXss-p RLB Test Active
DCLB, Slot ss Port p
A DSX-1 Line Loopback (LLB) test is active on slot ss,
port p.
A network Payload Loopback (PLB) test is active on
specified Network interface (n).
A DSX-1 Payload Loopback (PLB) test is active on slot ss,
port p.
A network Repeater Loopback (RLB) test is active on
specified network interface (n).
A DSX-1 Repeater Loopback (RLB) test is active on slot
ss, port p.
A Data Channel Loopback (DCLB) test is active on slot ss,
port p.
DTLB, Slot ss Port p
A Data Terminal Loopback (DTLB) test is active on slot ss,
port p.
DTPLB, Slot ss Port p
A Data Terminal Payload Loopback (DTPLB) test is active
on slot ss, port p.
Latching OCU LB, Slot ss
Port p
A Latching OCU Loopback test is on the OCU-DP
interface in slot ss, port p.
Non-Latching OCU LB,
Slot ss Port p
A Nonlatching OCU Loopback test is on the OCU-DP
interface in slot ss, port p.
Latching CSU LB, Slot ss
Port p
A Latching CSU Loopback test is on the OCU-DP
interface in slot ss, port p.
Non-Latching CSU LB,
Slot ss Port p
A Nonlatching CSU Loopback test is on the OCU-DP
interface in slot ss, port p.
Latching DSU LB, Slot ss
Port p
A Latching DSU Loopback test is on the OCU-DP
interface in slot ss, port p.
Non-Latching DSU LB,
Slot ss Port p
A Nonlatching DSU Loopback test is on the OCU-DP
interface in slot ss, port p.
OCU Line LB, Slot ss
Port p
An OCU Line Loopback test is on the OCU-DP interface in
slot ss, port p.
OCU Data LB, Slot ss
Port p
An OCU Data Loopback test is on the OCU-DP interface
in slot ss, port p.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
Table 7-4. Test Status Messages (2 of 2)
Message
What It Indicates
OCU DS-0 LB, Slot ss
Port p
An DS0 Loopback test is on the OCU-DP interface in
slot ss, port p.
Voice DLB, Slot ss Port p
A voice Digital Loopback (DLB) test is active on slot ss,
port p.
Voice ALB, Slot ss Port p
Voice LLB, Slot ss Port p
A voice Analog Loopback (ALB) is active on slot ss, port p.
A voice Line Loopback (LLB) test is active on slot ss,
port p.
Voice DRS, Slot ss Port p
Voice Quiet, Slot ss Port p
A voice Digital Reference (DRS) test is active on slot ss,
port p.
A voice quiet tone test is active on slot ss, port p.
A forced signaling test is active on slot ss, port p.
Forced Signal, Slot ss
Port p
Pttn Active, [Networkn]
A pttn test (test patterns for Network 1 or Network 2 ) is
active on Network n.
Pttn Active, [DSXss-p]
A pttn test (test patterns for the DSX-1 interface in slot ss,
port p) is active.
Pttn Active, [Slot ss Port p] A pttn test (test patterns for Sync Data port) is active on
slot ss, port p.
Mon Pttn, [Network n]
Mon Pttn, [DSXss-p]
Mon Pttn, [Slot ss Port p]
Lamp Test Active
A Monitor pttn (test patterns for the Network 1 or
Network 2) is active on Network n.
A Monitor pttn (test patterns for the DSX-1 interface in
slot ss, port p) is active.
A Monitor pttn (test patterns for the Sync Data port) is
active on slot ss, port p.
The Lamp Test is active, causing all LEDs on the T1 NAM
and APMs to blink.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying System Information
This page intentionally left blank.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
8
Startup
If security requiring logins has been set up, follow the instructions in Logging In
below. Otherwise, follow the instructions in Starting a Session on page 8-2.
Logging In
When there is no contention for the user interface and a login is required, you are
presented with the Login screen. Up to 10 characters can be entered in the
Login ID and Password fields. Valid characters include the following:
H
H
H
0 through 9
a through z
A through Z
" Procedure
To log in:
1. Enter your assigned login ID, and press Return.
2. Enter your password, and press Return.
An asterisk (*) appears in the field for each character entered.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
If the Login ID/Password
combination is . . .
Then the . . .
Valid
Main Menu appears. Begin your session.
Invalid
Message Invalid Password is displayed on line 24,
and the Login screen is redisplayed.
If an invalid Login ID/Password combination is
entered 3 consecutive times,
– The current Telnet session is closed.
– The User Interface Idle screen appears with a
directly-connected terminal.
– An external modem is disconnected.
– An SNMP trap will be generated, if so
configured.
Access is denied. See your system administrator to
verify your login (Login ID/Password combination).
Logging Out
When a login is required and a timeout occurs, you are automatically logged out.
You will be prompted for your login next time you try to use the interface.
You can also end a session using the screen function area of the user interface.
" Procedure
To log out:
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch from the screen area to the screen function key area.
2. Select Exit by entering e or E and pressing Return. The session is ended.
Starting a Session
Depending on how your T1 access unit is configured, you can start a session
using one of the following methods:
H
H
H
H
Dialing in through an external modem to the COM port.
Direct connection over the COM port.
Telnet session over the COM port.
Telnet session through an in-band management channel through the T1
network.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
" Procedure
Upon beginning a session, the User Interface Idle screen is displayed. To
activate:
1. Press Return.
2. One of the following occurs:
If . . .
Then . . .
What to do now?
Security is disabled
The Main Menu screen
appears.
Begin your session.
Security is enabled
You are prompted for a
login ID and password.
Enter your ID and password.
If Invalid Password
appears, see System Error
Messages in Chapter 9,
Troubleshooting.
You are attempting to
access through Telnet
and the user interface is
currently in session
The message
Wait and try again.
Connection refused:
appears. (T1 access unit
allows only one
connection at a time.)
You are attempting direct The message User
access through the COM Interface Already In
See System Status
Messages in Chapter 7,
Displaying System
port and the user
Use appears with the
interface is currently in
session via an in-band
Telnet session
active user’s IP address. Information.
The T1 access unit has
the Communication Port appears.
and Login Required
configuration options
enabled and there is no
contention for the user
interface
The Login screen
Enter your ID and password.
If Invalid Password
appears, see System Error
Messages in Chapter 9,
Troubleshooting.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Ending a Session
Use the Exit function key from any screen to terminate the session.
" Procedure
To end a session:
1. Press Ctrl-a to go to the screen function key area.
2. Select Exit and press Return.
If connected through . . . Then the . . .
Direct connection via the
COM port
Idle screen appears.
Telnet or some other
modem connection
Connection is dropped and the screen is cleared.
3. If ending a configuration editing session, the Save Configuration screen
appears with the Save Changes? prompt.
If you select . . .
Then the . . .
No
Session is terminated without the configuration option
changes being saved.
Yes
Save Configuration To screen appears. Select a
configuration option area to save your changes to
(Current, Customer 1, or Customer 2), and press
Return.
Configuration option changes are saved and the
session is terminated.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Supported SNMP Traps
A trap is an unsolicited message that is sent from the T1 access unit to the SNMP
trap manager when the T1 access unit detects certain prespecified conditions.
These traps enable the SNMP manager to gauge the state of the network.
The T1 access unit supports the following traps:
H
H
H
H
H
warm-start
authentication-failure
enterprise-specific (those specific to T1 access unit)
link-up
link-down
Refer to Appendix D, SNMP Cross-Reference, for more information on traps.
Dialing Out and Sending SNMP Traps
You can control whether generated SNMP trap messages will initiate a call if a
connection on the COM port external device has not already been established.
Use the Alarms Options screen to enable the T1 access unit’s automatic call
initiation (dial out) on the COM port external device to send an SNMP trap
message.
" Procedure
1. Assign SNMP Trap Managers. See Setting Up SNMP NMS Security in
Chapter 5, Setting Up.
2. Select desired SNMP traps.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
SNMP Traps
3. Configure the phone directories for dialing out alarms via the Control → COM
Port Call Setup branch. Set up the A directory as the primary alarm directory.
You can also set up an alternate directory; refer to Displaying Directory
Numbers on page 8-6 and Changing Directory Numbers on page 8-7.
4. Specify the IP address(es) of the NMS to send traps to when dialing out. Use
the Configuration → Management and Communication → SNMP NMS
Security branch; refer to Appendix C, SNMP Traps.
5. Enable the Call Retry and Alarm & Trap Dial-Out configuration options to hold
the call if it cannot be completed. The call is held until completed, or the
maximum retry count (maximum 5) has been exceeded. You can also set the
delay time and specify an alternate directory, if desired.
Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Load Configuration From
screen:
Main Menu → Configuration → [Current Configuration/
Customer Configuration 1/Customer Configuration 2]
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
6. Follow this menu selection sequence, pressing Return after each selection:
Configuration Edit/Display → Alarm
The Alarm Options screen appears.
7. Select and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Alarm & Trap Dial-Out to Enable.
H Call Retry to Enable
Automatically initiate a call (dial out)
Retry the call if the call cannot be
completed
H Dial-Out Delay Time to the desired
number of minutes
H Alternate Dial-Out Directory to the
desired directory
Specify whether to disconnect
immediately after dialing out traps, or to
allow a manual disconnect to occur. (A
connection remains until manually
disconnected.)
Trap Disconnect to Enable.
8. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
9. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
10. Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and
press Return.
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears at the bottom of the
screen.
Maintaining COM Port Directories
Two Control menu selections are dedicated to dialing a remote device for
management:
Select . . .
To . . .
COM Port Call Setup
Select a phone directory and view its phone number, or
to initiate and terminate external modem connections
over the FrameSaver unit’s COM port. Used for
management.
COM Port Call Directories
Change the phone number contained in a selected
directory when using an external modem.
Displaying Directory Numbers
Use the COM Port Call Setup screen to display the telephone number of the
remote device.
Main Menu → Control → COM Port Call Setup
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Changing Directory Numbers
Use the COM Port Call Directories screen to change the phone number
contained in a selected directory. The T1 access unit ships with all directory
phone numbers blank.
" Procedure
To change directory phone numbers:
1. Use the following menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Control → COM Port Call Directories
2. To select the directory to be changed, press the number of the desired
directory (1 through 5, or A for Alarm) and press Return. The phone number
for that directory appears.
3. Review or change the phone number. Enter a number of up to 40 characters.
Make sure only valid characters are entered when changing the phone
number. Valid characters:
— Numbers 0–9
— Lowercase letters a–z
— Uppercase letters A–Z
— Space ( ) character
— ASCII symbols with the exception of the caret (^)
— Control sequence using the caret (^)
4. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
5. To save changes, select Save and press Return.
When Save is complete, Command Complete appears at the bottom of the
screen.
Changing Device Name
Use the Device Name screen to change the
H
H
H
H
Device Name
System Name
System Location
System Contact
Use any ASCII characters. Your entry in each field will overwrite existing
information. Use Clear to erase all characters in the current field.
Main Menu → Control → Device Name
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Hot Swapping of APMs
The T1 access unit allows you to insert and remove APM cards and their
matching I/O cards without powering down the unit or interrupting data on the
network or on other APMs. The T1 access unit automatically recognizes when an
APM is inserted or removed, and can display the configuration option settings
and MIB objects applicable to the APM that was inserted or removed.
NOTE:
You do not have access to screens and configuration options that are not
valid for the given configuration, nor can you preconfigure or predelete a
configuration for an APM prior to inserting it in the housing. To see
configuration options for an inserted APM, you must exit the configuration
screen, then reenter it.
APM Insertion
Insertion of an APM into a housing occurs under one of the following three
conditions.
If the slot previously . . . Then . . .
Was unassigned
The configuration options for this new APM will be set to
factory defaults and will be accessible from the MIB and the
async terminal.
Contained the same type The existing configuration options will be used and will be
of APM accessible from the MIB and the async terminal.
Contained a different type The system will generate a Module Misconfiguration alarm
of APM
and trap for the selected slot. The screens and field choices
applicable to this APM will not be displayed until you accept
the APM upon loading or saving a configuration, or via an
enterprise MIB. When you accept the new APM, the
previous APM’s configuration is deleted, the new APM’s
configuration options are set to factory defaults, and the
screens and field choices applicable to the new APM will be
displayed.
If you reject the APM, the configuration options for the
previous APM can be edited, but all other configuration
options and screens will not display fields or choices or MIB
objects applicable to either the previous or the current APM.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
APM Removal
When you remove an APM from its slot, you can still edit the applicable
configuration options. If you are displaying a Status or Test screen when you
remove an APM,
H
H
H
The message APM Removed will display after the screen is refreshed and
all fields relating to the APM will be cleared.
Only the ESC (Previous menu), Main Menu, and Exit virtual functions will be
available when no other valid slots are available to select.
MIB objects applicable to the removed APM, and attempts to do a get or set
of those objects will display the message No Such Name.
NAM Removal
Although you can safely remove the T1 NAM from the housing with power on, the
T1 access unit does not support hot swapping of the T1 NAM. All APM
configurations travel with the NAM.
Downloading Software
The access unit is capable of accepting a software download from a PC through
its COM port to support a file transfer or software upgrade. The Download feature
is used only by your service representative to update your access unit.
File Transfer
The T1 access unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server over
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to allow you to transfer configuration and
program files to/from a T1 access unit node. A complete binary image of the
configuration can be copied to a host to provide a backup. The T1 access unit
must be configured to support FTP sessions.
Initiate an FTP session to a T1 access unit node in the same way as you would
initiate an FTP to any other IP-addressable device.
Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer:
H
H
H
You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put command.
You cannot put a file to the factory.cfg file under the system directory.
You can only put a NAM program file (nam1_ctl.ocd, nam2_low.ocd, or
nam3_hi.ocd) to a T1 access unit. It cannot be uploaded from a node to a
host.
H
H
You must change to the /system directory.
Before putting a download file, you must use the bin binary command to
place the data connection in Binary mode.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
" Procedure
To initiate an FTP session:
1. Start the FTP client program on your host. For example, on a Unix host, type
ftp, followed by the IP address of the T1 access unit.
2. If a login and password are required (see Creating a Login in Chapter 6,
Security), you are prompted to enter them here. The FTP prompt appears.
3. The starting directory is the root directory (/). The following are available in
the /system directory: nam1_ctl.ocd, nam2_low.ocd, nam3_hi.ocd,
current.cfg, factory.cfg, cust1.cfg, cust2.cfg. Use the standard FTP
commands during the FTP session, as well as the following remote FTP
commands.
Command
Definition
cd directory
Change the current directory on the access unit to directory.
dir [directory] or
ls-1
Print a listing of the directory contents in the directory directory.
If no directory is specified, the current one is used.
get file1 [file2]
Copy a file from the remote directory of the T1 access unit
node to the local directory on the host.
remotehelp
[command]
Print the meaning of the command. If no argument is given, a
list of all known commands is printed.
ls [directory]
Print an abbreviated list of the directory contents in the
specified directory. If no directory is specified, the current one
is used.
put file1 [file2]
Copy file1 from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the
current directory of the T1 access unit.
recv file1 [file 2]
send file1 [file 2]
pwd
Same as a get.
Same as a put.
Print the name of the current directory of the T1 access unit.
Performing an Upgrade
If you need to upgrade the NAM program code, you must transfer the following
files in the order specified by using the put command:
1. NAM control file (nam1_ctl.ocd)
2. NAM Program-Low Bank (nam2_low.ocd)
3. NAM Program-Hi Bank (nam3_hi.ocd)
These files must all be the same version (from the same revision level) for a
successful download.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
" Procedure
To perform a download:
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading.
2. Type bin to enter binary mode.
3. Type cd system to change to the system directory.
4. Type put nam1_ctl.ocd to perform a put to the nam1_ctl.ocd to start the
download. If the control file is valid, the message nam1_ctl.ocd: File
Transfer Completedisplays, the write permission will be set on the
nam1_low.ocd, and the device will reset and enter Minimum mode. The
Alarm LED will light and the OK LED will blink to indicate that the device has
entered Minimum mode.
5. Reestablish an FTP session to the device. Type open <IP address>.
6. Type bin to enter binary mode.
7. Type cd system to change to the system directory.
8. Type put nam2_low.ocd to perform a put to the nam2_low.ocd to start the
download. If a valid nam2_low.ocd (that is, it has the revision level as
nam1_ctl.ocd) is successfully put and has the proper checksum, then the
message nam2_low.ocd: File Transfer Completedisplays, the file
is loaded into system memory, the write permission will be set on the
nam3_hi.ocd, the system performs a memory bank switch, a
reset/reinitialization occurs, and the system will stay in Minimum mode.
9. Reestablish an FTP session to the device. Type open <IP address>.
10. Type bin to enter binary mode.
11. Type cd system to change to the system directory.
12. Type put nam3_hi.ocd to perform a put to the nam3_hi.ocd to start the
download. If a valid nam3_hi.ocd (that is, it has the revision level as the
nam1_ctl.ocd and nam2_low.ocd files) is successfully put and has the proper
checksum, then the message nam3_hi.ocd: File Transfer
Completedisplays, the file is loaded into system memory, the write
permission will be removed for both the nam2_low.ocd and the nam3_hi.ocd
files, the system performs a reset/reinitialization, and the system will be in
Normal mode and operating from the new program load. The download has
successfully completed.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Backing Up Your Configuration
You may choose to back up your configuration files in case recovery is needed.
The following configuration files correspond to the configuration areas in your T1
access unit.
Configuration File
current.cfg
Configuration Area
Current
cust1.cfg
Customer 1
Customer 2
Factory
cust2.cfg
1
factory.cfg
1
You cannot put to this file since it is read-only
NOTE:
If you maintain a backup copy of your configuration files, you should upload a
new backup copy of your configuration from the T1 access unit after you
upgrade to a new release of software.
" Procedure
To copy configuration files from the T1 access unit:
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are backing up.
2. Type bin to enter binary mode.
3. Type cd system to change to the system directory.
4. Type get <filename> to perform a get of the desired file(s).
5. Type quit to exit the FTP session.
" Procedure
To restore configuration files to the T1 access unit:
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are backing up.
2. Type bin to enter binary mode.
3. Type cd system to change to the system directory.
4. Type put <filename> to perform a get of the desired file(s).
5. Type quit to exit the FTP session.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Resetting the T1 Access Unit
You can reset the T1 access unit in four ways:
H
H
H
Reset it from the Control menu to perform a self test
Cycle the power to perform a self test
Reset the configuration options to reestablish connectivity with the user
interface
H
Set the MIB from NMS
Resetting the T1 Access Unit from the Control Menu
Use this procedure to initiate a power-on selftest of the unit. This procedure also
resets the T1 access unit.
" Procedure
To reset the T1 access unit from the Control menu:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Control → Reset Device
2. Select Yes. The T1 access unit reinitializes itself, performing a Device
Self-Test.
Restoring Access to the User Interface
Misconfiguring the T1 access unit could render the user interface inaccessible,
leaving it in a state where a session cannot be started via the COM port or a
Telnet session. If this occurs, T1 access unit connectivity can be restored via a
directly-connected terminal.
Two methods can be used to restore access to the user interface:
H
H
Reset COM Port – Allows you to reset the configuration options related to
COM port usage. This also causes a device reset, where the T1 access unit
performs a Device Self-Test. No security-related configuration options are
changed.
Reload Factory Defaults – Allows you to reload the Default Factory
Configuration, resetting all of the configuration and control settings. This
method is also useful when the user’s password(s) have been forgotten.
Selecting this method also causes a device reset. Reload destroys the
current configuration.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
" Procedure
To reset COM port settings:
1. Attach the async terminal to the COM port.
2. At the async terminal, configure the terminal to operate at 19.2 kbps, using
character length of 8 bits, with one stop-bit, and no parity.
3. Ensure that any hardware or software flow control is disabled.
4. Reset the T1 access unit, then immediately and repeatedly press Return at a
rate of at least 1 press per second until the System Paused screen appears.
(See Resetting the T1 Access Unit from the Control Menu to reset the unit.)
5. Tab to the desired method, and enter yes (or y) for the selected prompt.
If entering yes to prompt . . . Then . . .
Reset COM Port usage
H Port Type is set to Terminal.
H Data Rate (Kbps) is set to 19.2.
H Character Length is set to 8.
H Stop Bits is set to 1.
H Parity is set to None.
H External Device Commands is set to Disable.
Reload Factory Defaults
All factory-loaded configuration and control
settings contained in the Default Factory
configuration area are loaded.
If no (or n) is entered, or if no selection is made within 30 seconds, the T1
access unit returns to the condition of operation it was in when the system
pause was initiated, with the COM port settings returning to their configured
states.
If you choose yes, the T1 access unit resets itself, going through a Device
Self-Test. Connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
9
What Are the Troubleshooting Features?
The T1 access unit is designed to provide you with many years of trouble-free
service. If a communication problem occurs, however, refer to the information in
this chapter for possible solutions.
The T1 access unit can:
H
H
Detect and report faults
Perform diagnostic tests
Use the test jacks on the front panel of the Single and Dual T1 NAM, and the
DSX APM to help isolate problems.
Statistics are also collected to help you determine how long a problem has
existed. See Chapter 7, Displaying System Information, for information on
statistics.
These features ensure that your T1 access unit is giving you optimum
performance in your network.
How Do I Know There Is a Problem?
The T1 access unit offers three major mechanisms that alert you to possible
problems:
H
H
H
LEDs
Alarms
SNMP Traps
If monitoring the system, the System and Test Status screen can also indicate
that there is a problem.
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
T1 NAM LEDs
General Status LEDs
IN
Label Indication Color
What It Means
NET
OUT
OK
Power and Green
Operational
Status
ON – NAM has power and is operational.
IN
DSX
OFF – NAM is in a power-up self-test, or there is a
failure.
OUT
Test
Jacks
IN
NET
CYCLING – The unit is in Minimum mode. Requires an
FTP download.
MON
OUT
IN
DSXMON
ALM
TST
BKP
System
Failure/
Self-Test
Red
ON – NAM has just been reset, or an error or fault
has been detected.
OUT
961
OFF – No failures have been detected.
OK
ALM
Test Mode Yellow
ON – Loopback or test pattern in progress, initiated
locally, remotely, or from the network.
TST
BKP
SIG
OFF – No tests are active.
NETWORK
OOF
ALM
SIG
OOF
ALM
1–
Backup
Yellow
Not supported in this release. Remains off except during
a Lamp Test.
LEDs
DSX
OK
POR
2–
T
O
K
496-15051
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Network and DSX Interface LEDs
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
IN
SIG
Signal
Green
ON – A recoverable signal is present on the
Network/DSX interface.
NET1
OUT
IN
OFF – The signal cannot be recovered from
the Network/DSX interface. An LOS
condition exists.
NET2
OUT
Test
Jacks
IN
ET1MON
OOF
ALM
Out of Frame
Alarm
Yellow
Yellow
ON – At least one OOF was detected during
the sampling period.
OUT
IN
ET2MON
OFF – No OOFs were detected during the
sampling period.
OUT
9261
ON – An alarm condition is present on the
Network/DSX interface.
OK
ALM
TST
BKP
SIG
Current alarm conditions:
H Loss of Signal (LOS)
H Loss of Frame (LOF)
H Excessive Error Rate (EER)
H Yellow
NET1
OOF
ALM
SIG
OOF
ALM
1–
LEDs
NET2
H Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
OK
POR
OFF – No alarm condition is present on the
Network/DSX interface.
2–
T
O
K
97-15647
Port 1 and Port 2 LEDs
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
1-OK
2-OK
Operational
Status
Green
ON – The interchange circuits for the port
are in the correct state to transmit and
receive data.
OFF – The port is idle. Occurs if the port is
disabled, if an EDL Out of Frame or
EER condition is present, if a DCLB is
active, or if the port is configured to
monitor DTR and/or RTS and the
lead(s) is not asserted.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
T1 NAM Test Jack Functions
The T1 NAM has four sets of test jacks located on the upper section of the
faceplate. Four nonintrusive access points are also provided.
See Test Jacks on page 9-8 for more information on the test jacks.
9161 Single T1 NAM Test Jack Functions
DSX
In
DSX
Out
NET
In
NET
Out
In
Out
In
TX
DSX
RX
RX
NET
TX
Internal
Circuitry
Out
NET
MON
NET
DSX
DSX
MON
97-15195-01
Test Jack Name
Function
IN
DSX IN
An intrusive test jack that allows a signal to be inserted
towards the equipment attached to the DSX-1 interface by
external test equipment.
NET
OUT
IN
DSX OUT
An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from
the equipment attached to the DSX-1 interface and allows it
to be terminated by external test equipment.
DSX
OUT
Test
Jacks
IN
NET
MON
DSX MON IN
(DSX Monitor In)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal going
into the terminal equipment (DTE).
OUT
IN
DSXMON
DSX MON OUT
(DSX Monitor Out)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal
coming out of the terminal equipment (DTE).
OUT
961
NET IN
(Network In)
An intrusive test jack that allows insertion of a signal toward
the network by external test equipment.
OK
ALM
NET OUT
(Network Out)
An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from
the network and allows it to be terminated by external test
equipment.
TST
BKP
SIG
NETWORK
OOF
ALM
SIG
OOF
ALM
1–
NET MON IN
(Network Monitor In)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the transmitted
signal going into the network. This is a composite of the
channels allocated to the network.
DSX
NET MON OUT
(Network Monitor Out)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the received
signal coming out of the network. This is a composite of the
channels allocated to the network.
OK
POR
2–
T
O
K
496-15205
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
9261 Dual T1 NAM Test Jack Functions
The T1 NAM has four sets of test jacks located on the upper section of the
faceplate. Four nonintrusive access points are also provided.
NET1 NET1
NET2 NET2
In
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
TX
NET1
RX
RX
NET2
TX
Internal
Circuitry
Out
NET2
MON
NET2
NET1
NET1
MON
97-15652
Test Jack Name
Function
IN
NET1 IN
(Network 1 In)
An intrusive test jack that allows a signal to be inserted
towards the Network 1 interface by external test equipment.
NET1
OUT
NET1 OUT
(Network 1 Out)
An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from
the Network 1 interface and allows it to be terminated by
external test equipment.
IN
NET2
OUT
Test
Jacks
IN
N
NET1 MON IN
(Network 1 Monitor In)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal going
into the network (a composite of all channels allocated to the
Network 1 interface).
OUT
IN
ET2MON
NET1 MON OUT
(Network 1 Monitor Out)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the received
signal coming out of the network (a composite of all channels
allocated to the Network 1 interface).
OUT
9261
OK
NET2 IN
(Network 2 In)
An intrusive test jack that allows insertion of a signal toward
equipment attached to the Network 2 interface by external
test equipment.
ALM
TST
BKP
SIG
NET2 OUT
(Network 2 Out)
An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from
equipment attached to the Network 2 interface and allows it
to be terminated by external test equipment.
NET1
OOF
ALM
SIG
OOF
ALM
1–
NET2 MON IN
(Network 2 Monitor In)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal going
into the equipment attached to the Network 2 interface.
NET2
NET2 MON OUT
(Network 2 Monitor Out)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal
coming out of the equipment attached to the Network 2
interface.
OK
POR
2–
T
O
K
97-15646
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Dual DSX APM LEDs
DSX 1 and DSX 2 Interface LEDs
IN
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
DSX2
OUT
SIG
Signal
Green
ON – A recoverable signal is present on the
DSX1/DSX2 interface.
IN
DSX1
OUT
OFF – The signal cannot be recovered from
the DSX1/DSX2 interface. An LOS
condition exists.
Test
Jacks
IN
DSX2MON
OUT
OOF
ALM
Out of Frame
Alarm
Yellow
Yellow
ON – At least one OOF was detected during
the sampling period.
N
IN
OUT
OFF – No OOFs were detected during the
sampling period.
109DSX
ON – An alarm condition is present on the
DSX1/DSX2 interface.
OK
Current alarm conditions:
H Loss of Signal (LOS)
H Loss of Frame (LOF)
H Excessive Error Rate (EER)
H Yellow
SIG
DSX1
OOF
ALM
SIG
LEDs
DSX2
OOF
ALM
H Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
OFF – No alarm condition is present on the
DSX1/DSX2 interface.
97-15642-01
General Status LED
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
OK
Power and
Operational
Status
Green
ON – The APM has power and is
operational.
OFF – The APM is in a local self-test, or there
is a failure.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
9109 Dual DSX APM Test Jack Functions
The Dual DSX APM test jacks are used for:
H
H
Accessing and testing towards the DSX 1 port
Accessing and testing towards the DSX 2 port
DSX1 DSX1
DSX2 DSX2
In
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
TX
DSX1
RX
RX
DSX2
TX
Internal
Circuitry
Out
DSX2
MON
DSX2
DSX1
DSX1
MON
97-15653
Test Jack Name
Function
IN
DSX1 IN
An intrusive test jack that allows a signal to be inserted
towards the equipment attached to the DSX1 interface by
external test equipment.
DSX2
OUT
IN
DSX1
DSX1 OUT
An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from
the equipment attached to the DSX1 interface and allows it
to be terminated by external test equipment.
OUT
Test
Jacks
IN
DSX2MON
DSX1 MON IN
(DSX1 Monitor In)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the transmitted
signal going into the network (a composite of all channels
allocated to the DSX1 interface).
OUT
O
IN
OUT
DSX1 MON OUT
(DSX1 Monitor Out)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the received
signal coming out of the network (a composite of all channels
allocated to the DSX1 interface).
109DSX
OK
DSX2 IN
An intrusive test jack that allows insertion of a signal toward
the equipment attached to the DSX2 interface by external
test equipment.
DSX2 OUT
An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from
the equipment attached to the DSX2 interface by external
test equipment.
SIG
DSX1
OOF
ALM
SIG
DSX2 MON IN
(DSX2 Monitor In)
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal going
into the equipment attached to the DSX2 interface.
DSX2
OOF
ALM
DSX2 MON OUT
A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal
(DSX2 Monitor Out)
coming out of the equipment attached to the DSX2 interface.
97-15644-01
See Test Jacks on page 9-8 for more information on the test jacks.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Test Jacks
And provides these test access
points . . .
This card . . .
Provides these test jacks . . .
9161 Single T1
NAM
H Network In
H Network Out
H DSX In
H Network Monitor In
H Network Monitor Out
H DSX Monitor In
H DSX Out
H DSX Monitor Out
9261 Dual T1
NAM
H Network 1 In
H Network 1 Out
H Network 2 In
H Network 2 Out
H Network 1 Monitor In
H Network 1 Monitor Out
H Network 2 Monitor In
H Network 2 Monitor Out
9109 Dual DSX
APM
H DSX 1 In
H DSX 1 Out
H DSX 2 In
H DSX 2 Out
H DSX 1 Monitor In
H DSX 1 Monitor Out
H DSX 2 Monitor In
H DSX 2 Monitor Out
The following figure is an example of using these test jacks:
H
DSX OUT to allow test equipment to terminate the signal coming from
equipment (e.g., a PBX) attached to the DSX port on the rear of the T1
access unit.
H
DSX IN to allow test equipment to provide a signal to equipment (e.g., a PBX)
attached to the DSX port on the rear of the T1 access unit.
Front
Rear
Test
Out
In
Out
In
Equipment
Internal
Circuitry
PBX
Test
Equipment
T1 Access Unit
97-15682
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
The following figure is an example of using the monitor test jacks:
H
DSX MON IN to allow test equipment to nonintrusively monitor the signal
being sent from the T1 access unit to equipment (e.g., a PBX) attached to the
DSX port on the rear of the T1 access unit.
H
DSX MON OUT to allow test equipment to nonintrusively monitor the signal
being sent equipment (e.g., a PBX) attached to the DSX port on the rear of
the T1 access unit.
Front
Rear
Mon In
Rx
Rx
Test
Equipment
Internal
Circuitry
PBX
Test
Equipment
Mon Out
T1 Access Unit
97-15680
Sync Data APM Front Panel LEDs
The Sync Data APM has five LED status indicators.
General Status LED
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
OK
Power and
Operational
Status
Green
ON – APM has power and is operational.
OFF – APM is in a local self-test, or there is a
failure.
Port 1, Port 2, Port 3, and Port 4 LEDs
109SYNCD
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
OK
1-OK
2-OK
3-OK
4-OK
Operational
Status
Green
ON – The interchange circuits for the port
are in the correct state to transmit
and receive data.
A
T
A
OFF – The port is idle. Occurs if the port is
disabled, if an EDL Out of Frame or
EER condition is present, if a DCLB is
active, or if the port is configured to
monitor DTR and/or RTS and the
lead(s) is not asserted.
1-OK
2-OK
3-OK
4-OK
LEDs
PORT
97-15679
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
OCU-DP APM Front Panel LEDs
The 2-port OCU-DP APM has three LED status indicators. The 6-port OCU-DP
APM has seven LEDs.
General Status LED
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
OK
Power and
Operational
Status
Green
ON – APM has power and is operational.
OFF – APM is in a local self-test, or there is a
failure.
109OCU
OK
Port (1 to 6) LEDs
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
LEDs
1-TST
2-TST
POR
1-TST
2-TST
3-TST
4-TST
5-TST
6-TST
Operational
Status
Yellow
ON – A test is in progress.
T
OFF – No test is active on the port, including
all test pattern generation, and any
loopback that may be active on the
local loop or the OCU-DP APM.
98-15924
109OCU
OK
1-TST
2-TST
3-TST
4-TST
5-TST
6-TST
LEDs
POR
T
98-15925
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Voice APM Front Panel LED
The E&M, FXO, and FXS Analog Voice APMs each have 1 LED status indicator.
General Status LED
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
OK
Power and
Operational
Status
Green
ON – APM has power and is operational.
OFF – APM is in a local self-test, or there is a
failure.
109FXO
OK
97-15643
System Alarm Relay
The 5-slot housing and the access carrier provide an alarm system relay that you
can configure to activate when an alarm condition is present. To use the system
alarm relay, you must:
H
H
See the 5-slot housing or access carrier installation instructions for
information on how to connect the alarm relay connector.
Set the following configuration option:
Main Menu → Configuration Edit/Display → Alarm Options → System
Alarm Relay → Enable
H
Ensure that the System Alarm Relay Cut-off under the Control branch is not
selected. This menu selection turns off the system alarm relay.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Alarms
The T1 access unit monitors alarm conditions occurring on either the:
H
H
H
Network interface
DSX-1 interface, or
Sync data ports
You select the ASCII alarms that you wish to receive for each interface on the T1
access unit via the Network Interface configuration option screen.
Viewing Alarm Messages
You can view alarm messages via the:
H
H
H
Health and Status screen
Messages on Line 24 of the user interface screen
Printout from your ASCII terminal printer
ASCII Alarm Messages
The following messages are sent to an ASCII terminal or printer attached to the
communication port (either locally or remotely via an external device).
CAUTION:
You should be sure to clear alarms as they occur by correcting the
condition that caused the alarm. Additional alarms will not be reported
until the previous alarm is cleared. Therefore, if you do not clear an
alarm, a serious outage could occur and you will be unaware of it,
unless you are monitoring the unit via the user interface or SNMP.
H
H
When set, an alarm is sent at the start of an alarm condition.
If more than one alarm condition exists, only the highest priority alarm will be
sent. View Health and Status for all conditions.
H
An Alarm Cleared message is sent when the alarm condition no longer
exists.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Table 9-1 lists the alarm messages and corresponding clear messages in
alphabetical order. Priority order is identified. Each alarm message contains:
H
Date and time (month/day/year hours:minutes:seconds) that the condition
occurred or was cleared.
H
H
H
The user-configured device name.
Alarm description.
An identification of the affected interface (when applicable).
Table 9-1. ASCII Alarm Messages (1 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Priority
month/day/year
hours:minutes:seconds –
An Abnormal Station Code DS0 is detected on the
An Abnormal Station
Code from the network
1. Check that the
far-end DSU is
operational.
17
has been received at the
OCU-DP port in slot ss
port p.
specified OCU-DP
port
2. Check the far-end
cable to the DSU.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for Abnormal
Station Code at OCU-DP
port in slot ss port p.
month/day/year
An Alarm Indication
Signal condition is
detected on the
specified Network or
DSX-1 interface.
Check the status of
the far-end unit. If
necessary, contact
network provider for
Network interface.
6 (Net)
7 (DSX-1)
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS) received at the
Network 1/Network 2
Interface or at the DSX-1
Interface in slot ss port p.
Check the DTE
attached to the DSX-1
interface.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS) at
the Network 1/Network 2)
Interface or at the DSX-1
Interface in slot ss port p.
month/day/year
An APM card failure is 1. Check that the APM 11
hours:minutes:seconds –
An APM Card Failure has
been detected for slot ss.
detected for the
identified slot.
card is seated
properly.
2. Contact your
service
representative.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for an APM
Card Failure for slot ss.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Table 9-1. ASCII Alarm Messages (2 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Priority
month/day/year
LOS condition
detected.
1. Check the cable to
2 (Net)
hours:minutes:seconds –
Continuous Loss Of Signal
(LOS) condition detected at
the Network 1/Network 2
Interface or at DSX-1
the Network/DSX-1 3 (DSX-1)
interface.
2. Contact network
provider.
Interface in slot ss port p.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for Loss Of
Signal (LOS) condition at
the Network 1/Network 2
Interface or at the DSX-1
Interface in slot ss port p.
month/day/year
An out-of-frame
condition is detected
at the specified
Network or DSX-1
interface.
1. Ensure that the line 4 (Net)
hours:minutes:seconds –
Continuous Out Of Frame
(OOF) detected at the
Network 1/Network 2
Interface or at DSX-1
Interface in slot ss port p.
framing format
5 (DSX-1)
configuration option
setting matches the
setting of the
equipment (DSX-1)
or network (Net).
2. Contact network
provider.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for Out of
Frame (OOF) condition at
the Network 1/Network 2
Interface or at the DSX-1
Interface in slot ss port p.
month/day/year
A continuous
1. Ensure that EDL is
enabled on the
far-end port. Refer
to the Technical
Reference for
setting
13
hours:minutes:seconds –
Continuous Out of Frame
(OOF) condition at
synchronous data port in
slot ss port p.
out-of-frame condition
occurred on the
synchronous data port
for the identified slot
and port.
configuration
options.
2. There is a network
problem with the
fractional portion of
the link carrying this
port’s data. Contact
network provider.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for Out Of
Frame (OOF) condition at
synchronous data port in
slot ss port p.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Table 9-1. ASCII Alarm Messages (3 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Priority
month/day/year
A DDS network failure Contact the DDS
19
hours:minutes:seconds –
A DDS Network Failure
code has been received at
OCU-DP port in slot ss
port p.
is being detected on
the specified OCU-DP
port.
service provider.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for a DDS
Network Failure code at
OCU-DP port in slot ss
port p.
month/day/year
hours:minutes:seconds –
An Excessive Error Rate
(EER) has been detected at network interface.
the Network 1/ Network 2
Interface.
An Excessive Error
Rate condition is
detected on the
Contact network
provider.
12
14
20
month/day/year
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for
Excessive Error Rate
(EER) at the Network
1/Network 2 Interface.
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
month/day/year
hours/minutes/seconds –
An Excessive Error Rate
(EER) has been detected at for the identified slot
synchronous data port in
slot ss port p.
An excessive error
rate occurred on the
synchronous data port fractional portion of
There is a network
problem with the
the link carrying this
port’s data. Contact
network provider.
and port.
month/day/year
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for
Excessive Error Rate
(EER) at synchronous data
port in slot ss port p.
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
month/day/year
The specified
OCU-DP port cannot
recover timing from
the received signal on rate.
the local loop.
Check that the CPE
CSU/DSU rate
matches the OCU-DP
hours:minutes:seconds –
A Loss of Loop Timing has
been detected at OCU-DP
port in slot ss port p.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for Loss of
Loop Timing at OCU-DP
port in slot ss port p.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Table 9-1. ASCII Alarm Messages (4 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Priority
month/day/year
LOS condition
1. Check the cable to
the OCU-DP port.
16
hours:minutes:seconds – A detected.
Loss Of Signal (LOS) has
been detected at the
2. Contact network
provider.
OCU-DP port in slot ss
port p.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for a Loss
Of Signal (LOS) at
OCU-DP port in slot ss
port p.
month/day/year
The identified slot
Ensure that the APM
8
hours:minutes:seconds –
A Module Misconfiguration
condition was detected for
slot ss.
previously contained a installed is the correct
different type of APM. type. If it is not, install
the correct APM type.
The card needs to be
accepted. Refer to the
Technical Reference
for additional
information, if
necessary.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for the
Module Misconfiguration for
slot ss.
month/day/year
A power supply or fan 1. Check that the
1
hours:minutes:seconds –
Power Supply Alarm
condition detect.
tray problem is
detected on the
system.
power supply or fan
tray is mounted
correctly in the
housing.
2. Contact your
service
representative.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for Power
Alarm condition.
month/day/year
A Yellow alarm signal
is detected on the
specified Network or
DSX-1 interface.
1. Check the Network 9 (Net)
hours:minutes:seconds –
Yellow alarm signal
received at the Network
1/Network 2 Interface or at
the DSX-1 Interface in
slot ss port p.
and/or DSX-1
cable.
10 (DSX-1)
2. Contact network
provider for
Network interface
problem. Check
equipment for
DSX-1 interface
problem.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Table 9-1. ASCII Alarm Messages (5 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Priority
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for Yellow
alarm signal at the
Network1/Network 2
Interface or at the DSX-1
Interface in slot ss port p.
month/day/year
The primary clock
source has failed. The
system is operating
from the secondary
clock source.
1. If the primary clock 22
was derived from
the network,
hours:minutes:seconds –
A Primary Clock Source
Failure has occurred.
contact the network
provider.
2. Check the clock
source. Contact
your service
representative.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for a
Primary Source Failure.
month/day/year
hours:minutes:seconds –
A Secondary Clock Source system is operating
Failure has occurred.
The secondary clock
source has failed. The
1. If the secondary
clock was derived
from the network,
contact the network
provider.
21
from the internal clock.
2. Check the clock
source. Contact
your service
representative.
month/day/year
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
Alarm Cleared for a
Secondary Source Failure.
month/day/year
A continuous
out-of-frame condition problem with the
occurred on the
OCU-DP port for the
There is a network
18
hours:minutes:seconds –
A 64KCC Loop Out of
Frame has been detected
at OCU-DP port in slot ss
port p.
fractional portion of
the link carrying this
identified slot and port. port’s data. Contact
network provider.
month/day/year
Alarm condition no
longer exists.
No action needed.
hours:minutes:seconds –
Alarm Cleared for a 64KCC
Loop Out Of Frame at
OCU-DP port in slot ss
port p.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
System Error Messages
These messages, listed in alphabetical order, appear in the messages area at the
bottom of the screens (see Table 9-2).
Table 9-2. System Error Messages
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
1
Invalid Character (x)
An invalid character has been Reenter information using
entered.
valid characters.
Invalid – Already
Active
Test was already in progress
when it was selected.
No action needed.
Invalid Password
Login is required and an
incorrect password was
entered; access is denied.
1. Try again.
2. Contact your system
administrator to verify your
password.
Invalid Test
Combination
A conflicting loopback or
pattern test was in progress
when Start was selected to
start another test, or was
active on the same or another
interface when Start was
selected.
1. Wait until other test ends
and message clears.
2. Stop the test from the same
screen the test was started
from.
3. Cancel all tests from the
Test screen (Path:
main/test).
Limit of six Login IDs
reached
An attempt to enter a new
login ID exceeds the six
login/password combinations
limit.
1. Delete another
login/password
combination.
2. Reenter the new login ID.
Minimum Mode
Appears if the T1 access unit
fails the memory test during a software again. Call your
Use FTP to download
power-up self-test.
service representative.
No Security Records
to Delete
Delete was selected from the
Administer Login screen, and
no security records exist.
1. No action needed.
2. Enter a security record.
Password Matching
Error – Re-enter
Password
Password entered in the
1. Try again.
Reenter Password field of the
Administer Logins screen
does not match what was
entered in the Password field.
2. Contact your system
administrator to verify your
password.
1
x is the character not being accepted.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Automatic Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs
You can control whether generated alarm messages will initiate a call if a
connection on the COM port external device has not already been established.
To dial out when an alarm occurs you must:
H
H
H
H
H
Connect the modem to the COM port using the appropriate cable.
Select the ASCII alarms to receive for each interface.
Configure the phone directory to use for Dial Out Alarms.
Enable Alarm & Trap Dial Out.
Enable Call Retry, if desired.
" Procedure
To enable the desired ASCII alarms for each interface:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Load Configuration From
screen:
Main Menu → Configuration
2. Select the desired configuration area and press Return. The Configuration
Edit/Display screen appears.
3. Select the ASCII alarms to enable for the interface.
To enable . . .
Set the configuration option(s) . . .
Configuration → Network
T1 alarms
DSX-1 alarms
Configuration → DSX-1
Sync Data Ports alarms
OCU-DP Ports alarms
Configuration → Sync Data Ports
Configuration → OCU-DP Ports
4. Configure the phone directory to use for dialing out alarms (see Displaying
Directory Numbers and Changing Directory Numbers in Chapter 8, Operation
and Maintenance).
5. Select Alarm from the Configuration Edit/Display menu and press Return.
The Alarms Options screen appears.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Alarm & Trap Dial-Out to Enable.
Call Retry to Enable.
Automatically initiate a call (dial out)
Retry the call if the call cannot be
completed
Enable ASCII alarms
Configuration → Alarm
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
6. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the screen function key area.
7. To save changes, select Save and press Return. The Save Configuration To
screen appears.
8. Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and
press Return. When Save is complete, Command Complete appears at the
bottom of the screen.
Manual Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs
Configure the external device connected the the access unit’s COM port. Then,
use the COM Port Call Setup screen to:
H
H
H
Select the desired telephone number.
Dial a call.
Disconnect a call.
" Procedure
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Control → COM Port Call Setup
2. Enter the desired directory number, or press the spacebar to cycle through
the numbers that have been set up in the directory. The telephone number
appears in the Directory Phone Number field.
See Displaying Directory Numbers and Changing Directory Numbers in
Chapter 8, Operation and Maintenance, for information about the call
directory.
3. Select Dial and press the Enter key to initiate dialing.
4. To end the call, select Disconnect and press the Enter key.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Tests Available
The Test menu allows you to run loopbacks and test patterns on the T1 access
unit, and to test the front panel LEDs. It is available to users with a security
access level of 1 or 2. Use the test menu to access the following tests.
To access the . . .
Select . . .
Network (1 or 2) Interface tests:
Network Tests
Line Loopback
Payload Loopback
Repeater Loopback
Remote Line Loopback
Pattern Tests
QRSS
All-zeroes
All-ones
1-in-8
3-in-24
63
511
2047
15
2
2
-1
-1
20
user-defined
DSX-1 Interface tests:
Line Loopback
Payload Loopback
Repeater Loopback
Pattern tests
QRSS
DSX-1 Tests
All-zeroes
All-ones
1-in-8
3-in-24
63
511
2047
15
2
-1
-1
20
2
user-defined
Sync Data Port tests
Sync Data Port Tests
DTE Loopback
DTE Payload Loopback
Data Channel Loopback
Remote Loopbacks
V.54
FT1
Pattern tests
QRSS
All-zeroes
All-ones
63
511
2047
15
2
2
-1
-1
20
user-defined
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To access the . . .
Select . . .
Voice Port tests
Voice Port Tests
Digital Loopback
Analog Loopback
Line Loopback
Test tones
DRS
Quiet
Force Signaling
Monitor Signaling
OCU-DP tests
OCU-DP Tests
Local Loopback
Latching Loopback
Nonlatching Loopback
OCU Loopback
DS-0 Payload Loopback
Line Loopback
Data Loopback
Remote Loopback
Latching LB
Nonlatching LB
Pattern tests
All-zeroes
All-ones
63
511
2047
Lamp test
Device Tests
Interface Tests
The interface tests run on the T1 access unit’s Network (1 or 2) or DSX-1
interfaces.
" Procedure
To start and stop a Line, Payload or Repeater Loopback test:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Tests screen:
Main Menu → Test → [Network Tests/DSX-1 Tests]
2. For Network tests, select the desired Network interface (1 for 9161 NAM, 1 or
2 for 9261 NAM).
For DSX-1 tests, enter the slot and port number of the desired DSX-1
interface.
3. Highlight Start under Command in the selected test’s row. Then, press Return
to start the test. This field now displays the word Stop.
4. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.
5. Highlight Stop under Command in the selected test’s row. Then, press Return
to stop the test. This field now displays the word Start.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Line Loopback
The Line Loopback (LLB) loops the information received on the Network or
DSX-1 interface back to the source of the loopback. When used with a pattern
test at the remote node, LLB determines whether the problem is with the sending
device or the T1 facility.
Framer
Network
Interface
DSX
Port
All
1s
LLB
All 1s
All 1s
DCE
Port 2
DCE
Port 1
496-15197
The following tests cannot be running when a line loopback test is initiated:
H
H
Payload loopback on this Network or DSX-1 interface
Send Pattern Test on this Network or DSX-1 interface or any data port
assigned to this interface
H
H
Send Remote Line Loopback on this Network or DSX-1 interface
Send V.54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any port assigned to this Network or
DSX-1 interface
H
Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to this Network or DSX-1
interface
CAUTION:
Line Loopback may affect the operation of the FDL, DDL, or EDL. Any IP
data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted. Also, any
performance statistics being sent over the EDL will be disrupted.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Payload Loopback
The Payload Loopback (PLB) loops the information received on the Network or
DSX-1 interface back to the network after it has passed through the receive and
transmit framing section of the device. Use PLB for determining whether the
problem is with the T1 facility or in the circuitry of the remote device.
Framer
Network
Interface
DSX
Port
All
1s
PLB
All 1s
All 1s
DCE
Port 2
DCE
Port 1
496-15198
The following tests cannot be running when a payload loopback test is initiated:
H
H
Line Loopback or Repeater Loopback on the same Network or DSX-1
interface
Send Pattern Test on the same Network or DSX-1 interface or any data port
assigned to this interface
H
H
Send Remote Line Loopback on the same Network or DSX-1 interface
Send V.54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any data port assigned to this Network
or DSX-1 interface
H
Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to the same Network or
DSX-1 interface
CAUTION:
Payload Loopback may affect the operation of the FDL, DDL, or EDL.
Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted. Also,
any performance statistics being sent over the EDL will be disrupted.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Repeater Loopback
The Repeater Loopback (RLB) loops the information to be sent over the Network
or DSX-1 interface back to the device. The RLB loops the entire data stream,
which includes data on the interface, as well as the synchronous data ports. Use
RLB to ensure that all of the data is correct up to the point where it is sent out
over the interface.
H
H
This helps to indicate that the T1 access unit is operational.
An attached device or test equipment should generate and monitor data to be
looped back.
Framer
Network
Interface
DSX
Port
RLB
AIS
DCE
DCE
496-15199
Port 2 Port 1
The T1 NAM will not respond to any messages from the network during this test.
The following tests cannot be running when a repeater loopback test is initiated:
H
H
Payload Loopback on this Network or DSX-1 interface
All loopbacks on any other T1 interface (DSX-1 or Network) with DS0s
assigned to this interface
H
Send Pattern Test on this Network or DSX-1 interface or any data port
assigned to this interface
H
H
Send Remote Line Loopback on this Network or DSX-1 interface
Send V.54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any data port assigned to this Network
or DSX-1 interface
H
Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to this Network or DSX-1
interface
CAUTION:
Repeater Loopback may affect the operation of the FDL, DDL, or EDL.
Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted. Also,
any performance statistics being sent over the EDL will be disrupted.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Remote Loopbacks
The remote loopback up codes (which put a remote device in loopback mode)
and down codes (which take a remote device out of loopback mode) are in-band
codes that allow remote control of a device.
H
H
Network loopbacks are defined in AT&T TR 62411.
The LLB up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB
down code terminates the line loopback in the remote unit.
The following tests cannot be running when a remote loopback test is initiated:
H
H
H
H
H
All loopbacks on this Network or DSX-1 interface
Send Pattern Test on this interface or any data port assigned to this interface
Send Remote Line Loopback on this interface
Send V.54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any data port assigned to this interface
Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to this interface
" Procedure
To start and stop a Remote Loopback:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test → Network Tests
2. Select the desired Network interface (1 for 9161 NAM, 1 or 2 for 9261 NAM).
3. Select the code Up or Down in the Send Line Loopback field.
4. Highlight Send under Command in the Send Line Loopback row. Then, press
Return to start the test. The code will be sent for 10 seconds.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Sending and Monitoring Pattern Tests
The pattern tests enable a T1 access unit either to send or monitor a known bit
pattern. These tests generate industry-standard bit patterns that can be used to
determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit.
" Procedure
To send/monitor a Pattern Test:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Tests screen:
Main Menu → Test → [Network Tests/DSX-1 Tests]
2. For Network tests, select the desired Network interface (1 for 9161 Single T1
NAM, 1 or 2 for 9261 Dual T1 NAM).
For DSX-1 tests, enter the slot and port number of the desired DSX-1
interface.
3. Select the desired pattern in the Send field. If you are sending/monitoring a
user-defined pattern, enter the desired 2-byte hexadecimal value in the field
next to Send. When sending a pattern, the Inject ERR function key appears.
Use Inject ERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern.
4. Highlight Send under Command in the row to send a pattern, or Start to
monitor a pattern. Then, press Return to start the test.
5. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.
An error count is also displayed. When monitoring a pattern, the ResetMon
virtual function key appears. ResetMon resets the error count to zero.
6. Highlight Stop under Command in the Send or Monitor row. Then, press
Return to stop the test.
7. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.
The following tests cannot be running when a Send Pattern test is initiated:
H
H
All loopbacks on the same interface
Send Pattern Test on the same interface or any data port assigned to that
interface
H
H
H
Send Remote Line Loopback on the same interface
Send V.54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any data port assigned to this interface
Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to the same interface
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Data Port Tests
Data port tests are available to run on any of the synchronous DTE interfaces on
the T1 NAM and the Sync Data APM.
H
H
Data port loopbacks are defined in ITU V.54 and ANSI T1 403.
The Send V.54 Up/Down and FT1 Up/Down perform a similar function to LLB
Up and LLB Down, but are only sent on the DS0s associated with a particular
data port and will control the remote operation of the Data Channel Loopback
(a Sync Data Port test).
H
DTE Payload Loopback on the same port
" Procedure
To start and stop a data port loopback test:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test → Sync Data Port Tests
2. Enter the desired slot and port number.
3. Highlight Start under Command in the selected test’s row to send a test.
Then, press Return to start the test.
4. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.
5. Highlight Stop under Command to stop the test.
DTE Loopback (DTLB)
The DTE Loopback (DTLB) performs the same function on the DTE interface that
the LLB does on the Network or DSX-1 interface. Use DTLB for isolating
problems on the DTE interface. An attached device or test equipment must
generate data to be looped back.
Network
Interface
DSX
Port
All 1s
DCE
Port 2
DCE
Port 1
496-15213
The following test cannot be running when a DTLB test is initiated:
H
DTE Payload Loopback on the same port
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
DTE Payload Loopback (DTPLB)
The DTE Payload Loopback (DTPLB) loops the information received on the
Network or DSX-1 interface back to the network after it has passed through the
port circuitry. Use DTPLB for isolating problems on the DTE line. An attached
device or test equipment must generate and monitor data to be looped back.
All 1s
Network
Interface
DSX
Port
DTLB
DTLB
DCE
Port 2
DCE
Port1
496-15211
CAUTION:
The Abort All Test selection from the Tests screen or the system test
timeout (set via the Test Timeout configuration option on the System
Options branch of the menu tree) will not interrupt a DTE Loopback test
that has been initiated by an attached device since the Local Loopback
lead will still be asserted.
The following tests cannot be running when a DTPLB test is initiated:
H
DTE Loopback, Data Channel Loopback, or Send Pattern Test on the same
port
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Data Channel Loopback (DCLB)
The Data Channel Loopback (DCLB) loops the data for a particular synchronous
data port back to the interface after the information has passed all the way
through the device (i.e., just before it is sent to the Customer Premises
Equipment). Use DCLB to verify the end-to-end integrity of a circuit for a
particular port.
Network
Interface
DSX
Port
DCLB
All 1s
DCLB
All 1s
496-15212
DCE
Port 2
DCE
Port 1
The following tests cannot be running when a DCLB test is initiated:
H
H
A Line Loopback, Payload Repeater Loopback or Send Pattern Test on the
same interface
Send Pattern Test or DTE Payload Loopback on the same port
V. 54 Remote Loopback
The V.54 remote loopback commands a device to go into the data channel
loopback on the associated port.
" Procedure
To send a V.54 Remote Loopback:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test → Sync Data Port Tests
2. Enter the desired slot and port number.
3. Select the code Up or Down in the Send V.54 Loopback field.
4. Highlight Send under Command in the Send V.54 Loopback row. Then, press
Return to start the test. The code will be sent for up to 10 seconds, or until an
acknowledgement is received from the remote end.
5. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.
6. Send the Down code to stop the remote loopback.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
The following tests cannot be running when a V.54 test is initiated:
H
H
A Send Pattern Test, Send Remote Line Loopback, Payload Loopback, or
Repeater Loopback on the interface to which the port is assigned
DTE Payload Loopback, Send Pattern Test, or Send FT1 Loopback on the
same port
Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback
The Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback commands a remote device to go into
Data Channel Loopback on associated port.
" Procedure
To send a Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test → Sync Data Port Tests
2. Enter the desired slot and port number.
3. Select the code Up or Down in the Send FT1 Loopback field.
4. Highlight Send under Command in the Send Ft1 Loopback row. Then, press
Return to start the test. The code will be sent for up to 10 seconds, or until an
acknowledgement is received from the remote end.
5. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.
The following tests cannot be running when a V.54 test is initiated:
H
H
A Send Pattern Test, Send Remote Line Loopback, Payload Loopback, or
Repeater Loopback on the interface to which the port is assigned
DTE Payload Loopback, Send Pattern Test, or Send V.54 Loopback on the
same port
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Sending and Monitoring Pattern Tests
The pattern tests enable a T1 access unit either to send or monitor a known bit
pattern.
H
H
These tests generate industry-standard bit patterns that can be used to
determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit.
These industry-standard and user-defined patterns can be sent by the
Network (1 or 2) and DSX-1 interfaces, as well as the Sync Data ports
(toward the Network or DSX-1 interface) and the OCU-DP ports.
" Procedure
To send/monitor a Pattern Test:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Tests screen:
Main Menu → Test →Sync Data Port Tests
2. Select the desired slot and port numbers.
3. Select the desired pattern in the Send field. If you are sending/monitoring a
user-defined pattern, enter the the desired 2-byte hexadecimal value in the
field next to Send. When sending a pattern, the Inject ERR function key
appears. Use Inject ERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit
pattern.
4. Highlight Send under Command in the row to send a pattern, or Start to
monitor a pattern. Then, press Return to start the test.
5. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.
An error count is also displayed. When monitoring a pattern, the ResetMon
virtual function key appears. ResetMon resets the error count to zero.
6. Highlight Stop under Command in the Send or Monitor row. Then, press
Return to stop the test.
Voice Port Tests
Voice port tests are available to run on voice ports for any installed and enabled
APM.
" Procedure
To start and stop a voice port loopback:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test → Voice Port Tests
2. Enter the desired slot and port number.
3. Highlight Start under Command in the row to send a test. Then, press Return
to start the test.
4. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.
5. Highlight Stop under Command to stop the test.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Digital Loopbacks
A Digital Loopback loops the digital voice signal received from the T1 interface
back to the same interface, just before reaching the D-to-A converter on the voice
port.
CODEC
D to A
Digital Loopback
Converter
to: T1 Interface
496-15200
The following tests cannot be running when a digital loopback test is initiated:
H
Analog Loopback, DRS or Quiet Test Tone on the same port
Analog Loopbacks
An Analog Loopback loops the analog voice signal received from the T1 interface
back to the same interface, after passing through the Digital-to-Analog converter
and Analog-to-Digital converter on the voice port.
CODEC
D to A
Analog Loopback
Converter
to: T1 Interface
496-15201
The following tests cannot be running when an Analog Loopback test is initiated:
H
DRS or Quiet Test Tone, or Digital or Line Loopback on the same port
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Line Loopbacks
This test is only available for a voice port belonging to an E&M APM. A Line
Loopback loops the analog voice signal received from the analog line/device
connected to the port back to the same line/device, before passing through the A
to D converter on the voice port.
CODEC
D to A
Line Loopback
Converter
to: Analog Device
496-15202
The following tests cannot be running when a Line Loopback is initiated:
H
DRS or Quiet Test Tone, or Analog Loopback on the same port
Test Tones
The following test tones are available to send to interface or to the user:
H
H
DRS – Digital Reference Signal, a 1004 Hz, 0.0 dBm tone.
Quiet – No signal is sent.
" Procedure
To start and stop a Test Tone:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test → Voice Port Tests
2. Enter the desired slot and port number.
3. Highlight either Send ___ to T1 Interface or Send ___ to User and select
either Quiet or DRS for each field.
4. Highlight Start under Command in the row to send a test. Then, press Return
to start the test.
5. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.
6. Highlight Stop under Command to stop the test.
The following tests cannot be running when a Test Tone is initiated:
H
H
Any loopbacks on the same port
Another type of test tone (other than the one currently running) on the same
interface
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Force and Monitor Signaling
Force and Monitor signaling enables you to send and receive the following
to/from the T1 interface to which the selected port is assigned:
You can force these fields . . .
To these settings . . .
ABCD bits (Tx and Rx) for ESF framing or
AB bits (Tx and Rx) for D4 framing
User-specified values
Set Tip and Ring Leads To
For FXO
Loop – Tip and Ring are connected
together
Rgnd – Ring lead is attached to ground
Open – Ring lead is not connected to
either the Tip lead or the ground
Lpgnd – Tip and Ring are connected
together, and Tip is connected to ground
RbTo – A –48 Vdc battery is applied to the
Ring lead and the Tip lead is open
For FXS
RbTg – A –48 Vdc battery is applied to the
Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded
TbRg – A –48 Vdc battery is applied to the
Tip lead and the Ring lead is grounded
Ring – Ringing voltage applied between
Tip and Ring
Set E-lead to (E&M APM only)
On
Off
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
You can monitor these fields . . .
At these settings . . .
ABCD bits (Tx and Rx) for ESF framing or
AB bits (Tx and Rx) for D4 framing
Whatever value is currently set
Tip and Ring Leads State
For FXO
ToRo – Attached device has both Tip and
Ring leads open
TgRo – Attached device has Tip lead
grounded and Ring lead open
TgR* – Attached device has Tip lead
grounded and Ring lead state is unknown
ToR* – Attached device has Tip lead open
and Ring lead state is unknown
RoT* – Attached device has Ring lead
open and Tip lead state is unknown
RbTo – A battery is applied to the Ring
lead and the Tip lead is open
RbTg – A battery is applied to the Ring
lead and the Tip lead is grounded
TbRg – A battery is applied to the Tip lead
and the Ring lead is grounded
Ring – Ringing voltage applied between
Tip and Ring
For FXS
RbTo – Ring Lead connected to nominal
–48Vdc battery and Tip lead open
RbTg – Ring Lead connected to nominal
–48Vdc battery and Tip lead grounded
TbRg – Tip Lead connected to nominal
–48Vdc battery and Ring lead grounded
Ring – Ringing voltage applied between
Tip and Ring
Tip and Ring Leads Control State
(FXO only)
Loop – Tip and Ring are connected
together
Rgnd – Ring lead is attached to ground
Open – Ring lead is not connected to
either the Tip lead or the ground
Lpgnd – Tip and Ring are connected
together, and Tip is connected to ground
E-lead state (E&M APM only)
M-lead state (E&M APM only)
On
Off
On
Off
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
" Procedure
To force signaling:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test → Voice Port Tests
2. Enter the desired slot and port number.
3. Press PgDn to go to page 2.
4. Enter the desired setting for each field.
5. Highlight Start under Command in the row to send a test. Then, press Return
to start the test.
6. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.
7. Highlight Stop under Command to stop the test.
" Procedure
To monitor signaling:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test → Voice Port Tests
2. Enter the desired slot and port number.
3. Press PgDn to go to page 2.
4. Look at the values displayed under the Monitor Signaling portion of the
screen.
OCU-DP Tests
The OCU-DP tests run on the OCU-DP APM’s ports. The procedure to send a
Latching loopback differs from the procedure to start/stop other loopbacks. Both
procedures are described below.
Sending a Latching Loopback
" Procedure
To send a Latching Loopback:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test → [OCU-DP Tests]
2. Enter the loopback type:
— For Local: CSU or DSU
— For Remote: CSU, DSU, or OCU
3. Select the code Up or Down.
4. Highlight Send in the Command row. Then, press Return to start the test. The
code will be sent for up to 10 seconds, or until an acknowledgement is
received.
5. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.
6. Send the Down code to stop the loopback.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Starting/Stopping Other Loopbacks
" Procedure
To start and stop loopback tests:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Tests screen:
Main Menu → Test → [OCU-DP Tests]
2. For Nonlatching loopbacks, select the desired loopback type (CSU or DSU).
3. Highlight Start under Command in the selected test’s row. Then, press Return
to start the test. This field now displays the word Stop.
4. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.
5. Highlight Stop under Command in the selected test’s row. Then, press Return
to stop the test. This field now displays the word Start.
OCU-DP Local Loopback Tests
The following local loopback tests are available for the OCU-DP APM:
H
Latching Loopback – applicable only to the 64 Clear Channel DDS (64KCC)
rate
H
H
H
H
H
Nonlatching Loopback – applicable only to the DDS rate of 56K
OCU Loopback
DS-0 Loopback
Line Loopback
Data Loopback
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
DDS CSU/DSU Latching/Nonlatching Loopback
The Latching/Nonlatching Loopback sends the selected loopback sequence to
the CPE attached to the port.
Allows testing of a local loop between
the selected port and the CPE
running at . . .
Loopback
types
This loopback
Latching
Direction
64K Clear Channel
56K
CSU or DSU up or down
CSU or DSU
Nonlatching
–
DSU Latching
and Nonlatching
Loopback
OCU
APM
T1
NAM
DDS
OCU
CSU
Port
Network
Interface
DSU
CSU Latching
and Nonlatching
Loopback
98-15958
The following tests are the only tests allowed to run at the same time as a
Latching/Nonlatching Loopback. No other tests can be running when a
Latching/Nonlatching Loopback test is initiated:
H
Send Pattern/Monitor Pattern Test on any data port assigned to this interface
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
OCU Loopback
The OCU Loopback loops the data received from the T1 interface for the selected
port back to the T1 interface.
OCU
APM
T1
NAM
OCU
Loopback
Network
Interface
OCU
Port
All
1s
98-15959
The following test is the only test allowed to run at the same time as an OCU
Loopback. No other tests can be running when an OCU Loopback test is initiated:
H
Line Loopback
DS-0 Loopback
The DS-0 Loopback loops the data received from the T1 interface for the
selected port back to the T1 interface.
OCU
APM
T1
NAM
Network
Interface
OCU
Port
All
1s
DS-0
Loopback
98-15960
The following test is the only test allowed to run at the same time as an DS-0
Loopback. No other tests can be running when a DS-0 Loopback test is initiated:
H
Line Loopback
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Line Loopback
The Line Loopback tests the local loop between the OCU port and the attached
CPE. The loopback occurs on the APM near the local loop interface, toward the
local loop.
OCU
APM
T1
NAM
Line
Loopback
Network
Interface
OCU
Port
All 1s
98-15961
The following tests are the only tests allowed to run at the same time as a Line
Loopback. No other tests can be running when a Line Loopback test is initiated:
H
H
H
H
OCU Loopback
DS-0 Loopback
Line Loopback on the cross-connected T1 interface
Payload Loopback on the cross-connected T1 interface
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Data Loopback
The Data Loopback tests the APM circuitry and the local loop connecting the port
to the CPE. The loopback occurs on the APM near the backplane connection,
toward the local loop.
OCU
APM
T1
NAM
Data
Loopback
Network
Interface
OCU
Port
All 1s
98-15962
The following tests are the only tests allowed to run at the same time as a Data
Loopback. No other tests can be running when a Data Loopback test is initiated:
H
H
Line Loopback on the cross-connected T1 interface
Payload Loopback on the cross-connected T1 interface
OCU-DP Remote Loopback Tests
The following remote loopback tests are available for the OCU-DP APM:
H
H
Latching Loopback – applicable only to the 64 Clear Channel DDS (64KCC)
rate
Nonlatching Loopback – applicable only to the DDS rates of 56K and
Switched 56
Device Tests
The T1 access unit supports a Lamp test at the device level. Use this test to
determine whether all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly. All LEDs light at
the same time every 1/2 seconds during execution of the Lamp test. When you
stop the Lamp test, the LEDs are restored to their normal condition. If the Test
Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set, the Lamp test
stops when the test duration expires. The Lamp test is not disruptive to data.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Test Timeout
A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test (as opposed
to manually terminating a test) after it has been running a specified period of
time.
To use this feature, enable the Test Timeout configuration option under the
System Options branch of the menu tree, and set a duration for the test to run in
the Test Duration (min) configuration option (see Table 5-9, System Options in
Chapter 5, Setting Up).
Starting and Stopping a Test
Use this procedure to start and/or abort specific tests. To abort all active tests on
all interfaces, see Aborting All Tests on page 9-44.
When the status of a test is . . .
The only command available is . . .
Inactive
Active
Start
Stop
You start or stop an individual test using the same general procedure. For more
specific instructions, see the individual test descriptions in this chapter.
" Procedure
To start or stop a test:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test
2. Select a test screen for an interface and press Return. The selected test
screen appears, with the cursor positioned in the Command column of the
first line (available test).
Start or Stop appears in the Command column, and Active or Inactive
appears in the Status column, based upon the test’s current status for that
interface.
3. Select the test you want to start or stop and press Return. The selected test
for the interface changes from Stop to Start, or from Stop to Start, also
changing the status of the test.
4. Press Return again to start or stop the test.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
9-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Aborting All Tests
Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on
all interfaces, with exception to Network- or DTE-initiated loopbacks. To abort
individual tests that are active, see Starting and Stopping a Test on page 9-43.
" Procedure
To abort all tests on all interfaces:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test
2. Select Abort All Tests and press Return.
Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been
terminated.
NOTE:
Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE-initiated loopbacks.
Determining Test Status and Results
Current test status and results are available on the:
H
H
H
H
Test screen from where you execute the test
System and Test Status screen
NMS
Test LED
For more information on interpreting results and messages, see Chapter 7,
Displaying System Information.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
9-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration
Worksheets
A
Menus
The following menus give you a graphical representation of the system options
that appear on the async terminal screens. Not all options are available, but are
filtered depending on what other options have been selected.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Menu
MAIN MENU
Status
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Test
Configuration
Control
Configuration
Control
Test
Status
Network Tests
System and Test Status
DSX-1 Tests
Voice Status
Sync Data Port Tests
Voice Port Tests
OCU-DP Tests
Device Tests
Cross Connect Status
Performance Statistics
Identity
Abort Tests
Network Channel Display
DSX-1 Channel Display
Port Assignment Display
Network
System & NAM
APM
Sync Data Ports
Clear Statistics
MAIN MENU
Status
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Configuration
Control
Test
Configuration
Control
Load
Configuration
from:
Configuration Edit/Display
Network
DSX-1
Control
COM Port Call Setup
COM Port Call Directories
Device Name
Sync Data Ports
Voice Ports
Date & Time
OCU-DP
Administer Logins
System Alarm Relay Cut-Off
Clear Device Fail
Reset Device
Copy Ports
Cross Connect
System Options
User Interface
Alarm
Management and Communication
DSX-1 to Network
Assignments
Communication Port
Communication
Protocol
External Device
(Com Port)
Network to Network
Assignments
General SNMP
Management
Telnet/FTP Sessions
Voice Port
Assignments
SNMP NMS Security
SNMP Traps
Sync Data Port
Assignments
OCU-DP Port
Assignments
98-15081-03
Clear Assignments
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
A-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Recording Configurations
It is recommended that you keep a record of each T1 access unit’s configuration,
which can also be used when configuring the T1 access unit. For additional
information about configurations, refer to Chapter 5, Setting Up.
" Procedure
1. Photocopy or print the worksheets included in this appendix. Make as many
copies of each table as needed.
2. Write the T1 access unit’s Device Name on each photocopied or printed
page.
3. Write in or circle the settings that are different from the default setting.
Do this for each of the alternate configurations stored in Customer
Configuration 1 and 2, as well. Store these records for reference, as needed.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
Network
See Table 5-1
Configuration Option
Settings
Default in [Bold]
1
Interface Status
Enable, [Disable]
D4, [ESF]
Line Framing Format
Line Coding Format
Line Build Out (LBO)
Bit Stuffing
AMI, [B8ZS]
[0.0], –7.5, –15, –22.5
[62411], Part68, Disable
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
[System], Network
Enable, [Disable]
Network Initiated LLB
Network Initiated PLB
2
Transmit Timing
ANSI Performance Report
Messages
Management Link
[Disable], FDL, DDL
3
IP Address
[000.000.000.000] – 223.255.255.255, Clear
[000.000.000.000] – 255.255.255.255, Clear
None, [Proprietary]
Subnet Mask
Routing Information Protocol
Network Time Slot
01–24 [lowest available time slot]
Text field
Circuit Identifier
Loss of Signal (LOS) Alarm
Out of Frame (OOF) Alarm
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Alarm [Enable], Disable
Yellow Alarm [Enable], Disable
Excessive Error Rate (EER) Alarm [Enable], Disable
Excessive Error Rate Threshold
[10E-4], 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
1
Read-only when Network is set to 1.
2
This first byte cannot be set to 0 nor 127. However, the null address of 0.0.0 is valid
after performing a Clear.
3
Only shown when 9261 Dual T1 NAM is being used.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
A-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
DSX-1
See Table 5-2
Settings
Configuration Option
Default in [Bold]
Slot ss
916x: 01
9262: 02
9265: 02, 03, 04, 05
Port p
916x: 1
926x: 1, 2
Interface Status
Enable, [Disable]
D4, [ESF]
Line Framing Format
Line Coding Format
AMI, [B8ZS]
Line Equalization
[0–133], 133–266, 266–399, 399–533, 533–655
[Enable], Disable
Send All Ones on DSX-1 Failure
Loss of Signal (LOS) Alarm
Out of Frame (OOF) Alarm
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Yellow Alarm
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
Sync Data Ports
See Table 5-3
Settings
Configuration Option
Default in [Bold]
Slot ss
916x: 01
9x62: 01, 02
9x65: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05
Port p
T1 NAM: 1, 2
Sync Data APM: 1, 2, 3, 4
Port Status
Enable, [Disable]
[E530], V.35, RS449, X.21
[Nx64], Nx56
Port Type
Port Base Rate
Transmit Clock Source
Invert Transmit Clock
[Internal], External
Enable, [Disable]
Invert Transmit and Received Data Enable, [Disable]
Send All Ones on Data Port Not
Ready
Disable, DTR, RTS, [Both]
Action on Network Yellow Alarm
None, [Halt]
Network Initiated Data Channel
Loopback (DCLB)
[Disable], V.54, FT1, Both
Port (DTE) Initiated Loopbacks
Embedded Data Link
[Disable], DTPLB, DCLB, Both
Enable, [Disable]
EDL Management Link
Enable, [Disable]
1
IP Address
[000.000.000.000] – 223.255.255.255, Clear
[000.000.000.000] – 255.255.255.255, Clear
None, [Proprietary]
Subnet Mask
Routing Information Protocol
Near-End Performance Statistics
Far-End Performance Statistics
Out of Frame (OOF) Alarm
[Disable], Maintain, Send, Both
[Disable], Maintain
[Enable], Disable
Excessive Error Rate (EER) Alarm [Enable], Disable
Excessive Error Rate Threshold
[10E-4], 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
1
The first byte cannot be set to 0 nor 127. However, the null address of 0.0.0.0 is valid
after performing a Clear.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
A-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
Voice Ports
Configuration Option
E&M Voice
Settings
Default in [Bold]
See Table 5-4
Slot ss
2-slot: 02
5-slot: 02, 03, 04, 05
Port p
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Enable, [Disable]
[E&M], Transmit Only
Port Status
Operating Mode
Rx Gain (dB)
–17.0, –16.5, –16.0, –15.5, –15.0, ..., [0.0],
...,+6.5, +7.0, +7.5
Tx Attenuation (dB)
Trunk Cond in CGA
–17.0, –16.5, –16.0, –15.5, –15.0, ..., [0.0],
...,+6.5, +7.0, +7.5
[Busy], Idle
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
Voice Ports
Configuration Option
FXO Voice
Settings
Default in [Bold]
See Table 5-5
Slot ss
2-slot: 02
5-slot: 02, 03, 04, 05
Port p
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Port Status
Enable, [Disable]
Operating Mode
Signaling Type
[FXO], FXODN, FXODN/WINK, DPT
[Loop-Start], Loop-Start/Fwd Disc, Ground-Start
[600], 900
Terminating Impedance (ohms)
Wink Delay (10 ms)
Wink Duration (10 ms)
Rx Gain (dB)
1 – 99
1 – 99
[15]
[20]
–10.00, –9.5, –9.0, –8.5, ..., [0.0], +0.5, +1.0, +1.5,
+2.0
Tx Attenuation (dB)
Trunk Cond in CGA
–10.00, –9.5, –9.0, –8.5, ..., [0.0], ..., +4.0, +4.5,
+5.0
[Busy], Idle
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
A-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Voice Ports
Configuration Option
FXS Voice
Settings
Default in [Bold]
See Table 5-6
Slot ss
2-slot: 02
5-slot: 02, 03, 04, 05
Port p
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Port Status
Operating Mode
Signaling Type
Enable, [Disable]
[FXS], FXSDN, FXSDN/WINK, PLAR, DPO
[Loop-Start], Loop-Start/Fwd Disc, Ground-Start,
Ground-Start-Immediate, Ground-Start-Automatic,
d3, d4
Terminating Impedance (ohms)
Wink Delay (10 ms)
Wink Duration (10 ms)
Rx Gain (dB)
[600], 900
1 – 99
1 – 99
[15]
[20]
–10.00, –9.5, –9.0, –8.5, ..., [0.0], +0.5, +1.0, +1.5,
+2.0
Tx Attenuation (dB)
–10.00, –9.5, –9.0, –8.5, ..., [0.0], ..., +4.0, +4.5,
+5.0
Ring-Back Tone
Enable, [Disable]
Trunk Cond in CGA
[Busy], Idle
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
OCU-DP Ports
Configuration Option
Slot ss
See Table 5-7
Settings
Default in [Bold]
9x62: 02
9x65: 02, 03, 04, 05
Port p
2-port: 1, 2
6-port: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Port Status
Enable, [Disable]
[56K], 64KCC, Switched_56
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
Port Rate
Loopback Detection
Loss of Signal Alarm
Abnormal Station Code Alarm
64KCC Loop OOF Alarm
DDS Network Failure Alarm
Loss of Loop Timing Alarm
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
A-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
Copy Ports
Configuration Option
Settings
Default in [Bold]
From: Slot ss
2-Slot: 01, 02
5-Slot: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05
From: Port p
T1 NAM: 1, 2
Sync Data APM: 1, 2, 3, 4
Voice APM: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
OCU-DP (2-port): 1, 2
OCU-DP (6-port): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Type
T1 NAM, Sync Data, FXS Voice, FXO Voice, E&M
Voice, OCU-DP
To: Slot ss
2-Slot: All, 01, 02
5-Slot: All, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05 [lowest numbered
slot containing the same port type]
To: Port p
All, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Perform Copy
n/a
n/a
Perform Copy Then Increment
System Options
See Table 5-9
Configuration Option
Generate Yellow Alarm Signals
Test Timeout
Settings
Default in [Bold]
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
1 – 120 [10]
Test Duration (min)
Primary Clock Source
[Net1], Net2, DSXss-p, Internal, External, Sync
Data
Port (for Primary Clock Source)
Secondary Clock Source
SssPp [the first available port]
Net1, Net2, DSXss-p, [Internal], External, Sync
Data
Port (for Secondary Clock Source) SssPp [the first available port]
External Clock Rate (KHz)
Primary Clock Failure Alarm
Secondary Clock Failure Alarm
8, [1544], 2048
[Enable], Disable
[Enable], Disable
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
User Interface
Configuration Option
Communication Port
Port Use
Settings
Default in [Bold]
See Table 5-10
[Terminal], Net Link, Alarm
Port Type
[Asynchronous], Synchronous
1
RIP
[None], Proprietary
Port Type – Synchronous
Clock Source
[Internal], External
2
Data Rate (Kbps)
9.6, 14.4, [19.2], 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2
Port Type – Asynchronous
Data Rate (Kbps)
9.6, 14.4, [19.2], 28.8, 38.4 57.6, 115.2
7, [8]
3
Character Length
3
Parity
[None], Even, Odd
[1], 1.5 ,2
3
Stop Bits
3
Ignore Control Leads
[Disable], DTR
4
Login Required
Enable, [Disable]
[Level-1], Level-2, Level-3
Enable, [Disable]
4
Port Access Level
4
Inactivity Timeout
4,5
Disconnect Time (Minutes)
1 – 60 [5]
External Device (COM Port)
See Table 5-11
[Disable], AT, Other
External Device Commands
6
Dial-In Access
Enable, [Disable]
7
Connect Prefix
ASCII text entry, Clear
ASCII text entry, Clear
ASCII text entry, Clear
[None], 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0
ASCII text entry, Clear
7
Connect Indication String
7
Escape Sequence
7
Escape Sequence Delay (Sec)
7
Disconnect String
1
Only shown when Port Use is set to Net Link.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Only shown when Clock Source is set to Internal.
Only shown when Port Type is set to Asynchronous.
Only shown when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Only shown when Inactivity Timeout is set to Enable.
Only shown when External Device Commands is set to Other or AT.
Only shown when External Device Commands is set to Other.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
A-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
User Interface (Cont’d)
Configuration Option
Telnet/FTP Sessions
Telnet Session
Settings
Default in [Bold]
See Table 5-12
Enable, [Disable]
Enable, [Disable]
[Level-1], Level-2, Level-3
Enable, [Disable]
Telnet Login Required
Session Access Level
Inactivity Timeout
Disconnect Time (Minutes)
FTP Session
1 – 60
[5]
Enable, [Disable]
FTP Login Required
Enable, [Disable]
Alarm
See Table 5-13
Settings
Configuration Option
ASCII Alarm Messages
Alarm & Trap Dial Out
Trap Disconnect
Default in [Bold]
Com Port, [Disable]
Enable, [Disable]
[Enable], Disable
Enable, [Disable]
1 – 10 [5]
Call Retry
Dial-Out Delay Time (Min)
Alternate Dial-Out Directory
System Alarm Relay
[None], 1 – 5
Enable, [Disable]
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Device Name: ___________________________________________________________
Management and Communication
Configuration Option
Settings
Default in [Bold]
Communication Protocol
See Table 5-14
1
Node IP Address
[000.000.000.000] – 223.255.255.255, Clear
[000.000.000.000] – 255.255.255.255, Clear
[None], COM, FDL1, FDL2, DDL, EDLss-p
[000.000.000.000] – 223.255.255.255, Clear
[000.000.000.000] – 255.255.255.255, Clear
[PPP], SLIP
Node Subnet Mask
Default Network Destination
Communication Port IP Address
1
Communication Port Subnet Mask
Communication Port Link Protocol
Alternate Communication Port IP
[000.000.000.000] – 223.255.255.255, Clear
1
Address
Alternate Communication Port
Subnet Mask
[000.000.000.000] – 255.255.255.255, Clear
General SNMP Management See Table 5-15
SNMP Management
Community Name 1
Name 1 Access
Enable, [Disable]
ASCII text entry [Public], Clear
[Read], Read/Write
Community Name 2
Name 2 Access
ASCII text entry, [Clear]
[Read], Read/Write
SNMP NMS Security
NMS IP Validation
Number of Managers
See Table 5-16
Enable, [Disable]
[1] – 10 [1]
1
NMS n IP Address
[000.000.000.000] – 223.255.255.255, Clear
[Read], Read/Write
Access Level
SNMP Traps
See Table 5-17
SNMP Traps
Enable, [Disable]
Number of Trap Managers
[1] – 6 [1]
1
NMS n IP Address
[000.000.000.000] – 223.255.255.255, Clear
[Default], COM, FDL1, FDL2, DDL, EDLss-p
Disable, Warm, AuthFail, [Both]
Enable, [Disable]
Destination
General Traps
Enterprise Specific Traps
Link Traps
Disable, Up, Down, [Both]
Network, DSX-1, T1s, Ports, [All]
Link Traps Interfaces
1
The first byte cannot be set to 0 nor 127. However, the null address of 0.0.0.0 is valid
after performing a Clear.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
A-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Channel Assignments Worksheets
Use the following worksheets to record cross connection assignments. See
Assigning Cross Connections in Chapter 5, Setting Up, for more information.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
Network T1 Interface ___ Channel Worksheet
Network ___
Channel
Signaling and
Trunk Conditioning
Allocation
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
N17
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
N23
N24
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
A-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
DSX-1 T1 Interface ___ Channel Worksheet
DSX-1 Signaling and
Trunk Conditioning
DSX ___ Channel
Allocation
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menus and Configuration Worksheets
This page intentionally left blank.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
A-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addressing
B
Selecting an IP Addressing Scheme
You can select from many IP addressing schemes to provide SNMP NMS, Telnet,
or FTP connectivity. When selecting a scheme, keep the following in mind:
H
Because connection to remote devices is through different interfaces (for
EDL), it may be necessary to assign IP addresses and subnet masks to each
EDL individually.
H
Avoid multiple EDL connections between the same two devices to prevent
routing loops.
H
H
Assign IP addresses on a per-interface or T1 access unit basis.
Although routing information is automatically passed between interconnected
T1 access units from the network side, make sure to set a route to the
subnet(s) in the NMS’s or local router’s routing table.
The gateway to subnet(s) is through the T1 access unit connected to:
— The LAN (using a LAN adapter), or
— To a router’s, terminal server’s, or NMS’s direct PPP (point-to-point
protocol) or SLIP (link-layer protocol for IP traffic) serial connection.
H
H
H
Each T1 unit’s routing table supports a maximum of 300 routes, even though
a single route is all that is needed to reach every device on a subnet.
Have a default route set only for devices directly connected to the NMS’s
COM port.
Allow any legal host address for a given subnet; the address choice within
the subnet is not important to the unit, but should be selected in conjunction
with all IP addressing for the subnet.
H
H
For a point-to-point ESF T1 link, use the FDL to connect to the remote site.
For a fractional T1 network, use EDL(s) to connect to each remote site (when
at least one data port is configured at that site).
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addressing
H
For a fractional T1 network when a data port is not configured (in the case of
voice only), a single DDL can be used to connect to a remote site.
NOTE:
When dealing with IP addressing, your Information Systems (IS) department
needs to be involved since they typically dictate the IP addressing scheme
used in an organization.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
B-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addressing
IP Addressing Scheme Examples
The following examples describe some typical network scenarios; they are not
the only scenarios that can be used. The subnet mask shown for each T1 access
unit is 255.255.255.0.
Direct Management Links to Remote T1 Access Units
In this example, T1 Access Unit A is connected to:
H
H
The NMS at the central site
Each remote T1 access unit through a management link (multiple EDLs)
SNMP NMS
Ethernet
135.18.40.1
B
C
D
135.18.2.17
135.18.2.18
LAN Adapter
COM Port
T1
Network
IP Address: 135.18.40.3
A
135.18.2.1
135.18.2.26
Subnet 135.18.40.0
Subnet 135.18.2.0
496-15185
Physical Connection
EDL Management Link
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addressing
Routing to Remote T1 Access Units on the Same Subnet
In this example, T1 Access Unit A is connected to:
H
H
The NMS at the central site
Remote T1 access units through EDL management links
The illustration shows two management EDL management links at the central
site, with T1 Access Units B and C connected through one EDL management
link.
SNMP NMS
Ethernet
135.18.40.1
B
C
D
135.18.2.17
135.18.2.18
LAN Adapter
COM Port
T1
Network
IP Address: 135.18.40.3
A
135.18.2.1
135.18.2.26
Subnet 135.18.40.0
Subnet 135.18.2.0
496-15186
Physical Connection
EDL Management Link
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
B-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addressing
Routing to Remote Access Units Using Different Subnets
In this example, T1 Access Unit A is connected to:
H
H
The NMS at the central site
Two remote T1 access units through EDL management links
The illustration shows two EDL management links, with T1 Access Units B and C
connected through one EDL management link. By configuring a different IP
address and subnet for each management link:
H
H
H
T1 Access Units B and C share a subnet: 135.18.3.0
T1 Access Units A and B share a different subnet: 135.18.2.0
T1 Access Units A and D share yet another subnet: 135.18.4.0
Subnet 135.18.40.0
SNMP NMS
Subnet 135.18.2.0
135.18.2.2
*
Ethernet
B
135.18.40.1
135.18.3.2
LAN Adapter
COM Port
C
IP Address: 135.18.40.3
T1
Network
135.18.2.1
A
135.18.3.3
Subnet 135.18.3.0
D
135.18.4.1
Subnet 135.18.4.0
135.18.4.26
Physical Connection
EDL Management Link
This subnet connection can be to any of the following:
• SNMP NMS via the COM Port
*
• LAN adapter via the COM Port
• Terminal server via the COM Port
496-15187
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addressing
Routing to Remote T1 Access Units Using Routers
In the following example, each T1 access unit receives its management traffic
through a connection from the COM port to the serial port of a router. In this case,
the units do not route data among themselves, but rely on the IP routers to route
management traffic for the remote T1 access units using data streams configured
between the routers.
Each T1 Access Unit is configured to be on its own subnet, having a subnet mask
of FF.FF.FF.00. This subnet is independent of the subnet on the LAN supported
by the local router.
Subnet 135.18.1.0
SNMP NMS
Subnet 135.18.5.0
135.18.5.2
135.18.1.2
COM
Router:
135.18.5.1
Serial
Port
Router:
135.18.1.1
Router:
135.18.2..
Serial
Port
Router:
135.18.4.1
T1
Network
Subnet 135.18.2.0
COM
Subnet 135.18.6.0
135.18.6.2
135.18.4.2
Subnet 135.18.4.0
COM
Router:
135.18.6.1
Serial
Port
Router:
135.18.3..
Subnet 135.18.3.0
497-15196-01
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
B-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addressing
Assigning IP Addresses and Subnet Masks
Once you select an IP scheme, assign an address (or addresses) to the T1
access unit.
If using . . .
Then . . .
COM port as a
management interface
Assign the COM port address and net mask.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management &
Communication→ Communication Protocol
COM port connected to an
external modem
Configure using an alternate IP address.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Management &
Communication→ Communication Protocol
FDL, DDL, or EDL
management links
Assign IP addresses and net masks to each management
link.
Menu selection sequences:
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Network (for FDL and
DDL)
Main Menu→ Configuration→ Sync Data Ports (for EDL)
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addressing
This page intentionally left blank.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
B-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Traps
C
This section describes the T1 access unit’s compliance with SNMP format
standards and with its special operational trap features. The T1 access unit
supports the following user interface traps, along with several enterprise-specific
traps:
H
warmStart
H
H
H
authenticationFailure
linkUp
linkDown
These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table.
Trap: warmStart
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
warmStart
T1 access unit has just
reinitialized and stabilized
itself.
H Reset command sent.
H Power disruption.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Traps
Trap: authentificationFailure
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
authenticationFailure
Access to the T1 access
unit was attempted and
failed.
H SNMP protocol message not
properly authenticated.
H Three unsuccessful attempts
were made to enter a correct
login/password combination.
H IP address security is
enabled, and a message was
received from SNMP Manager
whose address was not on the
list of approved managers.
Traps: linkUp and linkDown
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
linkDown
The link is down.
A failure in one of the
communication interfaces has
occurred.
linkUp
The link is operational.
One of the failed communication
interfaces is up and operational.
The interfaces that support these traps and conditions that define linkUp and
linkDown for each interface:
linkUp/Down
Variable-Bindings
Interface
Possible Cause
PHYSICAL SUBLAYER – Represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table.
Network and DSX-1
interfaces
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H linkDown – One or more
alarm conditions are active on
the interface.
H ifAdminStatus
(Supported by the
DS1 MIB.)
(RFC 1573)
Alarm conditions include:
– Loss of Signal (LOS)
– Out of Frame (OOF)
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H ifType (RFC 1573)
– Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS)
H dsx1LineStatus
(RFC 1406)
– Excessive Error Rate (EER)
– Yellow Alarm
H linkUp – No alarms on the
interface.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
C-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Traps
linkUp/Down
Variable-Bindings
Interface
Possible Cause
Synchronous
Data Ports
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H linkDown – One or more
alarm conditions are active on
the port.
H ifAdminStatus
(Supported by the
media-specific
RS232-Like MIB.)
(RFC 1573)
Alarm conditions include:
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H ifType (RFC 1573)
1
– DTR Off
1
– RTS Off
– Out of Frame (OOF) for the
Embedded Data Link
2
(EDL)
– Excessive Error Rate for
the Embedded Data Link
2
(EDL)
H linkUp – No alarms on the
port.
OCU Ports
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H linkDown – One or more
alarm conditions are active on
the interface.
(Represented by an
entry in the MIB-II
interfaces table.)
H ifAdminStatus
(RFC 1573)
Alarm conditions include:
– Loss of Signal
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H ifType (RFC 1573)
– Abnormal Station Code
– 64KCC Loop OOF
3
– DDS Net Failure
– Loss of Loop Timing
H linkUp – No alarms on the
port.
1
The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the DTE
supports the DTR lead state (Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready configuration
option on the Main Menu → Configuration → Sync Data Ports branch).
The OOF and EER alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the
EDL is enabled on that port (Embedded Data Link configuration option on the
Main Menu → Configuration → Sync Data Ports branch).
2
3
xxxxxx is the failure code
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Traps
Traps: Enterprise-Specific
These traps indicate that an enterprise-specific event has occurred. Supported
enterprise-specific traps include the following, listed in alphabetical order:
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
enterpriseAPMFailed(9)
The APM cannot be detected.
The APM has failed or has been
removed.
enterpriseAPMFailedClear (109)
enterpriseConfigChange(6)
The APM failure has cleared.
The APM failure has cleared.
Configuration has been changed
via the user interface or an SNMP
Manager after 60 seconds has
elapsed without another change.
Configuration has been changed
via the user interface or an SNMP
Manager.
enterpriseDeviceFail(3)
An internal device failure.
Operating software has detected
an internal device failure.
enterpriseModuleMisConfig (8)
A module misconfiguration has
been detected.
An APM is installed in a slot that
previously contained another type
of APM.
enterpriseModuleMisConfigClear(108)
enterprisePowerSupply(7)
A module misconfiguration error
condition has been cleared.
The operating software no longer
detects a misconfiguration.
The power supply output voltage
has dropped below the tolerance
level.
Power supply problem.
enterprisePowerSupplyClear(107)
enterprisePrimaryClockFail(1)
The power supply output voltage
alarm condition has cleared.
The power supply output voltage
alarm condition has cleared.
A failure of the device’s currently
configured primary clock source.
Operating software has detected
that the primary clock source has
failed.
enterprisePrimaryClockFailClear(101)
enterpriseSecondaryClockFail(4)
The failure of the device’s currently Operating software has detected
configured primary clock source
has cleared.
that the primary clock source is
now operational again.
A failure of the device’s currently
configured secondary clock
source.
Operating software has detected
that the secondary clock source
has failed.
enterpriseSecondaryClockFailClear(104) The failure of the device’s currently Operating software has detected
configured secondary clock source that the secondary clock source is
has cleared.
now operational again.
enterpriseSelfTestFail(2)
A hardware failure.
Unit has completed (re)initialization
and a hardware failure was
detected.
enterpriseTestStart(5)
A test is running.
At least one test has been started
on an interface.
enterpriseTestStop(105)
All tests have been halted.
All tests have been halted on an
interface.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
C-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Traps
The tests that support these traps and conditions that define enterpriseTestStart
and enterpriseTestStop for each interface:
enterpriseTestStart/Stop
Variable-Bindings
Interface
For These Tests
Network and DSX-1
T1 Interfaces
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H All
H ifAdminStatus
(RFC 1573)
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H ifType (RFC 1573)
H dsx1SendCode
H Remote Line Loopback
H Send 511 pattern
H Send 3 in 24
(RFC 1406)
H Send QRSS
H dsx1LoopbackConfig
H Line Loopback
H Payload Loopback
(RFC 1406)
H devDS1TestType
H Repeater Loopback
H Send All Zeroes
H Send All Ones
H Send 1-in-8
(devDS1Config.mib)
H Send 63
H Send 2047
15
H Send 2 -1
20
H Send 2 -1
H Send user-defined pattern
H All Monitor patterns
Synchronous
Data Ports
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H DTE Loopback
H ifAdminStatus
H DTE Payload Loopback
H Data Channel Loopback
H Send V.54 Loopback
H Send FT1 Loopback
H Send pattern tests
(RFC 1573)
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H ifType (RFC 1573)
H devSyncPortTestType
(devDataPortConfig.mib)
H Monitor pattern tests
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Traps
enterpriseTestStart/Stop
Variable-Bindings
Interface
For These Tests
OCU Ports
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H Latching CSU and DSU
Loopbacks
H ifAdminStatus
(RFC 1573)
H Nonlatching CSU and DSU
Loopbacks
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H ifType (RFC 1573)
H OCU Loopback
H DS-0 Loopback
H Line Loopback
H Data Loopback
H devOcuTestType
(devOcu.mib)
H Remote Latching CSU, DSU
and OCU Loopbacks
H Remote Nonlatching CSU,
DSU and OCU Loopbacks
H Send pattern tests
H Monitor pattern tests
Voice Ports
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H Digital Loopback
H Analog Loopback
H Line Loopback
H ifAdminStatus
(RFC 1573)
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H ifType (RFC 1573)
H Send DRS tone to T1 interface
and user
H Send quiet tone to T1
H devVoiceTestType
interface and user
(devVoice.mib)
H Monitor pattern tests
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
C-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
D
This appendix provides a correlation between how a function is performed or
status is displayed on the user interface and how the same function is
accomplished using access to the SNMP database (Table D-1). SNMP objects
are displayed in bold type while values for SNMP objects are displayed in italics.
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (1 of 16)
User Interface Command
STATUS
SNMP MIB Object
main/status/system Health & Status:
Read:
Power Supply Alarm
LOS at Net/DSX-1
OOF at Net/DSX-1
AIS at Net/DSX-1
EER at Net
Yellow at Net/DSX-1
APM Card Failed
devHealthAndStatus
dsx1LossOfSignal from dsx1LineStatus for interface
dsx1LossOfFrame from dsx1LineStatus for interface
dsx1RcvAIS from dsx1LineStatus for interface
dsx1OtherFailure from dsx1LineStatus for interface
dsx1RcvFarEndLOF from dsx1LineStatus for interface
devHealthAndStatus
Module MisConfig
devHealthAndStatus
Module Unsupported
OOF (EDL)
devHealthAndStatus
devHealthAndStatus
Out of Sync, Slot xx Group g
EER (EDL)
devHealthAndStatus
devHealthAndStatus
Loss of Signal, ss-p
Abnormal Station Code, ss-p
64KCC Loop OOF, ss-p
DDS Net Failure xxxxxx, ss-p
Loss of Loop Timing, ss-p
Primary Clock Failed
Secondary Clock Failed
Network Com Link Down
Device Fail
devHealthAndStatus
devHealthAndStatus
devHealthAndStatus
devHealthAndStatus
devHealthAndStatus
devHealthAndStatus
devHealthAndStatus
down from ifOperStatus for the COM port interface
devHealthAndStatus
main/status/system Self-Test Results:
All Self-Test Results
Read:
devSelfTestResults
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (2 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/status/system Test Status:
Read:
Net/DSX-1 LLB Test Active
Net/DSX-1 PLB Test Active
Net/DSX-1 RLB Test Active
DCLB, Slot xx Port n
dsx1LineLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for interface
dsx1PayloadLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for interface
devDS1TestControl and rlb test for interface
devSyncPortTestControl and dclb test for interface
devSyncPortTestControl and dtlb test for interface
devSyncPortTestControl and plb test for interface
devOcuTestControl and locOCULB test for interface
devOcuTestControl and locOCULB test for interface
devOcuTestControl and locNonLatchingCSULB test for interface
devOcuTestControl and locLatchingCSULB test for interface
devOcuTestControl and locNonLatchingDSULB test for interface
devOcuTestControl and locLatchingCSULB test for interface
devOcuTestControl and locLineLB test for interface
devOcuTestControl and locDataLB test for interface
devOcuTestControl and locDS0LB test for interface
devVoiceTestAction and digitalLoopback test for interface
devVoiceTestAction and analogLoopback test for interface
devVoiceTestAction and lineLoopback test for interface
devVoiceTestAction and userDRSTone or networkDRSTone for
interface
DTLB, Slot xx Port n
DTPLB, Slot xx Port n
Non-Latching OCU LB, ss-p
Latching OCU LB, ss-p
Non-Latching CSU LB, ss-p
Latching CSU LB, ss-p
Non-Latching DSU LB, ss-p
Latching DSU LB, ss-p
OCU Line LB, ss-p
OCU Data LB, ss-p
OCU DS-0 LB, ss-p
Voice DLB, Slot xx Port n
Voice ALB, Slot xx Port n
Voice LLB, Slot xx Port n
Voice DRS, Slot xx Port n
Voice Quiet, Slot xx Port n
Forced Signal, Slot xx Port
devVoiceTestAction and userQuietTone or networkQuietTone for
interface
devVoiceTestAction and testRXBits, testTXBits, testTRLeads, or
testELeads for interface
Pttn Act, Network/DSX-1
Mon Pttn, Network/DSX-1
devDS1TestControl and send[Pttn] for interface
devDS1TestControl and mon[Pttn] for interface
devSyncDataTestControl and send[Pttn] for interface
devSyncDataTestControl and mon[Pttn] for interface
devOcuTestControl and send[Pttn] for interface
devOcuTestControl and mon[Pttn] for interface
devControlTestStatus
Pttn Act, Slot xx Port n (sync port)
Mon Pttn, Slot xx Port n (sync port)
Pttn Act, Slot xx Port n (OCU port)
Mon Pttn, Slot xx Port n (OCU port)
Lamp Test Active
main/status/voice:
Fully supported by MIB objects (see test/port (voice) and
config/voice_port.
Call Progress
devVoiceStatusCallProgState
Trunk Condition CGA
devVoiceStatusTrunkCondInCGA
main/status/cross_connect:
fully supported by devCrossConnect
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
D-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (3 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/status/performance/network
Telco Current:
For the network interface, Read value in:
dsx1TimeElapsed
Current Interval Timer
ESF Error Events
ES
dsx1TelcoCurrentEvent
dsx1CurrentES
UAS
SES
BES
CSS
LOFC
dsx1CurrentUAS
dsx1CurrentSES
dsx1CurrentBES
dsx1CurrentCSS
dsx1CurrentLOFC
Telco Intervals:
ES
Select interval number with dsx1IntervalNumber, Read value in:
dsx1IntervalES
UAS
dsx1IntervalUAS
SES
dsx1IntervalSES
BES
dsx1IntervalBES
CSS
dsx1IntervalCSS
LOFC
Select interval number with devTelcoIntervalNumber, then
Read value in: devTelcoIntervalLOFC
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (4 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/status/performance/network
(cont’d)
Telco 24 Hour Totals:
For the network interface, Read value in:
dsx1ValidIntervals
dsx1TotalES
Valid Intervals
ES
UAS
dsx1TotalUAS
SES
dsx1TotalSES
BES
dsx1TotalBES
CSS
dsx1TotalCSS
LOFC
devTelcoTotalLOFC
User Current:
For the network interface, Read value in:
devUserCurrentTimer
devUserCurrentEvent
devUserCurrentESs
Current Interval Timer
ESF Error Events
ES
UAS
SES
BES
CSS
LOFC
Status
devUserCurrentUASs
devUserCurrentSESs
devUserCurrentBESs
devUserCurrentCSSs
devUserCurrentLOFC
devUserCurrentStEvnt
User Intervals:
Select interval number with devUserIntervalNumber, then
Read value in:
ES
devUserIntervalESs
UAS
SES
BES
CSS
LOFC
Status
devUserIntervalUASs
devUserIntervalSESs
devUserIntervalBESs
devUserIntervalCSSs
devUserIntervalLOFC
devUserIntervalStEvnt
User 24 Hour Totals:
Valid Intervals
ES
devUserValidIntervals
devUserTotalESs
UAS
SES
BES
CSS
devUserTotalUASs
devUserTotalSESs
devUserTotalBESs
devUserTotalCSSs
devUserTotalLOFC
LOFC
User Clear Statistics:
For the network interface, Set devClrUserReg to clear.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
D-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (5 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/status/performance/port
Near-End Current:
For the port, Read value in:
devEDLCurrentTimer
devEDLCurrentEvent
devEDLCurrentESs
Current Interval Timer
Error Events Counter
ES
UAS
SES
BES
LOFC
devEDLCurrentUASs
devEDLCurrentSESs
devEDLCurrentBESs
devEDLCurrentLOFC
Near-End Intervals:
Select interval number with devEDLIntervalNumber, then Read
value in:
ES
devEDLIntervalESs
UAS
SES
BES
LOFC
devEDLIntervalUASs
devEDLIntervalSESs
devEDLIntervalBESs
devEDLIntervalLOFC
Near-End 8 Hour Totals:
For the port, Read value in:
devEDLTotalValidIntervals
devEDLTotalESs
Valid Intervals
ES
UAS
devEDLTotalUASs
SES
devEDLTotalSESs
BES
devEDLTotalBESs
LOFC
devEDLTotalLOFC
Near-End Clear Statistics:
For the port, Set devEDLClrRegWhichRegs to nearRegisters and
devEDLClrRegAction to clear.
Far-End Current:
For the port, Read value in:
devEDLFarEndCurrentTimer
devEDLFarEndCurrentEvent
devEDLFarEndCurrentESs
devEDLFarEndCurrentUASs
devEDLFarEndCurrentSESs
devEDLFarEndCurrentBESs
devEDLFarEndCurrentLOFC
Current Interval Timer
Error Events Counter
ES
UAS
SES
BES
LOFC
Far-End Intervals:
Select interval number with devDataPortIntervalNumber, then
Read value in:
ES
devEDLFarEndIntervalESs
UAS
SES
BES
LOFC
Complete
devEDLFarEndIntervalUASs
devEDLFarEndIntervalSESs
devEDLFarEndIntervalBESs
devEDLFarEndIntervalLOFC
devEDLFarEndIntervalCmpl
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (6 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/status/performance/port (cont’d)
Far-End 8 Hour Totals:
For the port, Read value in:
devEDLFarEndTotalValidIntervals
devEDLFarEndTotalESs
devEDLFarEndTotalUASs
devEDLFarEndTotalSESs
devEDLFarEndTotalBESs
devEDLFarEndTotalLOFC
devEDLFarEndTotalCmpl
Valid Intervals
ES
UAS
SES
BES
LOFC
Complete
Far-End Clear Statistics:
For the port, Set devEDLClrRegWhichRegs to farRegisters and
devEDLClrRegAction to clear.
main/status/performance/clear_statistics:
Network
Set:
devUserClrReg
All Synchronous Data Ports
Set devEDLClrRegWhichRegs to nearRegisters and farRegisters
and devEDLClrRegsAction to clear.
main/status/identity:
Serial Number
Read:
sysDescr object from the System group
sysDescr object from the System group
sysDescr object from the System group
sysDescr object from the System group
sysName object from the System group
sysContact object from the System group
sysLocation object from the System group
ifDescr object for the interface
Model Number
Software Revision
Hardware Revision
System Name
System Contact
System Location
APM Type
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
D-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (7 of 16)
User Interface Command
TEST
SNMP MIB Object
main/test/network and /dsx
Set:
Start Line Loopback
Stop Line Loopback
dsx1LoopbackConfig to dsx1LineLoop for the interface
dsx1LoopbackConfig to dsx1NoLoop for the interface
Start Payload Loopback
Stop Payload Loopback
dsx1LoopbackConfig to dsx1PayloadLoop for the interface
dsx1LoopbackConfig to dsx1NoLoop for the interface
Start Repeater Loopback
Stop Repeater Loopback
devDS1TestControl for rlb on the interface
devDS1TestControl for rlb to idle on the interface
Send Line Loopback Up
dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendLineCode for the network interface
Send Line Loopback Down
dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendResetCode for the network interface
Start Send QRSS Pattern
Stop Send QRSS Pattern
dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendQRS for the interface
dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendResetCode for the interface
Start Send All Zeros Pattern
Stop Send All Zeros Pattern
devDS1TestControl for sendZeros on the interface
devDS1TestControl for sendZeros to idle on the interface
Start Send All Ones Pattern
Stop Send All Ones Pattern
devDS1TestControl for sendOnes on the interface
devDS1TestControl for sendOnes to idle on the interface
Start Send 1 in 8 Pattern
Stop Send 1 in 8 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for send1in8 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for send1in8 to idle on the interface
Start Send 3 in 24 Pattern
Stop Send 3 in 24 Pattern
dsx1SendCode to dsx1Send3in24Pattern for the interface
dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendNoCode for the interface
Start Send 63 Pattern
Stop Send 63 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for send63 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for send63 to idle on the interface
Start Send 511 Pattern
Stop Send 511 Pattern
dsx1SendCode to dsx1Send511Pattern for the interface
dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendNoCode for the interface
Start Send 2047 Pattern
Stop Send 2047 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for send2047 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for send2047 to idle on the interface
15
Start Send 2 -1 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for send2E15 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for send2E15 to idle on the interface
15
Stop Send 2 -1 Pattern
20
Start Send 2 -1 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for send2E20 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for send2E20 to idle on the interface
20
Stop Send 2 -1 Pattern
Start Send User-Defined Pattern
Stop User-Defined Pattern
devDS1TestControl for sendUserDefined on the interface and
devDS1TestArgument to the 2-byte pattern value
devDS1TestControl for sendUserDefined to idle on the interface
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (8 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/test/network and /dsx (cont’d)
Set:
Start Monitor QRSS Pattern
Stop Monitor QRSS Pattern
devDS1TestControl for monQRSS on the interface
devDS1TestControl for monQRSS to idle on the interface
Start Monitor All Zeros Pattern
Stop Monitor All Zeros Pattern
devDS1TestControl for monZeros on the interface
devDS1TestControl for monZeros to idle on the interface
Start Monitor All Ones Pattern
Stop Monitor Alll Ones Pattern
devDS1TestControl for monOnes on the interface
devDS1TestControl for monOnes to idle on the interface
Start Monitor 1 in 8 Pattern
Stop Monitor 1 in 8 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for mon1in8 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for mon1in8 to idle on the interface
Start Monitor 3 in 24 Pattern
Stop Monitor 3 in 24 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for mon3in24 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for mon3in24 to idle on the interface
Start Monitor 63 Pattern
Stop Monitor 63 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for mon63 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for mon63 to idle on the interface
Start Monitor 511 Pattern
Stop Monitor 511 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for mon511 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for mon511 to idle on the interface
Start Monitor 2047 Pattern
Stop Monitor 2047 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for mon2047 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for mon2047 to idle on the interface
15
Start Monitor 2 -1 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for mon2E15 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for mon2E15 to idle on the interface
15
Stop Monitor 2 -1 Pattern
20
Start Monitor 2 -1 Pattern
devDS1TestControl for mon2E20 on the interface
devDS1TestControl for mon2E20 to idle on the interface
20
Stop Monitor 2 -1 Pattern
Start Monitor User-Defined Pattern
Stop Monitor User-Defined Pattern
devDS1TestControl for monUserDefined on the interface and
devDS1TestArgument to the 2-byte pattern value
devDS1TestControl for monUserDefined to idle on the interface
Inject Error
devDS1SendControlInjectErr to inject
Clear Monitor Error
devDS1MonResultErrorCount to clear
Read value in:
Number of Errors Monitored
Number of Errors Injected
devDS1MonResultErrorCount
devDS1SendControlErrorCount
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
D-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (9 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/test/port (sync data):
Set:
Start DTE Loopback
Stop DTE Loopback
devSyncPortTestControl for dtlb on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for dtlb to idle on the interface
Start DTE Payload Loopback
Stop DTE Payload Loopback
devSyncPortTestControl for plb on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for plb to idle on the interface
Start Data Channel Loopback
Stop Data Channel Loopback
devSyncPortTestControl for dclb on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for dclb to idle on the interface
Send V.54 Loopback Up
Send V.54 Loopback Down
devSyncPortTestControl to v54dn on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for v54dn to idle on the interface
Send FT1 Loopback Up
Send FT1 Loopback Down
devSyncPortTestControl for ftlup on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for ftlup to idle on the interface
Start Send QRSS Pattern
Stop Send QRSS Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for sendQRSS on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for sendQRSS to idle on the interface
Start Send All Zeros Pattern
Stop Send All Zeros Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for sendZeros on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for sendZeros to idle on the interface
Start Send All Ones Pattern
Stop Send All Ones Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for sendOnes on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for sendOnes to idle on the interface
Start Send 63 Pattern
Stop Send 63 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for send63 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for send63 to idle on the interface
Start Send 511 Pattern
Stop Send 511 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for send511 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for send511 to idle on the interface
Start Send 2047 Pattern
Stop Send 2047 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for send2047 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for send2047 to idle on the interface
15
Start Send 2 -1 Pattern
Stop Send 2 -1 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for send2E15 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for send2E15 to idle on the interface
15
20
Start Send 2 -1 Pattern
Stop Send 2 -1 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for send2E20 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for send2E20 to idle on the interface
20
Start Send User-Defined Pattern
Stop Send User-Defined Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for sendUserDefined on the interface and
devSyncPortTestArgument to the 2-byte pattern value
devSyncPortTestControl for sendUserDefined to idle on the
interface
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
D-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (10 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/test/port (sync data): (cont’d)
Set:
Start Monitor QRSS Pattern
Stop Monitor QRSS Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for monQRSS on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for monQRSS to idle on the interface
Start Monitor All Zeros Pattern
Stop Monitor All Zeros Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for monZeros on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for monZeros to idle on the interface
Start Monitor All Ones Pattern
Stop Monitor All Ones Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for monOnes on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for monOnes to idle on the interface
Start Monitor 63 Pattern
Stop Monitor 63 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for mon63 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for mon63 to idle on the interface
Start Monitor 511 Pattern
Stop Monitor 511 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for mon511 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for mon511 to idle on the interface
Start Monitor 2047 Pattern
Stop Monitor 2047 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for mon2047 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for mon2047 to idle on the interface
15
Start Monitor 2 -1 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for mon2E15 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for mon2E15 to idle on the interface
15
Stop Monitor 2 -1 Pattern
20
Start Monitor 2 -1 Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for mon2E20 on the interface
devSyncPortTestControl for mon2E20 to idle on the interface
20
Stop Monitor 2 -1 Pattern
Start Monitor User-Defined Pattern
Stop Monitor User-Defined Pattern
devSyncPortTestControl for monUserDefined on the interface and
devSyncPortTestArgument to the 2-byte pattern value
devSyncPortTestControl for monUserDefined to idle on the
interface
Inject Error
devSyncPortSendControlInjectErr fo inject
Clear Monitor Error
devSyncPortMonResultErrorCount to clear
Read value in:
Number of Errors Monitored
Number of Errors Injected
devSyncPortMonResultErrorCount
devSyncPortSendControlErrorCount
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
D-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (11 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/test/port (voice):
Set devVoiceTestType to:
With devVoiceTestAction set to:
Start Digital Loopback
Stop Digital Loopback
digitalLoopback
digitalLoopback
start
stop
Start Analog Loopback
Stop Analog Loopback
analogLoopback
analogLoopback
start
stop
Start Line Loopback
Stop Line Loopback
lineLoopback
lineLoopback
start
stop
Start Send DRS to T1
Stop Send DRS to T1
networkDRSTone
networkDRSTone
start
stop
Start Send DRS to User
Stop Send DRS to User
userDRSTone
userDRSTone
start
stop
Start Send Quiet to T1
Stop Send Quiet to T1
networkQuietTone
networkQuietTone
start
stop
Start Send Quiet to User
Stop Send Quiet to User
userQuietTone
userQuietTone
start
stop
main/test/port (voice):
Set Tx ABCD Bits
Set Rx ABCD Bits
Set devVoiceTestType to:
testTXBits
With devVoiceTestAction set to:
start and devVoiceTestArgument
specifying the ABCD bit values
start and devVoiceTestArgument
specifying the ABCD bit values
testRXBits
Set Tip & Ring Leads
Set E-Lead State
testTRLeads
testELeads
start and devVoiceTestArgument
specifying Tip and Ring values
start and devVoiceTestArgument
set to idle or active
From devVoiceTestType
Read:
Tx ABCD Bits
Rx ABCD Bits
testTXBits
testRXBits
Tip & Ring Leads
E-Lead State
M-Lead State
testTRLeads
testELeads
testTRLeads
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
D-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (12 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/test/port (OCU):
Set devOcuTestType to:
With devOcuTestControl set to:
Start OCU LB
Stop OCU LB
locOCULB
locOCULB
running
idle
Start Non-Latching CSU LB
Stop Non-Latching CSU LB
locNonLatchingCSULB
locNonLatchingCSULB
running
idle
Start Latching CSU LB
Stop Latching CSU LB
locLatchingCSULB
locLatchingCSULB
running
idle
Start Non-Latching DSU LB
Stop Non-Latching DSU LB
locNonLatchingDSULB
locNonLatchingDSULB
running
idle
Start Latching DSU LB
Stop Latching DSU LB
locLatchingDSULB
locLatchingDSULB
running
idle
Start OCU Line LB
Stop OCU Line LB
locLineLB
locLineLB
running
idle
Start OCU Data LB
Stop OCU Data LB
locDataLB
locDataLB
running
idle
Start OCU DS-0 LB
Stop OCU DS-0 LB
locDS0LB
locDS0LB
running
idle
Start remote Latching CSU LB
Stop remote Latching CSU LB
remLatchingCSULB
remLatchingCSULB
running
idle
Start remote Latching DSU LB
Stop remote Latching DSU LB
remLatchingDSULB
remLatchingDSULB
running
idle
Start remote Latching OCU LB
Stop remote Latching OCU LB
remLatchingOCULB
remLatchingOCULB
running
idle
Start remote Non-Latching CSU LB
Stop remote Non-Latching CSU LB
remNonLatchingCSULB
remNonLatchingCSULB
running
idle
Start remote Non-Latching DSU LB
Stop remote Non-Latching DSU LB
remNonLatchingDSULB
remNonLatchingDSULB
running
idle
Start remote Non-Latching OCU LB
Stop remote Non-Latching OCU LB
remNonLatchingOCULB
remNonLatchingOCULB
running
idle
Start Send All Zeros to User
Stop Send All Zeros to User
sendZerosUser
sendZerosUser
running
idle
Start Send All Ones to User
Stop Send All Ones to User
sendOnesUser
sendOnesUser
running
idle
Start Send 63 to User
Stop Send 63 to User
send63User
send63User
running
idle
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
D-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (13 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/test/port (OCU) (continued):
Set devOcuTestType to:
With devOcuTestControl set to:
(continued)
Start Send 511 to User
Stop Send 511 to User
send511User
send511User
running
idle
Start Send 2047 to User
Stop Send 2047 to User
send2047User
send2047User
running
idle
Start Send All Zeros to User
Stop Send All Zeros to User
sendZerosT1
sendZerosT1
running
idle
Start Send All Ones to T1
Stop Send All Ones to T1
sendOnesT1
sendOnesT1
running
idle
Start Send 63 to T1
Stop Send 63 to T1
send63T1
send63T1
running
idle
Start Send 511 to T1
Stop Send 511 to User
send511T1
send511User
running
idle
Start Send 2047 to T1
Stop Send 2047 to T1
send2047T1
send2047T1
running
idle
Inject Error
Set devOcuSendControlInjectErr to inject
Set devOcuMonResultErrorCount
Read value from devOcuMonResultErrorCount
Read value from devOcuSendControlErrorCount
Clear Monitor Error
Number of Errors Monitored
Number of Errors Injected
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
D-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (14 of 16)
User Interface Command
CONFIG
SNMP MIB Object
main/config/load followed by
main/config/save:
Set:
devConfigAreaCopy to the selected area: active-to-customer1,
factory1-to-active, etc.
main/config:
Set:
Accept Configuration Mismatch
devCfgCardAction to accept
main/config/network:
Set/Read:
Network Interface
Line Framing Format
Line Coding Format
ANSI Performance Report Msgs.
Management Link
DDL Rate
ifAdminStatus to up or down
dsx1LineType
dsx1LineCoding
dsx1Fdl
dsx1Fdl (fdl only)
ifSpeed
Network Time Slot
Circuit Identifier
devDs1FracTable entry, with devDs1FracIndex for DDL
dsx1Circuit Identifier
main/config/dsx:
Set/Read:
Interface Status
Line Framing Format
Line Coding Format
ifAdminStatus to up or down
dsx1LineType
dsx1LineCoding
main/config/sync:
Set/Read:
Port Status
ifAdminStatus to up or down
Port Type
rs232PortType
Port Base Rate
devSyncDataPortConfigBaseRate
rs232SyncPortClockSource to internal or external
ifAdminStatus to up/down of EDL for this port
devPortUsage to none or netLink
rs232SyncPortEncoding to nrzi
Transmit Clock Source
Embedded Data Link
EDL Management Link
Invert Transmit and Received Data
main/config/voice_port:
Set/Read:
Port Status
ifAdminStatus to up or down
devVoiceConfigSignalingType
devVoiceConfigTermImpedance
devVoiceConfigWinkDelay
devVoiceConfigWinkDuration
devVoiceConfigRxGain
Signaling Type
Terminating Impedance
Wink Delay
Wink Duration
Rx Gain
Tx Gain
devVoiceConfigTxGain
Ring-back Tone
Trunk Cond. in CGA
devVoiceConfigRingBackTone
devVoiceConfigTrunkCondInCGA
Operating Mode
Read:devVoiceConfigOperatingMode
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
D-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (15 of 16)
User Interface Command
CONFIG
SNMP MIB Object
main/config/ocu:
Set/Read:
Port Status
Port Rate
ifAdminStatus to up or down
devOcuRate
Loopback Detection
devOcuLoopbackDetection
main/config/cross_connect:
Fully supported by the device cross-connect MIB objects using:
DSX-1-to-Network Assignments
Network to Network Assignments
Voice Port Assignments
devDs1FracTable
devDs1FracTable
devDs1FracTable
Sync Data Port Assignments
OCU-DP Port Assignments
Clear DSX-1 Time Slots
Clear Network Interface Time Slots
Clear Slot nn
devSyncDataPortAssignTable
devDs1FracTable
Use devDs1FracTable to clear all time slots
Use devDs1FracTable to clear all time slots
Use devDs1FracTable to clear all time slots
main/config/system:
Set/Read:
Test Timeout
devConfigTestTimeout
Test Duration
devConfigTestDuration
Primary Clock Source
Secondary Clock Source
devConfigClockSrcTable (read only)
devConfigClockSrcTable (read only)
main/config/user/com:
COM Port
Set/Read:
Port Usage
Port Type
Data Rate
Character Length
Parity
devPortUsage to netlink, alarm, or terminal
See the Asynchronous/Synchronous Port Table for the entry
rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed for the port
rs232AsyncPortBits for the port
rs232AsyncPortParity for the port
Stop Bits
rs232AsyncPortStopBits for the port
Ignore Control Leads
Clock Source
rs232PortInFlowType for the port
rs232SyncPortClockSource to internal or external
main/config/management/security:
Set/Read:
IP Address
devSecurityMgrIpAddress
Access Type
devSecurityMgrAccess to read or readWrite
main/config/management/trap:
Set/Read:
IP Address
devTrapMgrIpAddress
Destination
devTrapMgrDestination
devConfigTrapEnable
devConfigTrapEnable
General Traps
Enterprise-Specific Traps
Link Traps
devConfigTrapEnable
Link Traps Interfaces
ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable for the interface
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
D-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Cross-Reference
Table D-1. SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference (16 of 16)
User Interface Command
SNMP MIB Object
main/control/device_name:
Set/Read:
System Name
System Contact
System Location
sysName object from the System group
sysContact object from the System group
sysLocation object from the System group
System Alarm Relay Cut-Off:
Reset:
Set/Read:
devConfigAlarmRelayCutoff
Set:
devHWControlReset to reset.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
D-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin
Assignments
E
COM Port
The COM (communications) port connects to an async terminal or other
management interface.
These cables are:
H
H
14-foot, 26 AWG, 8-conductor, with a non-keyed 8-position modular jack
interface/connector at one end, and
25-pin or 9-pin connector at the other end, depending upon the management
interface used.
Refer to the appropriate cable section.
The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the COM port
interface/connector.
Signal
Direction
Pin #
DCE Transmit Clock (TXC)
DCE Received Data (RXD)
Signal Ground (SG)
Out
Out
—
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DCE Transmit Data (TXD)
DCE Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
DCE Carrier Detect (CD)
DCE Request to Send (RTS)
DCE Received Clock (RXC)
In
In
Out
In
Out
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
COM Port-to-PC Cable
This cable comes with the T1 access unit. The following shows the pin
assignments from the COM port to the DTE interface.
COM Port
Non-Keyed
8-Position
DTE
DB9 Socket
Modular Plug
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Tx Clock
Rx Data
Signal Ground
Tx Data
DTR
Connection
2
Rx Data
5
3
4
1
8
6
7
Signal Ground
Tx Data
DTR
CD
CD
RTS
CTS
No
Connection
Rx Clock
DSR
RTS
97-14909-01
COM Port-to-Terminal/Printer Cable
Order this cable when connecting the COM port to a terminal or printer, rather
than to a PC; it does not come with the T1 access unit. The following shows the
pin assignments from the COM port to the DTE interface.
COM Port
Non-Keyed
DTE
DB25 Plug
8-Position
Modular Plug
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15
Tx Clock
Rx Data
Signal Ground
Tx Data
DTR
3
7
2
Rx Data
Signal Ground
Tx Data
20 DTR
8
5
CD
CD
CTS
DSR
RTS
RTS
6
Rx Clock
4
17
97-14910-01
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
COM Port-to-Modem Cable
Order this cable when connecting the COM port to a modem or other external
device. The following shows the pin assignments from the COM port to the
external device.
COM Port
Non-Keyed
Modem
DB25 Plug
8-Position
Modular Plug
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Tx Clock
Rx Data
Signal Ground
Tx Data
DTR
Connection
2
7
3
6
4
Tx Data
Signal Ground
Rx Data
DSR
RTS
CD
20 DTR
CTS
RTS
No
Connection
5
Rx Clock
97-15669
Gender Adapter/Changer
When connecting the COM port to a router or Frame Relay Assembler/
Disassembler (FRAD), a gender adapter is required to convert the
COM Port-to-Terminal/Printer cable’s plug-type interface to a socket-type
interface for the AUX port.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
LAN Adapter and Cables
The LAN adapter is ordered along with the appropriate cable. Be sure to specify
whether you need a Token Ring or an Ethernet LAN Adapter.
The following shows the pin assignments for the cable between the LAN Adapter
(LAN A) and the T1 access unit’s COM port or COM Port-to-PC Adapter.
COM
Port
(DCE)
(DTE)
LAN A
Tx Clock
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Unused
DTR
Rx Data
Signal Ground
Tx Data
DTR
Tx Data
Signal Ground
Rx Data
CD
CTS
RTS
Frame Ground
Unused
Rx Clock
496-14908
T1 Network Interface Cable
Network access is via a 14-foot cable with an RJ48C unkeyed plug-type
connector on each end. The following table shows pin assignments and the
purpose of each.
Function
Circuit
Pin Number
Receive ring from the network
Receive tip from the network
Transmit ring to the network
Transmit tip to the network
R1
T1
R
1
2
4
5
T
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
DSX-1 Port Interface
The DSX-1 Port cable is a cable with a 15-pin DB15 on one end. The following
table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each.
Function
Circuit
Pin #
1
Receive tip from the DTE
Transmit tip to the DTE
Shield
T1
T
3
–
2,4
9
Receive ring from the DTE
Transmit ring to the DTE
R1
R
11
T1 Line Interface Cable
RJ48C
Plug
Unkeyed
DA15P
Plug
Blue
Blue
Receive Ring
Receive TIP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11 Receive Ring
3
Receive TIP
White/Blue
Orange
White/Blue
Orange
Transmit Ring
Transmit TIP
9
1
Transmit Ring
Transmit TIP
White/Orange
White/Orange
493-14342-01
The following table contains T1 Network Interface Connector information.
T1 Network Interface Connector (DA15P)
Pin Number
RJ48C
DA15P
Signal
Receiver Ring
Receiver Tip
Transmitter Ring
Transmitter Tip
1
2
4
5
11
3
9
1
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
EIA-530A Port Interface
The following table shows the EIA-530A circuit and pin assignments that are
supported for a port connector/interface (Port 1 or Port 2).
Circuit
Mnemonic CCITT #
ITU/
25-Pin
Pin #
Signal
Direction
—
Shield
—
—
1
Transmitted Data (TXD)
BA
103
To DCE
2 (A)
14 (B)
Received Data (RXD)
Request to Send (RTS)
Clear to Send (CTS)
BB
CA
CB
CC
104
105
106
107
From DCE
To DCE
3 (A)
16 (B)
4 (A)
19 (B)
From DCE
From DCE
5 (A)
13 (B)
Data Set (or DCE) Ready
(DSR)
6
Signal Ground/Common (SG) AB
102A
109
—
7
Received Line Signal Detector CF
(RLSD or LSD)
From DCE
8 (A)
10 (B)
Transmit Signal Element
Timing (TXC – DTE Source)
DA
DB
DD
113
114
115
To DCE
11 (B)
24 (A)
Transmitter Signal Element
Timing (TXC – DCE Source)
From DCE
From DCE
12 (B)
15 (A)
Receiver Signal Element
Timing (RXC – DCE Source)
17 (A)
9 (B)
Local Loopback (LL)
LL
141
To DCE
To DCE
18
20
Data Terminal (or DTE)
Ready (DTR)
CD
108/1, /2
Remote Loopback (RL)
Signal Common
RL
AC
TM
140
To DCE
—
21
102B
142
22, 23
25
Test Mode Indicator (TM)
From DCE
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
EIA-530A-to-V.35 DTE Adapter Cable
Used as an interface between the 25-position EIA-530A Sync Data Port
connector and a DTE’s V.35 connector.
12 Inches
25-Pin Plug
Connector
34-Position Socket
Connector
496-14882a
530 DB25
SIGNAL PLUG
V.35
SIGNAL
MS34
SOCKET
SHIELD
TD-A
1
2
A
P
S
R
T
Y
SHIELD
TD-A
TD-B 14
RD-A
TD-B
3
RD-A
RD-B 16
TXC-A 15
TXC-B 12
RXC-A 17
RD-B
TXC-A
AA TXC-B
V
X
C
D
F
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS
RXC-B
RTS
9
4
5
8
6
7
CTS
CTS
RLSD
RLSD
DSR
DSR
E
B
U
W
H
N
L
SIG. COMMON
SIG. COMMON
TT-A
TT-A 24
TT-B 11
TT-B
DTR 20
DTR
RL 21
RL
LL 18
LL
TM 25
NN TM
SIG. COMMON 23
497-15233
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
The following table provides the pin assignments for the 25-position Port 1 or
Port 2 connector/interface and a DTE’s 34-position V.35 connector.
25-Pin
Plug
Pin #
34-Pin
Socket
Pin #
ITU/
CCITT #
Signal
Direction
—
Shield
—
1
A
Transmit Data (TXD)
103
2 (A)
14 (B)
To DCE
P (A)
S (B)
Received Data (RXD)
104
3 (A)
16 (B)
From DCE
R (A)
T (B)
Request to Send (RTS)
105
106
107
102
109
4
To DCE
From DCE
From DCE
—
C
D
E
B
F
Clear to Send (CTS)
5
Data Set (or DCE) Ready (DSR)
Signal Ground/Common (SG)
6
7, 23
8
Data Channel Received Line
From DCE
Signal Detector (RLSD or LSD)
Transmitter Signal Element/
Terminal Timing (TT) —
DTE Source
113
24 (A)
11 ( B)
To DCE
U (A)
W (B)
Transmitter Signal Element Timing 114
(TXC) — DCE Source
15 (A)
12 (B)
From DCE
From DCE
Y (A)
AA (B)
Receiver Signal Element Timing
(RXC) — DCE Source
115
17 (A)
9 (B)
V (A)
X (B)
Local Loopback (LL)
141
18
To DCE
To DCE
L
Data Terminal (or DTE) Ready
(DTR)
108/1, /2 20
H
Loopback/Maintenance (RL)
Test Mode Indicator (TM)
140
142
21
25
To DCE
N
From DCE
NN
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
EIA-530A-to-RS449 DTE Adapter Cable
Used as an interface between the 25-position Sync Data Port connector and a
DTE’s RS449 connector.
530
Signal
DB37 449
DB25
Plug
Signal
Socket
Shield
TXD-A
1
2
1
4
Shield
TD-A
TXD-B 14
RXD-A
RXD-B 16
TXC-A 15
TXC-B 12
RXC-A 17
22 TD-B
RD-A
24 RD-B
TXC-A
23 TXC-B
RXC-A
26 RXC-B
RTS-A
25 RTS-B
CTS-A
3
6
5
8
RXC-B
RTS-A
9
4
7
RTS-B 19
CTS-A
5
9
CTS-B 13
DTR 20
27 CTS-B
12 DTR-A
13 RR-A
31 RR-B
11 DM-A
19 Sig. Common
14 RL
RLSD-A
8
RLSD-B 10
DSR
Sig. Common
6
7
RL 21
LL 18
10 LL
RCV. Common 23
TT-A 24
20 RCV. Common
17 TT-A
TT-B 11
35 TT-B
TM 25
18 TM
Sig. Common 22
29 DM-B
30 DTR-B
496-15147
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
The following table provides the pin assignments for the 25-position Sync Data
connector/interface and a DTE’s 37-position RS449 connector.
25-Pin
Plug
Pin #
37-Pin
Socket
Pin #
ITU/
CCITT #
Signal
Direction
—
Shield
—
1
1
Transmit Data (TXD/TD)
103
2 (A),
14 (B)
To DCE
4 (A),
22 (B)
Receive Data (RXD/RD)
Request to Send (RTS)
Clear to Send (CTS)
104
105
106
107
3 (A),
16 (B)
From DCE
To DCE
6 (A),
24 (B)
4 (A),
19 (B)
7 (A),
25 (B)
5 (A),
13 (B)
From DCE
From DCE
9 (A),
27 (B)
Data Set Ready/Data Mode
(DSR/DM)
6
11 (A)
Signal Ground (SG)
102A
109
7
—
19
Data Channel Received Line
Signal Detect/Receiver Ready
(RLSD/RR)
8 (A),
10 (B)
From DCE
13 (A),
31 (B)
Transmitter Signal Element
Timing/Transmit Timing (TXC) —
DCE Source
114
115
141
15 (A),
12 (B)
From DCE
From DCE
5 (A),
23 (B)
Receiver Signal Element Timing/
Receive Timing (RXC) —
DCE Source
17 (A),
9 (B)
8 (A),
26 (B)
Local Loopback (LL)
18
To DCE
To DCE
10
Data Terminal (or DTE) Ready
(DTR/TR)
108/1, /2 20
12 (A)
Remote Loopback (RL)
Receive Common (RC)
140
21
23
To DCE
—
14
102B
113
20, 29
Transmitter Signal Element/
Terminal Timing (TT) —
DTE Source
24 (A),
11 ( B )
To DCE
17 (A),
35 (B)
Test Mode (TM)
no connection
142
—
25
—
From DCE
—
18
30, 37
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
EIA-530A-to-X.21 DTE Adapter Cable
Used as an interface between the 25-position Sync Data Port connector and a
DTE’s X.21 connector.
530 DB25
X.21
Signal
DB15
Socket
Signal
Plug
TXD-A
TXD-B 14
RXD-A
2
2
9
4
TD-A
TD-B
RD-A
3
RXD-B 16
RXC-A 17
11 RD-B
RXC-A
13 RXC-B
RTS-A
10 RTS-B
RR-A
12 RR-B
6
RXC-B
RTS-A
9
4
3
RTS-B 19
RLSD-A
RLSD-B 10
8
5
Sig. Common
7
TT-A 24
TT-B 11
8
7
Sig. Common
TT-A
14 TT-B
496-15146
The following table provides the pin assignments for the 25-position Port 1 or
Port 2 connector/interface and a DTE’s 15-position X.21 connector/interface.
25-Pin
Plug
Pin #
15-Pin
Socket
Pin #
ITU/
CCITT #
Signal
Direction
Transmit Data (TXD/TD)
103
104
105
2 (A)
14 (B)
To DCE
2 (A),
9 (B)
Received Data (RXD/RD)
Request to Send (RTS)
Signal Ground/Common
3 (A)
16 (B)
From DCE
To DCE
4 (A),
11 (B)
4 (A)
19 (B)
3 (A),
10 (B)
102
109
7
—
8
Data Channel Received Line
Signal Detector/Receiver Ready
(RLSD/RR)
8 (A)
10 (B)
From DCE
5 (A),
12 (B)
Receiver Signal Element Timing
(RXC) — DCE Source
115
17 (A)
9 (B)
From DCE
To DCE
6 (A),
13 (B)
Transmitter Signal Element Timing/ 113
Terminal Timing (TT) —
DTE Source
24 (A)
11 ( B )
7 (A),
14 (B)
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
Voice APM Cables
This section provides the pin assignments for the FXO, FXS and E&M voice APM
50-pin Amphenol connectors (RJ27X socket), followed by the pin assignments for
the extension cables that can be used with these APMs.
FXO/FXS Voice APM Connector
The FXO/FXS Analog Voice APM uses a single 50-pin connector to provide eight
2-wire interfaces for connecting to analog voice equipment.
FXO/FXS 50-Pin Amphenol Connector
Port
Pin
26
1
Signal
1
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
29
4
32
7
35
10
38
13
41
16
44
19
47
22
All other pins are unconnected.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
E&M Voice APM Connector
The E&M Analog Voice APM uses a single 50-pin connector (RJ27X socket) to
provide eight 2-wire interfaces for connecting to analog voice equipment.
E&M 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (1 of 2)
Port
Pin
26
1
Function
Transmit tip
Transmit ring
Receive tip
Receive ring
E Lead
Signal
T
1
R
27
2
T1
R1
E
28
3
M Lead
M
2
3
4
29
4
Transmit tip
Transmit ring
Receive tip
Receive ring
E Lead
T
R
30
5
T1
R1
E
31
6
M Lead
M
32
7
Transmit tip
Transmit ring
Receive tip
Receive ring
E Lead
T
R
33
8
T1
R1
E
34
9
M Lead
M
35
10
36
11
37
12
Transmit tip
Transmit ring
Receive tip
Receive ring
E Lead
T
R
T1
R1
E
M Lead
M
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
E&M 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (2 of 2)
Port
Pin
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
25
50
Function
Signal
T
5
Transmit tip
Transmit ring
Receive tip
Receive ring
E Lead
R
T1
R1
E
M Lead
M
6
Transmit tip
Transmit ring
Receive tip
Receive ring
E Lead
T
R
T1
R1
E
M Lead
M
7
Transmit tip
Transmit ring
Receive tip
Receive ring
E Lead
T
R
T1
R1
E
M Lead
M
8
Transmit tip
Transmit ring
Receive tip
Receive ring
E Lead
T
R
T1
R1
E
M Lead
M
All
Signal Ground
Signal Battery
SG
SB
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
Extension Cables
Extension cables can be ordered for use with the 50-pin FXO, FXS and E&M
Voice APM connectors. They are all straight-through cables (i.e., Pin 1 on the
voice APM side is Pin 1 on the M66 block side of the cable), and they coincide
with the pins on the 50-pin APM connector.
The following table identifies these cables, indicates the voice APM it is used
with, and describes when you might use each:
Extension Cables
Extension Cable
Length Voice APM When Used
1 Amphenol plug-to- 3′
1 Amphenol plug
cable
E&M
FXO
FXS
To connect the voice APM’s 50-pin
Amphenol connector to the M66 block.
When the M66 block is further than five
feet from the APM connector, used as an
extension to the 5-foot cable normally
used.
(Twisted pair/25-pair:
1-26, 2-27, 3-28 . . .
25-50)
See FXO/FXS Voice APM Connector on
Page E-12 or E&M Voice APM
Connector on Page E-13 for pin
assignments.
1 Amphenol socket-
to-1 Amphenol plug
cable
25′
E&M
FXO
FXS
When the M66 block is further than five
feet from the APM’s connector, used as
an extension to the 5-foot 1 Amphenol
plug-to-1 Amphenol plug cable.
(Twisted pair/25-pair:
1-26, 2-27, 2-28 . . .
25-50)
See FXO/FXS Voice APM Connector on
Page E-12 or E&M Voice APM
Connector on Page E-13 for pin
assignments.
3 Amphenol plugs-to- 6′
1 Amphenol plug
FXO
FXS
To condense three voice APMs onto the
single M66 block connector.
connector assembly
Extend the cable using the 25-foot
1 Amphenol socket-to-1 Amphenol
plug 25-pair cable.
(Twisted pair: T1-R1
. . .T24-R24, S1-S2)
See 3 Amphenol Plugs-to-1 Amphenol
Plug Cable on Page E-17 for pin
assignments.
3 Amphenol plugs-to- 6′
4 Amphenol plugs
connector assembly
E&M
To consolidate signals from three voice
APMs and segregate four applications
onto four M66 blocks (e.g., all transmit
signals on one block, all receive signals
on a second block, all E&M signals on a
third, and all battery and signal ground
signals on the fourth).
(Twisted pair: T1-R1
. . .T24-R24,
TR1-RR1 . . .
TR24-RR24,
M1-E1 . . . M24-E24,
SG1-SG1 . . .
SG3-SG3)
Extend the cable using the 25-foot
1 Amphenol socket-to-1 Amphenol
plug 25-pair cable.
See 3 Amphenol Plugs-to-4 Amphenol
Plugs Cable starting on Page E-19 for
pin assignments.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
3 Amphenol Plugs-to-1 Amphenol Plug Cable
Connects
to APM
Plug
Connects
to APM
Pin Signal
Plug
M66
Plug
M66
Plug
Pin
1
Pin Signal
Pin
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
P4
P1
P2
P3
–
1
R Port 1
R Port 2
R Port 3
R Port 4
R Port 5
R Port 6
R Port 7
R Port 8
R Port 1
R Port 2
R Port 3
R Port 4
R Port 5
R Port 6
R Port 7
R Port 8
R Port 1
R Port 2
R Port 3
R Port 4
R Port 5
R Port 6
R Port 7
R Port 8
–
P4
P1
P2
P3
–
26
29
32
35
38
41
44
47
26
29
32
35
38
41
44
47
26
29
32
35
38
41
44
47
–
T Port 1
T Port 2
T Port 3
T Port 4
T Port 5
T Port 6
T Port 7
T Port 8
T Port 1
T Port 2
T Port 3
T Port 4
T Port 5
T Port 6
T Port 7
T Port 8
T Port 1
T Port 2
T Port 3
T Port 4
T Port 5
T Port 6
T Port 7
T Port 8
–
2
4
3
7
4
10
13
16
19
22
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
4
7
10
13
16
19
22
1
4
7
10
13
16
19
22
–
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
3 Amphenol Plugs-to-4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P1 (1 of 2)
P1 Pin # Designation Connects To Pin # Designation
Function
1
R (Port 1)
R1 (Port 1)
M (Port 1)
R (Port 2)
R1 (Port 2)
M1 (Port 2)
R (Port 3)
R1 (Port 3)
M (Port 3)
R (Port 4)
R1 (Port 4)
M (Port 4)
R (Port 5)
R1 (Port 5)
M (Port 5)
R (Port 6)
R1 (Port 6)
M (Port 6)
R (Port 7)
R1 (Port 7)
M (Port 7)
R (Port 8)
R1 (Port 8)
M (Port 8)
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P7
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
1–8
R (Port 1)
R1 (Port1)
M (Port 1)
R (Port 2)
R1 (Port 2)
M (Port 2)
R (Port 3)
R1 (Port 3)
M (Port 3)
R (Port 4)
R1 (Port 4)
M (Port 4)
R (Port 5)
R1 (Port 5)
M (Port 5)
R (Port 6)
R1 (Port 6)
M (Port 6)
R (Port 7)
R1 (Port 7)
M (Port 7)
R (Port 8)
R1 (Port 8)
M (Port 8)
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
2
3
4
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
5
6
7
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
SG
SG
Signal Ground
(Ports 1–8)
(Ports 1–8)
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
3 Amphenol Plugs-to-4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P1 (2 of 2)
P1 Pin # Designation Connects To Pin # Designation
Function
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 2)
T1 (Port 2)
E (Port 2)
T (Port 3)
T1 (Port 3)
E (Port 3)
T (Port 4)
T1 (Port 4)
E (Port 4)
T (Port 5)
T1 (Port 5)
E (Port 5)
T (Port 6)
T1 (Port 6)
E (Port 6)
T (Port 7)
T1 (Port 7)
E (Port 7)
T (Port 8)
T1 (Port 8)
E (Port 8)
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P7
26
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
31
32
32
32
33
33
33
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 2)
T1 (Port 2)
E (Port 2)
T (Port 3)
T1 (Port 3)
E (Port 3)
T (Port 4)
T1 (Port 4)
E (Port 4)
T (Port 5)
T1 (Port 5)
E (Port 5)
T (Port 6)
T1 (Port 6)
E (Port 6)
T (Port 7)
T1 (Port 7)
E (Port 7)
T (Port 8)
T1 (Port 8)
E (Port 8)
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
SB
(Ports 1–8)
26–33 SB
(Ports 1–8)
Signal Battery
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
3 Amphenol Plugs-to-4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P2 (1 of 2)
P2 Pin # Designation Connects To Pin # Designation
Function
1
R (Port 1)
R1 (Port 1)
M (Port 1)
R (Port 2)
R1 (Port 2)
M (Port 2)
R (Port 3)
R1 (Port 3)
M (Port 3)
R (Port 4)
R1 (Port 4)
M (Port 4)
R (Port 5)
R1 (Port 5)
M (Port 5)
R (Port 6)
R1 (Port 6)
M (Port 6)
R (Port 7)
R1 (Port 7)
M (Port 7)
R (Port 8)
R1 (Port 8)
M (Port 8)
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P7
9
R (Port 9)
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
2
9
R1 (Port 9)
M (Port 9)
3
9
4
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
15
15
16
16
16
9–16
R (Port 10)
R1 (Port 10)
M (Port 10)
R (Port 11)
R1 (Port 11)
M (Port 11)
R (Port 12)
R1 (Port 12)
M (Port 12)
R (Port 13)
R1 (Port 13)
M (Port 13)
R (Port 14)
R1 (Port 14)
M (Port 14)
R (Port 15)
R1 (Port 15)
M (Port 15)
R (Port 16)
R1 (Port 16)
M (Port 16)
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
5
6
7
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
SG
SG
Signal Ground
(Ports 1–8)
(Ports 9–16)
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
3 Amphenol Plugs-to-4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P2 (2 of 2)
P2 Pin # Designation Connects To Pin # Designation
Function
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P7
34
34
34
35
35
35
36
36
36
37
37
37
38
38
38
39
39
39
40
40
40
41
41
41
T (Port 9)
T1 (Port 9)
E (Port 9)
T (Port 10)
T1 (Port 10)
E (Port 10)
T (Port 11)
T1 (Port 11)
E (Port 11)
T (Port 12)
T1 (Port 12)
E (Port 12)
T (Port 13)
T1 (Port 13)
E (Port 13)
T (Port 14)
T1 (Port 14)
E (Port 14)
T (Port 15)
T1 (Port 15)
E (Port 15)
T (Port 16)
T1 (Port 16)
E (Port 16)
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
SB
(Ports 1–8)
34–41 SB
(Ports 9–16)
Signal Battery
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
3 Amphenol Plugs-to-4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P3 (1 of 2)
P3 Pin # Designation Connects To Pin # Designation
Function
1
R (Port 1)
R1 (Port 1)
M (Port 1)
R (Port 2)
R1 (Port 2)
M (Port 2)
R (Port 3)
R1 (Port 3)
M (Port 3)
R (Port 4)
R1 (Port 4)
M (Port 4)
R (Port 5)
R1 (Port 5)
M (Port 5)
R (Port 6)
R1 (Port 6)
M (Port 6)
R (Port 7)
R1 (Port 7)
M (Port 7)
R (Port 8)
R1 (Port 8)
M (Port 8)
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P7
17
17
17
18
18
18
19
19
19
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
22
23
23
23
24
24
25
R (Port 17)
R1 (Port 17)
M (Port 17)
R (Port 18)
R1 (Port 18)
M (Port 18)
R (Port 19)
R1 (Port 19)
M (Port 19)
R (Port 20)
R1 (Port 20)
M (Port 20)
R (Port 21)
R1 (Port 21)
M (Port 21)
T (Port 22)
R1 (Port 22)
M (Port 22)
R (Port 23)
R1 (Port 23)
M (Port 23)
R (Port 24)
R1 (Port 24)
M (Port 24)
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
2
3
4
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
5
6
7
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
Transmit Ring
Receive Ring
M Lead
SG
(Ports 1–8)
17–24 SG
(Port 17–24)
Signal Ground
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
3 Amphenol Plugs-to-4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P3 (2 of 2)
P3 Pin # Designation Connects To Pin # Designation
Function
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
T (Port 1)
T1 (Port 1)
E (Port 1)
T (Port 2)
T1 (Port 2)
E (Port 2)
T (Port 3)
T1 (Port 3)
E (Port 3)
T (Port 4)
T1 (Port 4)
E (Port 4)
T (Port 5)
T1 (Port 5)
E (Port 5)
T (Port 6)
T1 (Port 6)
E (Port 6)
T (Port 7)
T1 (Port 7)
E (Port 7)
T (Port 8)
T1 (Port 8)
E (Port 8)
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P4
P5
P6
P7
42
42
42
43
43
43
44
44
44
45
45
45
46
46
46
47
47
47
48
48
48
49
49
49
T (Port 17)
T1 (Port 17)
E (Port 17)
T (Port 18)
T1 (Port 18)
E (Port 18)
T (Port 19)
T1 (Port 19)
E (Port 19)
T (Port 20)
T1 (Port 20)
E (Port 20)
T (Port 21)
T1 (Port 21)
E (Port 21)
T (Port 22)
T1 (Port 22)
E (Port 22)
T (Port 23)
T1 (Port 23)
E (Port 23)
T (Port 24)
T1 (Port 24)
E (Port 24)
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
Transmit Tip
Receive Tip
E Lead
SB
(Ports 1–8)
42–49 SB
(Ports 17–24)
Signal Battery
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
OCU Port
The OCU-DP APM can have either two or six ports, each port having an RJ48S
connector. Connect the OCU port to the DDS network using one of the following
cables:
H
H
14-foot DDS cable
25-foot DDS cable
OCU Port Connector
The OCU-DP port is a USOC RJ48S connector. The following table shows pin
assignments and the purpose of each.
Function
Circuit
Pin #
Transmit ring
Transmit tip
Receive tip
Receive ring
R
1
2
7
8
T
T1
R1
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
E-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cables, Connectors, and Pin Assignments
T1 Mass Termination Cable
A T1 mass termination cable is available to connect up to seven NAMs mounted
in a 9000 Series Access Carrier to an M66 block. The T1 mass termination cable
is a 5-foot RJ48H cable consisting of a 50-pin plug at one end and seven RJ48C
plugs at the other end. The following shows pin assignments for the RJ48H
connector.
RJ48H Connector Pinouts for T1 Mass Termination Cable
Circuits
2
3
4
1
R1
T
R
T1
Line #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Receive Tip from Network
2
3
4
Receive Ring from Network
Transmit Tip to Network
Transmit Ring to Network
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
E-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
F
Specification
Criteria
Network Access Module (NAM)
Approvals
FCC Part 15
FCC Part 68
Class A digital device.
Refer to the equipment’s label for the
Registration Number.
Industry Canada
Refer to the equipment’s label for the
Certification Number.
UL
Refer to the equipment’s label for the UL listing.
CSA – Safety
Refer to the equipment’s label for CSA safety
information.
Weight
T1 NAM
1 lb. 2 oz. (.510 kg)
6 oz. (.170 kg)
T1 I/O Card
Physical Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
Shock and vibration
35°F to 122°F (1.7°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5% to 85% (noncondensing)
Withstands normal shipping and handling
Power Consumption
9.4 watts, 0.78 amps input current at 12 volts
Network 1/2 T1 Interface
Physical Interface (USA)
Physical Interface (Canada)
Framing Format
RJ48C
CA81A using adapter cable
D4, ESF
AMI, B8ZS
Coding Format
Line Build-Out (LBO)
ANSI PRM
Bit Stuffing
0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15 dB, –22.5 dB
Selectable
FCC Part 68, AT&T TR 62411
Selectable
Yellow Alarm Generation
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
Specification
Criteria
DSX-1 Interface (9161 only)
Physical Interface
Framing Format
Coding Format
DB15 socket
D4, ESF
AMI, B8ZS
DTE Line Equalization
5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet
(0 to 196.5 meters)
Selectable
Send AIS
DTE Ports/Interfaces
Standards
Rates
EIA-530A, V.35, RS-449, V.11, X.21
Nx64 – 64K to 1.536 Mb
Nx56 – 56K to 1.344 Mb
COM Port/Interface
Data Rates
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4 , 57.6, and 115.2 kbps.
57.6 and 115.2 kbps are recommended for FTP
download only.
DBM (Backup) connector
One 8-position modular keyed USOC RJ45 jack
(reserved for future use)
Clocking Sources
T1 network interface (1 or 2), any port, internal clock,
DSX-1 T1 interface (9161 only), or external clock
Loopbacks
Standard
Network Line Loopback, Network Payload Loopback,
V.54 Loop 2 (DCLB) and V.54 Loop 3 (DTPLB)
Additional
Network Repeater Loopback, DTE Loopback
For 9161 Only
DSX-1 Line Loopback, DSX-1 Payload Loopback, and
DSX-1 Repeater Loopback
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
F-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
Specification
Sync Data APM
Weight
Criteria
Sync Data APM
Sync Data I/O card
15 oz. (.425 kg)
6 oz. (.170 kg)
Size
Sync Data APM
Sync Data I/O card
11.58″ x 8.00″ (29.41 cm x 20.32 cm)
2.90″ x 10.15″ (7.37 cm x 25.78 cm)
Physical Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
35°F to 122°F (1.7°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5% to 85% (noncondensing)
Shock and vibration
Withstands normal shipping and handling
Power Consumption
DTE Ports/Interfaces
5.8 watts, 0.48 amps input current at 12 volts
Standards
Rates
EIA-530A, V.35, RS-449, V.11, X.21
Nx64 – 64K to 1.536 Mb
Nx56 – 56K to 1.344 Mb
Loopbacks
Standard
V.54 Loop 2 (DCLB) and V.54 Loop 3 (DTPLB)
DTE Loopback
Additional
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
F-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
Specification
Dual DSX APM
Weight
Criteria
DSX APM
DSX I/O card
15 oz. (.425 kg)
6 oz. (.170 kg)
Size
DSX APM
DSX I/O card
11.58″ x 8.00″ (29.41 cm x 20.32 cm)
2.90″ x 10.15″ (7.37 cm x 25.78 cm)
Physical Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
35°F to 122°F (1.7°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5% to 85% (noncondensing)
Shock and vibration
Withstands normal shipping and handling
Power Consumption
DSX-1 Interface
3.5 watts, 0.29 amps input current at 12 volts
15-position (DB15) subminiature connector
Physical Interface
Framing Format
Coding Format
DB15 socket
D4, ESF
AMI, B8ZS
DTE Line Equalization
5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet
(0 to 196.5 meters)
Selectable
Send AIS
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
F-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
Specification
Criteria
Voice APMs
Weight
E&M APM
FXO APM
FXS APM
Voice I/O card
14 oz. (.397 kg)
1 lb. (.454 kg)
1 lb. (.454 kg)
6 oz. (.170 kg)
Size
E&M/FXO/FXS APM
Voice I/O card
11.58″ x 8.00″ (29.41 cm x 20.32 cm)
2.90″ x 10.15″ (7.37 cm x 25.78 cm)
Physical Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
35°F to 122°F (1.7°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5% to 85% (noncondensing)
Shock and vibration
Withstands normal shipping and handling
Cable Length
Maximum cable length
18,000 feet using 26 AWG
Power Consumption
E&M APM
3.1 watts, 0.26 amps input current at 12 volts
3.5 watts, 0.29 amps input current at 12 volts
10.1 watts, 0.84 amps input current at 12 volts
13.3 watts, 1.11 amps input current at 12 volts
FXO APM
FXS APM (8 lines talking)
FXS APM (8 lines ringing)
Interface Connector
50-pin amphenol connector (RJ27X)
Operating Modes
E&M
E&M
Transmit Only
FXO
FXS
DPT
FXO
FXO DN
FXO DN Wink
DPO
FXS
FXS DN
FXS DN Wink
PLAR
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
F-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
Specification
Criteria
Signaling Types
E&M
Type I
Type II
Type IV
Type V
FXO
FXS
Loop Start
Loop Start/Forward Disconnect
Ground Start
Loop Start
Loop Start/Forward Disconnect
Ground Start
Ground Start Immediate
Ground Start Automatic
PLAR D3
PLAR D4
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
F-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
Specification
OCU-DP APM
Weight
Criteria
2-port OCU–DP APM
6-port OCU-DP APM
OCU–DP I/O card
0.800 lbs. (.362 kg)
1.052 lbs. (.477 kg)
0.286 lbs. (.130 kg)
Size
OCU-DP APM
OCU-DP I/O card
11.58″ x 8.00″ (29.41 cm x 20.32 cm)
2.90″ x 10.15″ (7.37 cm x 25.78 cm)
Physical Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
35°F to 122°F (1.7°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5% to 85% (noncondensing)
Shock and vibration
Withstands normal shipping and handling
Power Consumption (max)
2-Port OCU
2.78 watts, 0.232 amps input current at 12 volts
5.04 watts, 0.420 amps input current at 12 volts
6-Port OCU
DDS Ports
Standards
AT&T PUB 62310, Bellcore TA-TSY-00077, ANSI
T1.410, AT&T PUB 61330, AT&T TR41458
Rates
56 kbps, 64 kbps Clear Channel, 4-wire Switched 56
Loopbacks
DS-0, OCU Line, OCU Data, OCU, Local and Remote
Latching and Non-Latching DSU/CSU
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
F-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
This page intentionally left blank.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
F-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment List
G
Equipment
Feature Number
2-Slot Housing
2-Slot Housing, 120 Vac Power Supply, Cables, Manuals
9002-B1-200
2-Slot Housing, 9161 Single T1 NAM, 120 Vac Power Supply,
Cables, Manuals
9162-A1-201
2-Slot Housing, 9261 Dual T1 NAM, 120 Vac Power Supply, Cables, 9262-A1-201
Manuals
5-Slot Housing
Desktop 5-Slot Housing, 120 Vac Power Supply, Cables, Manuals
9005-B1-200
9005-B1-209
Rack-Mount 5-Slot Housing (without bezel and chassis skins),
120 Vac Power Supply, Cables, Manuals
Desktop 5-Slot Housing, DC Power Supply, Cables, Manuals
9005-B1-500
9005-B1-509
Rack-Mount 5-Slot Housing (without bezel and chassis skins), DC
Power Supply, Cables, Manuals
Desktop 5-Slot Housing, 9161 Single T1 NAM, 120 Vac Power
Supply, Cables, Manuals
9165-A1-201
9165-A1-209
9165-A1-501
9165-A1-509
9265-A1-201
9265-A1-209
9265-A1-501
9265-A1-509
Rack-Mount 5-Slot Housing (without bezel and chassis skins),
9161 Single T1 NAM, AC Power Supply, Cables, Manuals
Desktop 5-Slot Housing, 9161 Single T1 NAM, DC Power Supply,
Cables, Manuals
Rack-Mount 5-Slot Housing (without bezel and chassis skins),
9161 Single T1 NAM, DC Power Supply, Cables, Manuals
Desktop 5-Slot Housing, 9261 Dual T1 NAM, 120 Vac Power
Supply, Cables, Manuals
Rack-Mount 5-Slot Housing (without bezel and chassis skins),
9261 Dual T1 NAM, AC Power Supply, Cables, Manuals
Desktop 5-Slot Housing, 9261 Dual T1 NAM, DC Power Supply,
Cables, Manuals
Rack-Mount 5-Slot Housing (without bezel and chassis skins),
9261 Dual T1 NAM, DC Power Supply, Cables, Manuals
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment List
Equipment
Feature Number
Access Carrier
14-Slot Access Carrier, Fan Tray, Baffle, Universal AC Power
Supply, Cables, Manuals
9007-B1-409
1xT1 Carrier NAM Spare, 9161 Single T1 NAM, NAM Manual
1xT1 Carrier NAM with I/O, Cables, Manuals
2xT1 Carrier NAM Spare, 9261 Dual T1 NAM, NAM Manual
2xT1 Carrier NAM with I/O, Cables, Manuals
Access Carrier Parts
9161-B2-902
9167-B1-902
9261-B2-902
9267-B1-902
Access Carrier Baffle Assembly
9007-S1-897
9007-S1-898
9007-S1-899
Universal Power Supply Fan Tray
Access Carrier Auxiliary Fan Tray
T1 NAM Upgrade Kits
Software to upgrade 9161 T1 NAM for FXO capability, software
instructions, current FXO feature (9109-F1-658)
9161-F1-658
9161-F1-620
9261-F1-620
9261-F1-902
Software to upgrade the 9161 Single T1 NAM, new NAM I/O, and
manuals
Software to upgrade the 9261 Dual T1 NAM, new NAM I/O, and
manuals
Hardware and Software Upgrade, 9261 Overlay, E8 Jumper, 2xT1
I/O, Software, Cables, Manuals
Rack/Wall Mounting Kits
Mounting Brackets for 5-slot
9001-F1-890
9008-F1-893
Universal 2/5-slot Wall Mount Kit
Power Supplies
120 Vac Power Supply (for 2-slot housing)
120 Vac Power Supply (for 5-slot housing)
DC Power Supply (for 5-slot housing)
Universal Power Supply (for Access Carrier)
T1 NAMs
9002-F1-020
9005-F1-020
9005-F1-050
9007-F1-040
9161 Single T1 Network Access Module (NAM)
9261 Dual T1 Network Access Module (NAM)
9161-B1-902
9261-B1-902
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment List
Equipment
Feature Number
APMs
High-Speed Synchronous Data Application Module (APM)
FXS Analog Voice Application Module (APM), 2-Wire
FXO Analog Voice Application Module (APM), 2-Wire
E&M Analog Voice Application Module (APM), 4-Wire
Dual DSX Application Module (APM)
OCU-DP 2-Port Application Module (APM)
OCU-DP 6-Port Application Module (APM)
Manual
9109-F1-604
9109-F1-648
9109-F1-658
9109-F1-668
9109-F1-692
9109-F1-622
9109-F1-626
Model 916x/926x T1 Access Mux Technical Reference (paper),
9161-A2-GH30
9161-M2-001
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment List
Equipment
Feature Number Cable Part Number
Cables/Connectors
Network Interface Cable, 20 ft.
V.35 Interconnect Cable, 1 ft.
V.11/X.21 Interconnect Cable, 1 ft.
RS449 Interconnect Cable, 1 ft.
3100-F1-500
3100-F1-570
3100-F1-571
3100-F1-580
3100-F2-540
035-0209-2031
035-0244-0031
035-0302-0131
035-0245-0031
035-0314-1431
DB25 COM Port Cable (25 D to 8 mod),
14 ft.
DB9 COM Port Cable (9 DSUB-to-8 mod),
14 ft.
3100-F2-550
035-0313-1431
LAN COM Port Cable (8 mod-to-8 mod)
3100-F2-910
035-0315-1431
035-0320-0531
Voice Cable (Amphenol plug-Amphenol plug, 9008-F1-531
25 pairs), 6 ft.
Voice Cable (Amphenol socket-Amphenol
plug, 25 pairs), 25 ft.
9008-F1-532
9008-F1-533
9008-F1-534
035-0321-2531
035-0318-0631
035-0319-0631
Voice Connector (3 Amphenol plug-4
Amphenol plug), 6 ft.
Voice Connector (3 Amphenol plug-1
Amphenol plug), 6 ft.
M66 Block (with 2 socket 50-pin connectors) 9008-F1-535
__
Modem Cable (8-pin RJ45-to-DB25 plug)
RJ48S DDS Network Cable (14 ft.)
RJ48S DDS Cable (25 ft.)
9008-F1-550
3600-F3-501
3600-F3-502
9007-F1-500
035-0336-1431
035-0267-1431
035-0267-2531
035-0363-0531
T1 Mass Termination Cable (50-pin plug-to-
seven RJ48S plug), 5 ft.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
G-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal. An all ones signal transmitted to maintain transmission continuity
and to indicate to the receiving terminal that a transmission fault exists at either the
transmitting terminal or upstream of the transmitting signal. Sometimes referred to as Blue
Alarm.
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion. A line coding technique used to accommodate the ones density
requirements of E1 or T1 lines.
APM
AWG
Application Module.
American Wire Gauge. An indication of wire size. The heavier the gauge, the lower the
AWG number, and the lower the impedance.
BES
Bursty Error Seconds. A second in which more than one, but less than 320 CRC6 error
events have occurred.
BPV
Bipolar Violation. In a bipolar signal, a one (mark, pulse) which has the same polarity as its
predecessor.
B8ZS
Bipolar with Eight Zero Substitution. Encoding scheme for transmitting clear channel
signals over a T1 line.
COM port
Communications port. A computer’s serial communications port used to transmit to and
receive data from a modem. The modem connects directly to this port.
configuration option
Device software that sets specific operating parameters for the device. Sometimes
referred to as straps.
CRC
CSS
Cyclic Redundancy Check. A mathematical method of confirming the integrity of received
digital data.
Controlled Slip Seconds. A period in which a frame was added or deleted because of a
variance in timing.
CSU
DCE
Channel Service Unit. A device that connects service user equipment or a DSU to the local
digital telephone loop.
Data Communications Equipment. The equipment that provides the functions required to
establish, maintain, and end a connection. It also provides the signal conversion required
for communication between the DTE and the network.
DID
DPO
DPT
DSU
Direct Inward Dialing.
Dial Pulse Originating.
Dial Pulse Terminating.
Data Service Unit. Data communications equipment that provides timing, signal
regeneration, and an interface to data terminal equipment. A subrate DSU/CSU is normally
referred to as a DSU.
DSX-1
DS0
Digital Signal Cross Connect level 1. An interconnection point for terminals, multiplexers
and transmission facilities.
Digital Signal level 0 (zero). A 64 kbps digital telecommunications signal or channel.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
GL-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
DS1
Digital Signal level 1 (one). A digital signal transmitted at the rate of 1.544 Mbps in North
America.
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment. The equipment, such as a computer or terminal, that provides
data in the form of digital signals for transmission.
DTMF
D4
Dual Tone Multifrequency. The basis of operation for a pushbutton telephone.
The transmission standard that specifies 12 frames as a superframe that is used for frame
synchronization and to locate signaling bits.
EER
Excessive Error Rate. An error rate that is greater than the threshold that has been
configured in the device.
EON
ES
End of Number.
Errored second. A second with one or more ESF error events (one or more CRC6 error
events or OOFs).
ESD
ESF
FCC
FDL
FXO
ElectroStatic discharge. An undesirable discharge of static electricity that can damage
equipment and degrade electrical circuitry.
Extended Superframe. The T1 transmission standard that specifies 24 frames as an
extended superframe to be used for frame synchronization and to locate signaling bits.
Federal Communications Commission. The Board of Commissioners that regulates all
electrical communications that originate in the United States.
Facility Data Link. The selected framing bits in the ESF format used in a wide-area link that
are used for control, monitoring, and testing.
Foreign Exchange Office. An APM that extends voice channel connectivity to remote
switching equipment. The FXO interface appears as a telephone to the connecting
equipment.
FXODN
FXS
Foreign Exchange Office Software-Defined Network.
Foreign Exchange Station. An APM that provides voice channel connectivity directly to
handsets or to PBX equipment.
FXSDN
ICMP
Foreign Exchange Station Software-Defined Network.
Internet Control Management Protocol. Internet protocol that allows for the generation of
error messages, tests packets, and information messages related to IP.
IP
Internet Protocol. An open networking protocol used for internet packet delivery.
ITU
International Telecommunication Union. The telecommunications agency of the United
Nations, established to provide standardized communications procedures and practices.
Before March 1993 it was called CCITT.
LBO
LCD
Line Build-out. The amount of attenuation of the transmitted signal that is used to
compensate for the length of wire between the transmitter and the receiver.
Liquid Crystal Display. Thin glass plates containing liquid crystal material. When voltage is
applied, the amount of light able to pass through the glass plates is altered so that
messages can be displayed.
LED
LLB
Light Emitting Diode. A light or status indicator that glows in response to the presence of a
certain condition (e.g., an alarm).
Line Loopback. A test in which the received signal on the network interface is looped back
to the network without change.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
GL-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
LOF
Loss of Frame. Occurs when a DS1 terminal is unable to synchronize on the DS1 signal
for some interval.
LOFC
Loss of Frame Count. The number of LOFs declared.
loopback
A diagnostic procedure that sends a test message back to its origination point. Used to
test various portions of a data link in order to isolate an equipment or data line problem.
LOS
MIB
Loss of Signal. The T1 line condition where there are no pulses.
Management Information Base. A database of managed objects used by SNMP to provide
network management information and device control.
MUX
Multiplexer. A device used to interleave or simultaneously transmit multiple independent
data streams into a single high-speed data stream. Multiplexing techniques include FDM
(frequency division multiplexing), TDM (time division multiplexing), and STDM (statistical
time division multiplexing).
NAM
Network Access Module. A type of CCA that accesses or acts as an interface with the
network.
OCU-DP
OOF
Office Channel Unit–Data Port.
Out Of Frame. An error condition in which frame synchronization bits are in error.
Off-Premises Extension.
OPX
PAD
Packet Assembly and Disassembly. The term PAD often is used with regard to
X.25 networks; however, it can apply to any packet-switched network, such as frame relay.
PBX
Private Branch Exchange. Telephone switching equipment dedicated to one customer. A
PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network.
PDU
PDV
Protocol Data Unit. A message containing protocol-specific information.
Pulse Density Violation. The number of ones (marks, pulses) is not adequate for the line
requirement.
PLAR
PPP
Private Line Automatic Ringdown.
Point-to-Point Protocol, as specified by Internet RFC 1661.
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network. A network shared among many users who can use
telephones to establish connections between two points. Also known as dial network.
QRSS
Quasi-Random Signal. A test pattern simulating a random pattern of digital ones and zeros
used to simulate normal transmission.
RBS
RIP
SES
Robbed Bit Signaling. Signaling used for voice-call processing over a T1 line.
Routing Information Protocol. A protocol for exchanging routing information.
Severely Errored Seconds. Usually defined as a second during which a specific number of
CRC errors was exceeded, or an OOF or other critical error occurred.
SLIP
SNMP
UAS
Vac
Serial Line Internet Protocol. Protocol for serial operation on an internet.
Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocol for open networking management.
Unavailable Seconds. A count of one-second intervals when service is unavailable.
Volts alternating current.
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
GL-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
VF
Voice Frequency. The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound
(usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz). This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal.
virtual circuit
Yellow Alarm
A logical link/connection or packet-switching mechanism established between two devices
at the start of transmission.
An outgoing signal transmitted when a DS1 terminal has determined that it has lost the
incoming signal.
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
GL-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Numbers
APM
E&M Voice, 1-5
A
FXO Voice, 1-5
FXS Voice, 1-5
Access
access carrier, 1-3
security, 4-3
Access Type, 6-8
T1 access unit with high speed data and drop &
assign
Alternate Dial-Out Directory, 5-65
async terminal interface, direct management control,
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
IN-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
B
primary, 5-49
secondary, 5-50
Bit Stuffing, 5-8
C
cable
Communication Port
components
EIA 530A-to-RS449 DTE adapter, E-9
EIA 530A-to-X.21 DTE Adapter, E-11
Configuration
copy, 8-12
Call
Retry, 5-65, 8-6, 9-19
order, 5-5
changing
channels
Circuit Identifier, 5-11
Configuration options
Clock Failure Alarm
Configuration Worksheets, A-1
configure
Primary, 5-51
Secondary, 5-51
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
IN-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
dialing out
connector
SNMP Traps, 8-5
Control
Directory Numbers
Disconnect Time, 5-55, 5-62
displaying
control
document
creating
summary, ix
DSX-1
D
Delete key, 4-5
E
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
IN-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
file transfer, 8-9
Enter key, 4-5
Enterprise Specific Traps, 5-76
function keys
Esc key, 4-5
FXO/FXS, 50-Pin Amphenol Connector, E-12
External Device
setting up communication port for, 5-57
G
gender adapter/changer, E-3
General Traps, 5-76
F
H
hardware revision
feature numbers
access carrier, G-2
housing
access carrier, 1-3
Field
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
IN-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Line Framing Format
I
Inactivity Timeout, 5-55, 5-62
interface
Link Traps, 5-77
async terminal/user, 4-3
Interface Status
logging
Invalid
Login
Character, 9-18
IP connectivity, 1-8
K
M
keys
Management
L
Management and Communication
limiting
Line Coding Format
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
IN-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Network interface
Messages
messages
system error, 9-18
NMS IP Validation, 5-72, 6-8
No
Monitor Pattern
O
OCU-DP ports
N
OCU-DP tests
Operating Mode
nam2_low.ocd, 8-10
Network
network
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
IN-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Port Status
P
Parity, 5-54
Matching Error, 9-18
Performance Statistics
Port Type, 5-17, 5-53
power supply, 1-10
pin assignments
R
E&M voice APM connector, E-13
FXO/FXS voice APM connector, E-12
FXS voice APM connector, E-12
LAN adapter, E-4
Return (Enter) key, 4-5
right arrow key, 4-5
T1 Network Interface Connector, E-5
Routing
Please Wait, 7-17
port
Rx Gain (dB)
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
SNMP
S
screen
MIB to User Interface Command Cross-Reference,
security, 1-10, 4-3, 5-4, 8-3
selecting
Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready, 5-19
Send Pattern
setting up for, 5-70
SNMP Traps, 5-75
serial, APM number, 7-2
Session
software
Spacebar, 4-5
set
selecting performance intervals for display, 7-14
setting up
Signaling Type
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
IN-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
status
Terminating Impedance (ohms)
Test
subnet
routing using different, B-5
system
System Alarm Relay, 5-66
T
T1
Network Interface Connector, E-5
Telnet
9161-A2-GH30-30
April 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Transmit Timing, 5-9
Traps
V
traps
voice ports
VT100-compatible terminal, direct management control,
Trunk Cond in CGA
W
Tx Attenuation (dB)
U
upgradability, 1-6
April 1998
9161-A2-GH30-30
IN-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|